alcatel-lucent 1665 - nokia documentation

Alcatel-Lucent 16651665 DATA MULTIPLEXER EXPLORE | RELEASE 2.1APPLICATIONS AND PLANNING GUIDE

365-372-331R2.1CC109454066

JULY 2007ISSUE 1

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of theirrespective owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2007 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Notice

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Although every effort has been made to make this document as accurate,complete, and clear as possible, Alcatel-Lucent and its predecessors assume no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Notification and Repair Information

This equipment is designed to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Thisequipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual,may cause interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residence is likely to cause harmful interference, in whichcase, the users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.

Security

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network. In such an event, applicable tariffs requirethat the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent and its predecessors cannot be responsible for such charges and will notmake any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

Limited Warranty

The terms and conditions of sale include a 1-year warranty on hardware and a 90-day warranty on applicable software.

Ordering information

To order more copies of this document or other Alcatel-Lucent documents, please contact the Customer Information Center (CIC) atCICWeb-Site(http://www.lucentdocs.com).

Technical support telephone number

For technical assistance, call the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support Services at 1-866-582-3688. This number is monitored 24 hours a day.

Information product support telephone number

You can also call this telephone number to provide comments on the 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore or to suggest enhancements. Commentsor suggestions for enhancements can also be emailed to theComments Hotline([email protected]) and/or entered online at theOnline Comment Form(http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/).

http://www.lucentdocs.com



[email protected]

[email protected]

http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/


Contents

About this information product

Purpose.......................................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxi

Reason for reissue.................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxi

Intended audience.................................................................................................................................................................... xxiixxii

How to use this information product.............................................................................................................................. xxiixxii

Conventions used................................................................................................................................................................... xxiiixxiii

Related information............................................................................................................................................................... xxiiixxiii

Information product support.............................................................................................................................................. xxivxxiv

Technical support.................................................................................................................................................................... xxivxxiv

How to order ............................................................................................................................................................................ xxivxxiv

How to comment.................................................................................................................................................................... xxivxxiv

1 System overview

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1

Overview of the 1665 Data Multiplexer portfolio...................................................................................................... 1-21-2

Introduction to 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore........................................................................................................... 1-41-4

Feature release plan............................................................................................................................................................... 1-121-12

2 Features

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1

Hardware features..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-22-2

In-service upgrades.................................................................................................................................................................. 2-42-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

iii

Networking capabilities.......................................................................................................................................................... 2-52-5

Cross-connection types........................................................................................................................................................... 2-72-7

Management and operations features............................................................................................................................... 2-92-9

Synchronization features..................................................................................................................................................... 2-132-13

3 Topologies

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1

Optical topologies..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23-2

Service applications................................................................................................................................................................. 3-33-3

Small or medium-sized business access.......................................................................................................................... 3-43-4

Wireless optical build-out...................................................................................................................................................... 3-63-6

Ethernet extension.................................................................................................................................................................... 3-83-8

Hitless bandwidth provisioning with LCAS............................................................................................................... 3-103-10

Packet topologies.................................................................................................................................................................... 3-123-12

Ethernet services..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-143-14

4 Product description

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1

Shelf description........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-24-2

Circuit pack codes.................................................................................................................................................................... 4-94-9

Group C circuit packs.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-114-11

Main circuit pack descriptions.......................................................................................................................................... 4-154-15

Control circuit packs............................................................................................................................................................. 4-184-18

Power specifications.............................................................................................................................................................. 4-224-22

Cabling ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-234-23

5 Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

iv 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Maintenance

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-45-4

Multi-level operations............................................................................................................................................................. 5-55-5

IAO LAN ports (detail) ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-95-9

Operations philosophy.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-125-12

Alcatel-Lucent Operations Interworking (OI)............................................................................................................ 5-135-13

Multi-vendor Operations Interworking.......................................................................................................................... 5-155-15

Data Communications Channel (DCC)......................................................................................................................... 5-165-16

Software download (generic)............................................................................................................................................. 5-195-19

Database backup and restore............................................................................................................................................. 5-215-21

Maintenance signaling.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-225-22

Fault detection, isolation, and reporting....................................................................................................................... 5-235-23

Loopbacks and tests.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-245-24

WaveStar® CIT

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-255-25

Introduction to theWaveStar® CIT ............................................................................................................................... 5-265-26

WaveStar® CIT access......................................................................................................................................................... 5-275-27

Protection switching

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-305-30

Line protection switching................................................................................................................................................... 5-315-31

Path protection switching (path switched rings)....................................................................................................... 5-325-32

Equipment protection............................................................................................................................................................ 5-335-33

Performance monitoring

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-345-34

Performance monitoring terms......................................................................................................................................... 5-355-35

DS1 performance monitoring parameters..................................................................................................................... 5-395-39

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

v

DS3 performance monitoring parameters..................................................................................................................... 5-455-45

VT1.5 performance parameters........................................................................................................................................ 5-515-51

STS-N performance parameters....................................................................................................................................... 5-535-53

OC-N performance parameters......................................................................................................................................... 5-555-55

Ethernet performance monitoring parameters............................................................................................................. 5-585-58

Performance monitoring data storage............................................................................................................................ 5-605-60

Performance parameter thresholds.................................................................................................................................. 5-615-61

TCA transmission to OS..................................................................................................................................................... 5-625-62

SNMP parameters and traps.............................................................................................................................................. 5-635-63

Provisioning

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-755-75

Default provisioning.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-765-76

Remote provisioning............................................................................................................................................................. 5-775-77

Cross-connect provisioning................................................................................................................................................ 5-785-78

Automatic provisioning on circuit pack replacement.............................................................................................. 5-795-79

Port-state provisioning......................................................................................................................................................... 5-815-81

Channel-state provisioning................................................................................................................................................. 5-825-82

Flow control (VLNC15/30 circuit packs).................................................................................................................... 5-835-83

Reports

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-845-84

Alarm report ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-855-85

Performance monitoring reports....................................................................................................................................... 5-865-86

State reports.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-875-87

Provisioning reports.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-885-88

Maintenance history reports............................................................................................................................................... 5-895-89

Version/equipment list.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-905-90

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vi 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Administration

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-915-91

Software upgrades.................................................................................................................................................................. 5-925-92

IP Access for network management............................................................................................................................... 5-935-93

Time and date synchronization......................................................................................................................................... 5-985-98

Office alarms interface...................................................................................................................................................... 5-1005-100

Remote NE status................................................................................................................................................................ 5-1015-101

SONET Network size........................................................................................................................................................ 5-1045-104

Directory services................................................................................................................................................................ 5-1055-105

Security .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1085-108

Password administration (CIT and system).............................................................................................................. 5-1105-110

User-defined miscellaneous discrete interface......................................................................................................... 5-1155-115

6 System planning and engineering

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1

Physical arrangements

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-36-3

Shelf configurations................................................................................................................................................................. 6-46-4

Physical shelf specifications................................................................................................................................................. 6-76-7

Cabinet installation................................................................................................................................................................... 6-96-9

Installation cabling................................................................................................................................................................. 6-126-12

Environmental considerations........................................................................................................................................... 6-136-13

Power and electrical requirements.................................................................................................................................. 6-146-14

Cross-connections

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-176-17

Cross-connect types............................................................................................................................................................... 6-186-18

Allowable cross-connects.................................................................................................................................................... 6-196-19

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

vii

Synchronization

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-246-24

Network synchronization environment.......................................................................................................................... 6-256-25

Synchronization features..................................................................................................................................................... 6-266-26

Network configurations........................................................................................................................................................ 6-286-28

Synchronization messaging................................................................................................................................................ 6-316-31

Sync messaging feature details and options................................................................................................................ 6-326-32

Sync messaging examples.................................................................................................................................................. 6-346-34

Frequently asked network timing distribution questions....................................................................................... 6-386-38

IS-IS Level 2 routing guidelines

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-396-39

Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-406-40

Addressing................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-426-42

Level 2 routing........................................................................................................................................................................ 6-446-44

IS-IS Level 2 routing remote provisioning sequence.............................................................................................. 6-456-45

IS-IS Level 2 routing provisioning confirmation...................................................................................................... 6-476-47

Maximum number of OSI nodes..................................................................................................................................... 6-496-49

Engineering rules and guidelines................................................................................................................................... 6-506-50

7 Ordering

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-27-2

Engineering drawings.............................................................................................................................................................. 7-37-3

Software and documentation................................................................................................................................................ 7-47-4

Miscellaneous equipment and tools.................................................................................................................................. 7-67-6

8 Product support

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

viii 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Worldwide Services................................................................................................................................................................. 8-28-2

Training ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-48-4

9 Reliability and quality

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19-1

Alcatel-Lucent’s Quality Policy......................................................................................................................................... 9-29-2

Reliability program and specifications............................................................................................................................. 9-39-3

Failure rates................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-59-5

Sparing information ................................................................................................................................................................ 9-79-7

Sparing graph............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-89-8

International Standards Organization (ISO) certification....................................................................................... 9-109-10

Warranty ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-119-11

10 Technical specifications

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-110-1

Physical specifications

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-310-3

Safety instructions.................................................................................................................................................................. 10-410-4

Interface standards................................................................................................................................................................. 10-810-8

Physical specifications......................................................................................................................................................... 10-910-9

Environmental specifications.......................................................................................................................................... 10-1010-10

Power specifications........................................................................................................................................................... 10-1210-12

Electrical interfaces

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1310-13

DS1 (VLNC5, VLNC6, VLNC25, VLNC26).......................................................................................................... 10-1410-14

DS3 (VLNC5 and VLNC25, 2 ports)......................................................................................................................... 10-1610-16

10/100T (10/100 Mbps) Ethernet (VLNC15 and VLNC30).............................................................................. 10-1710-17

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

ix

Optical interfaces

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1910-19

OC-3 OLIU (VLNC5 and VLNC6)............................................................................................................................. 10-2010-20

OC-12 OLIU (VLNC25 and VLNC26)..................................................................................................................... 10-2110-21

SONET optical specifications: OC-12 OLIUs......................................................................................................... 10-2210-22

SONET optical specifications: OC-3 OLIUs........................................................................................................... 10-2510-25

10/100T (100BASE-T)/ Fast Ethernet (100BASE-LX) Optical Ethernet Private Line (VLNC30).. 10-2810-28

100BASE-LX optical Ethernet specification............................................................................................................ 10-2910-29

Lightguide jumpers and build-outs............................................................................................................................... 10-3210-32

System performance

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-3310-33

SONET overhead bytes..................................................................................................................................................... 10-3410-34

Wander/Jitter.......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-3510-35

Signal performance............................................................................................................................................................. 10-3610-36

Synchronization.................................................................................................................................................................... 10-3710-37

Protection switching........................................................................................................................................................... 10-3810-38

Transient performance....................................................................................................................................................... 10-3910-39

Transmission delay.............................................................................................................................................................. 10-4010-40

Operations Interfaces

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-4110-41

Craft Interface Terminal (CIT)....................................................................................................................................... 10-4210-42

TL1/LAN ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-4410-44

Personal computer specifications for software download................................................................................... 10-4510-45

LEDs, indicators, and office alarms............................................................................................................................. 10-4610-46

User-defined miscellaneous discrete interface......................................................................................................... 10-4710-47

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

x 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A Ethernet

Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1A-1

Ethernet transport.................................................................................................................................................................... A-2A-2

Tagging modes....................................................................................................................................................................... A-16A-16

Quality of Service................................................................................................................................................................. A-17A-17

Ethernet service management........................................................................................................................................... A-18A-18

Ethernet services configurations..................................................................................................................................... A-20A-20

Glossary

Index

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

xi

List of tables


1 1665 DMXplore documentation set............................................................................................................... xxiiixxiii


4-1 1665 DMXplore dimensions and weight........................................................................................................ 4-24-2

4-2 Circuit Packs in 1665 DMXplore shelf........................................................................................................... 4-94-9

4-3 Worksheet for VLNC15 and VLNC30 provisioning............................................................................... 4-144-14

4-4 1665 DMXplore power supply requirements............................................................................................. 4-224-22

4-5 Cables ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-234-23


5-1 SYSCTL faceplate LEDs...................................................................................................................................... 5-65-6

5-2 IAO LAN compatibility ...................................................................................................................................... 5-115-11

5-3 DCC compatibility................................................................................................................................................. 5-175-17

5-4 DS1 performance parameters............................................................................................................................ 5-405-40

5-5 CV-PFE parameter increments......................................................................................................................... 5-435-43

5-6 DS3 performance parameters............................................................................................................................ 5-455-45

5-7 DS3 signal formats, PM signal formats, and VM modes..................................................................... 5-495-49

5-8 SONET VT1.5 performance parameters...................................................................................................... 5-515-51

5-9 SONET STS-N performance parameters..................................................................................................... 5-535-53

5-10 SONET OC-N performance parameters....................................................................................................... 5-555-55

5-11 Ethernet performance parameters.................................................................................................................... 5-585-58

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

xiii

5-12 Standard Ethernet interface MIB module trap........................................................................................... 5-665-66

5-13 Standard Ethernet PM MIB module parameters....................................................................................... 5-665-66

5-14 dot1qVlanStatic values........................................................................................................................................ 5-675-67

5-15 dot1qPortVlan values........................................................................................................................................... 5-675-67

5-16 dot1qPortVlanStatistics values......................................................................................................................... 5-685-68

5-17 dot1qPortVlanHCStatistics values................................................................................................................... 5-685-68

5-18 Private Ethernet PM MIB module parameters........................................................................................... 5-695-69

5-19 Private Ethernet PM MIB module traps....................................................................................................... 5-705-70

5-20 Private Bridge MIB module parameters....................................................................................................... 5-715-71

5-21 Private VCG MIB module traps...................................................................................................................... 5-725-72

5-22 Private MIB module parameters...................................................................................................................... 5-735-73

5-23 Private MIB module traps.................................................................................................................................. 5-735-73

5-24 Flow control ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-835-83

5-25 Characters NOT allowed in aWaveStar® CIT password.................................................................... 5-1115-111

5-26 Characters allowed in aWaveStar® CIT password............................................................................... 5-1115-111

5-27 Characters NOT allowed in a 1665 DMXplore password and User ID....................................... 5-1125-112

5-28 Characters allowed in a 1665 DMXplore password and User ID................................................... 5-1135-113


6-1 Circuit packs in 1665 DMXplore shelf......................................................................................................... 6-56-5

6-2 Rack mounting specifications.............................................................................................................................. 6-76-7

6-3 1665 DMXplore Power supply requirements............................................................................................. 6-146-14

6-4 1665 DMXplore shelf current drains............................................................................................................. 6-146-14

6-5 All allowable add/drop cross-connections................................................................................................... 6-216-21

6-6 Default cross-connections................................................................................................................................... 6-226-22

6-7 All allowable pass-through cross-connections........................................................................................... 6-236-23

6-8 Sync Messages with the S1 byte..................................................................................................................... 6-326-32

6-9 NSAP addresses...................................................................................................................................................... 6-426-42

List of tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xiv 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

7 Ordering

7-1 Available software.................................................................................................................................................... 7-47-4

7-2 1665 DMXplore documentation set.................................................................................................................. 7-57-5

7-3 Lightguide build-outs.............................................................................................................................................. 7-67-6

7-4 Miscellaneous accessories..................................................................................................................................... 7-77-7

7-5 Approved SFP transceiver for VLNC30....................................................................................................... 7-87-8


9-1 Circuit Pack Failure Rates.................................................................................................................................... 9-59-5

9-2 Equipment failure rates.......................................................................................................................................... 9-69-6

10 Technical specifications

10-1 Transmission interface standards..................................................................................................................... 10-810-8

10-2 DS3/EC1 cable lengths..................................................................................................................................... 10-1510-15

10-3 SONET optical system specifications......................................................................................................... 10-2210-22

10-4 SONET optical transmitter information..................................................................................................... 10-2210-22

10-5 SONET optical receiver information........................................................................................................... 10-2310-23

10-6 SONET optical specifications and link budgets..................................................................................... 10-2310-23

10-7 SONET optical system specifications......................................................................................................... 10-2510-25

10-8 SONET optical transmitter information..................................................................................................... 10-2510-25

10-9 SONET optical receiver information........................................................................................................... 10-2510-25

10-10 SONET optical specifications and link budgets..................................................................................... 10-2610-26

10-11 10/100T SFP optics for VLNC30................................................................................................................. 10-2810-28

10-12 100BASE-LX operating range single-mode fiber.................................................................................. 10-2910-29

10-13 100BASE-LX transmit specifications......................................................................................................... 10-2910-29

10-14 100BASE-LX receive specifications........................................................................................................... 10-3010-30

10-15 100BASE-LX link budgets and penalties................................................................................................. 10-3010-30

10-16 Transmission delay in microseconds........................................................................................................... 10-4010-40

List of tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

xv

10-17 WaveStar® CIT PC requirements.................................................................................................................. 10-4210-42

10-18 CIT and MicrosoftWindows® requirements............................................................................................ 10-4310-43

A Ethernet

A-1 GFP frame format details..................................................................................................................................... A-5A-5

A-2 Flow control ............................................................................................................................................................ A-11A-11

A-3 Line rate operation for VLNC15/30 circuit packs.................................................................................. A-12A-12

A-4 Flow control operation for VLNC15/30 circuit packs.......................................................................... A-13A-13

A-5 Packet size............................................................................................................................................................... A-16A-16

A-6 Supported configurations and cross-connection types........................................................................... A-18A-18

A-7 VCGs available on Ethernet circuit packs................................................................................................. A-19A-19

A-8 Supported Ethernet services............................................................................................................................. A-20A-20

A-9 Typical Ethernet service configurations....................................................................................................... A-20A-20

List of tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xvi 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

List of figures

1 System overview

1-1 1665 DMXplore wall-mount shelf front/side view with mounting bracket..................................... 1-51-5

1-2 1665 DMXplore rack-mount front/side view with mounting bracket................................................ 1-61-6

1-3 1665 DMXplore High Capacity rack-mount front/side view with mounting bracket................. 1-71-7

3 Topologies

3-1 1665 DMXplore providing enterprise access................................................................................................ 3-43-4

3-2 Wireless optical build-out..................................................................................................................................... 3-73-7

3-3 Ethernet extension.................................................................................................................................................... 3-93-9

3-4 Hitless bandwidth provisioning: 1st span.................................................................................................... 3-103-10


4-1 Wall-mount shelf front view................................................................................................................................ 4-44-4

4-2 1665 DMXplore rack-mount front and rear views..................................................................................... 4-54-5

4-3 1850 TSS-5 High Capacity rack-mount front view................................................................................... 4-64-6

4-4 VLNC15 Fast Ethernet (Private Line) circuit pack................................................................................. 4-124-12

4-5 VLNC30 Fast Ethernet (Private Line) circuit pack................................................................................. 4-134-13

4-6 SYSCTL circuit pack........................................................................................................................................... 4-204-20


5-1 Multi-layered operations........................................................................................................................................ 5-55-5

5-2 1665 DMXplore operations interfaces............................................................................................................. 5-85-8

5-3 IAO LAN connections......................................................................................................................................... 5-105-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

xvii

5-4 Remote operations philosophy......................................................................................................................... 5-125-12

5-5 Default User/Network Side designation on a UPSR............................................................................... 5-175-17

5-6 WaveStar® CIT Direct local access................................................................................................................ 5-275-27

5-7 WaveStar® CIT access via DCC...................................................................................................................... 5-285-28

5-8 RemoteWaveStar® CIT Access via modem............................................................................................... 5-295-29

5-9 DS1/DS3 performance monitoring................................................................................................................. 5-355-35

5-10 TL1 translation device......................................................................................................................................... 5-945-94

5-11 Encapsulated IP packets...................................................................................................................................... 5-955-95

5-12 FTAM-FTP gateway............................................................................................................................................. 5-975-97


6-1 Mounting bracket positions on1665 DMXplore shelf............................................................................... 6-76-7

6-2 Two-way add/drop................................................................................................................................................. 6-196-19

6-3 Pass-through cross-connection on high-speed interface......................................................................... 6-206-20

6-4 Free running - ring network.............................................................................................................................. 6-296-29

6-5 Line timing - ring network ................................................................................................................................ 6-306-30

6-6 Automatic synchronization reconfiguration, part A and B................................................................... 6-356-35

6-7 Automatic synchronization reconfiguration, part C and D................................................................... 6-366-36

6-8 Automatic synchronization reconfiguration part E and F..................................................................... 6-376-37

6-9 Network with Level 2 routers........................................................................................................................... 6-416-41

6-10 Assigning areas....................................................................................................................................................... 6-516-51

6-11 Assigning sub-domains........................................................................................................................................ 6-526-52

6-12 Redundant routes with the Level 2 sub-domain....................................................................................... 6-536-53

6-13 Recommended Level 2 router assignments................................................................................................. 6-546-54

6-14 Recommended area assignments..................................................................................................................... 6-556-55

6-15 Recommended placement of Level 2 routers............................................................................................. 6-566-56

6-16 Recommended Lucent OMS access via OSI LAN/WAN..................................................................... 6-586-58

6-17 Level 2 router assignments on an OSI LAN.............................................................................................. 6-596-59

List of figures

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xviii 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-18 OSI LAN redundancy.......................................................................................................................................... 6-606-60


9-1 Sparing graph for a 10-day lead time.............................................................................................................. 9-99-9

A Ethernet

A-1 Ethernet transport through 1665 DMXplore................................................................................................ A-2A-2

A-2 GFP frame format................................................................................................................................................... A-5A-5

A-3 Virtual concatenation group................................................................................................................................ A-7A-7

A-4 Link aggregation...................................................................................................................................................... A-8A-8

A-5 Local flow control of ingress traffic............................................................................................................... A-9A-9

A-6 End-to-end flow control (VLNC15/30)....................................................................................................... A-10A-10

A-7 Buffer architecture (VLNC15/30).................................................................................................................. A-15A-15

A-8 Ethernet Private Line service over protected UPSR.............................................................................. A-21A-21

List of figures

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

xix

About this information productAbout this information product

Purpose

This Applications and Planning Guide (APG) provides the following information for1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (1665 DMXplore), formerlyMetropolis® DMXploreAccess Multiplexer (Metropolis® DMXplore):

• Features

• Applications

• Operation

• Engineering

• Support

• Specifications

• Ordering

Product naming

As a result of the Alcatel-Lucent merger and new corporate branding guidelines,Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer (Metropolis® DMXplore) is nowAlcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (1665 DMXplore). The company logoand product name will be changed on many items including the shelves, circuit packs,cables, software banners, theWaveStar® CIT, documentation, ED drawings, softwareCD labels, configurators, OMS, and INC. Please be patient as we migrate each of theseitems. You may experience a period of transition when you may receive a mixture ofthe company logo and product names on any of these items. For example, a documentmay say 1665 DMXplore while the software saysMetropolis® DMXplore. Despite thename change, rest assured thatMetropolis® DMXplore and 1665 DMXplore are thesame product with the same product features, interoperability, and operations remainunchanged.

Reason for reissue

This document,1665 Data Multiplexer Explore Applications and Planning Guide,365-372-331, Issue 1, is reissued to update existing information and provideinformation about new features for 1665 DMXplore, Release 2.1.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007,

xxi

Updated information about new features includes support for the following:

• 1850 TSS-5 High Capacity rack-mount shelf compatibility with 1665 DMXplorecircuit packs

• Increased limit of 250 notes in an OSI Level 1 area

Intended audience

This applications and planning guide is intended for network planners and engineers.However, it is also for anyone who needs specific information regarding the features,applications, operation, engineering, and ordering of 1665 DMXplore.

Important! This document is not a cabinet-level end-product requirementsdocument. Cabinet-level end-product requirements, like limits for cabinet electricalemissions, requirements for backup batteries, and similar cabinet-level siterequirements must be determined and agreed to by the system supplier andcustomer.

How to use this information product

The following is a brief description of the contents of each chapter in this document:

• “About this information product”describes the purpose, intended audience, reasonfor reissue, and organization of this document. This section references relateddocumentation and explains how to order, make comments, or recommend changesto this document.

• Chapter 1, “System overview”describes 1665 DMXplore. This introductory sectionalso lists the features included in the releases covered by this document.

• Chapter 2, “Features”briefly describes the 1665 DMXplore features. These featuresare described in more detail inChapter 3, “Topologies”, Chapter 4, “Productdescription”, andChapter 5, “Operations, administration, maintenance, andprovisioning”.

• Chapter 3, “Topologies”describes how 1665 DMXplore can be used in a serviceprovider or end-user’s network.

• Chapter 4, “Product description”describes the 1665 DMXplore hardware, includingthe shelf, circuit packs, cables, and power.

• Chapter 6, “System planning and engineering”summarizes physical arrangement,cross-connection, and synchronization information to help you plan procurementand deployment of 1665 DMXplore.

• Chapter 5, “Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning”defines themaintenance philosophy, outlining the various features available to monitor andmaintain 1665 DMXplore.

• Chapter 7, “Ordering”provides equipment ordering information for 1665DMXplore.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxii 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

,

• Chapter 8, “Product support”describes how Alcatel-Lucent supports 1665DMXplore. This chapter includes information about engineering and installationservices, technical support, documentation support, and training available fromAlcatel-Lucent Technologies.

• Chapter 9, “Reliability and quality”provides the Alcatel-Lucent quality policy anddescribes the reliability program.

• Chapter 10, “Technical specifications”lists the technical specifications for the 1665DMXplore.

• “Glossary” provides definitions for telecommunication acronyms and terms.

• Appendix A, “Ethernet”provides information about Ethernet networks andadditional information about the Ethernet capabilities of 1665 DMXplore.

• Index supplies users with specific subjects and corresponding page numbers to findnecessary information.

Conventions used

Bold typeface signifies emphasis.

Italic typeface denotes a particular product line or information product.

Bold courier typeface signifies a TL1 command.

Bold typeface signifies a GUI command.

Related information

The following table lists the documents included in the 1665 DMXplore documentationset.

Table 1 1665 DMXplore documentation set

Comcode Document Number Title

NA 365-372-330 WaveStar® CIT User Guide, 365-372-330

109 454 066 365-372-331 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore Applications andPlanning Guide, 365-372-331

109 572 214 365-372-332R2.1 Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer UserOperations Guide, 365-372-332

109 572 222 365-372-333R2.1 Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer AlarmMessages and Trouble Clearing Guide, 365-372-333

109 572 230 365-372-334R2.1 Metropolis® DMXplore Access MultiplexerInstallation Manual, 365-372-334

109 572 248 365-372-335R2.1 Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer TL1Message Details, 365-372-335


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007,

xxiii

Table 1 1665 DMXplore documentation set (continued)


109 574 053 NA Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer SoftwareRelease Description(CD-ROM)

109 574 046 NA Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer SoftwareRelease Description(Paper)

109 574 061 NA 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore Release 2.1Documents (CD-ROM)

Information product support

For questions or concerns about this or any other Alcatel-Lucent information product,please contact us at one of the following numbers:

• 1-888-727-3615 (for the continental United States)

• 1-630-713-5000 (for all countries)

Technical support

For technical support, contact your local customer support team. You can reach themvia the Web at theAlcatel-Lucent Customer Support Web Site(http://support.lucent.com) or the customer support telephone number listed at theAlcatel-Lucent Contact UsWeb Site(http://www.lucent.com/contact/).

How to order

Documentation for 1665 DMXplore is available in electronic form, on compact diskread only memory (CD-ROM). CD-ROM has many advantages over traditional paperdocumentation, including cost savings and search and retrieve capability.

To order Alcatel-Lucent information products, use the following web sites or the email,phone, and fax contacts linked from “Contact Us” on those sites:

• Documentation:The Alcatel-Lucent Product Documentation Web Site(http://www.lucentdocs.com)

• Training:Alcatel-Lucent Training Catalog Web Site(http://training.lucent.com)

How to comment

To comment on this information product, go to theOnline Comment Form(http://www.lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to theComments Hotline ([email protected]).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxiv 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

,

http://support.lucent.com



http://www.lucent.com/contact/





http://training.lucent.com

http://training.lucent.com



1 1System overview

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (1665 DMXplore) is a member of the 1665 DataMultiplexer product portfolio. This chapter introduces 1665 DMXplore, provides abrief description of how the 1665 DMXplore fits into this portfolio, and an overviewof the features that 1665 DMXplore supports.

Contents

Overview of the 1665 Data Multiplexer portfolio 1-2

Introduction to 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore 1-4

Feature release plan 1-12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1-1

Overview of the 1665 Data Multiplexer portfolio...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Metropolitan,″metro,″ networks link homes and businesses to larger, long-distancecore networks. These complex and evolving networks are filled with new and oldequipment that must carry all types of service traffic, including voice, data and video.

The changing requirements of metropolitan optical transport networks are drivingevolution from traditional SONET multiplexers into more flexible, higher-speed,data-aware platforms— a necessity for optical edge solutions.

Solution

The 1665 Data Multiplexer portfolio offers a seamless evolution to next-generationmetro solutions that eliminate bottlenecks and allow service providers to deliverhigh-speed, revenue-generating services such as gigabit Ethernet, virtual privatenetworks (VPN), storage area networks (SAN), and digital subscriber lines (DSL).

Portfolio

The 1665 Data Multiplexer portfolio includes two categories of next-generationproducts based on the most common types of metro networks:

• Next-Generation SONET— 1665 DMX, 1665 DMXtend, and 1665 DMXploreleverage existing optical equipment while providing a solid foundation for futurebandwidth, gigabit Ethernet (GbE), and IP services growth.

• MetroWDM - 1694 EON (Enhanced Optical Networking), 1675 LambdaUniteMSS, and 1695 WSM provide core DWDM solutions for regional traffic.

Each of the 1665 Data Multiplexer solutions work with Alcatel-Lucent’s multiservicedata switches and with existing IP and ATM equipment to provide an end-to-endbroadband network that links to long-distance or other metro networks.

System overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Low Cost Access

SONET/SDH Metropolitan Access/Ethernet Transport

Metropolitan Core

WaveStarTDM 2.5G/10G

1694 EON

fi

MultiserviceEdge Node

Optical Core - Long Haul

GX 550

TDM to IP Services Migration

High Margin Ethernet Services

High Security MultiservicesAccess (PSAX, Stinger,

GX 550)

Low Cost Last Mile Aggregation

Scaleability from 2.5G to10G to 40G and Beyond

DSLAM Access Transport(Stinger)

Globe Aggregation and Transport(Optical Edge Service)

Multiservice TDM

Bulk Carrier/to carrierInterconnect

(Wavelength Service)

nc-dmx-111

WaveStarOLS 1.6T

fi

WaveStarOLS 1.6T

fi

LambdaXtreme™Transport

2.5G = WaveStar TDM 2.5G (OC-48) 2F10G = WaveStar TDM 10G (OC-192) 2F1694 EON = 1694 Enhanced Optical Networking

fi

fi

1665 DMX1663 ADMu

1665DMXtend

1665DMXplore

WaveStarOLS 1.6T

fi

1665 DMX = 1665 Data Multiplexer

1665 DMXplore = 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore

1663 ADMu = 1663 Add Drop Multiplexer-universal

1665 DMXtend = 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

System overview Overview of the 1665 Data Multiplexer portfolio

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1-3

Introduction to 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore has an extremely small footprint that enables itsseamlessintegrationas a piece of customer premise equipment (CPE). As CPE, it is ideal for Fiber to theBusiness (FTTB) and end-user access applications. It has a modular architecture thatsupports DS1, DS3 and 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet Private Line transport overhigh-speed OC-3 or OC-12 interfaces. Working and protection high-speed transportcircuit packs are supported, to provide continued service in the event of a failure. Thesystem supports 1+1 protection by default, and can be provisioned to support UPSRapplications.

1665 DMXplore is designed with a default set of cross connections to simplifyinstallation and set up. In Release 2.1, the user can provision whether or not the defaultcross-connections are established when the 1665 DMXplore is installed.

1665 DMXplore cards supporting OC-3 or OC-12 interfaces and switch fabricservicing DS1 and DS3 ports can be upgraded in-service.

The 1850 TSS-5 High Capacity rack-mount shelf, introduced in June of 2007, iscompatible with 1665 DMXplore circuit packs and software. It provides access to allshelf interfaces, power connections, and LEDs on a removable board in the front of theshelf.

System overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Wall-mount shelf

The following illustration is a front and side view of the 1665 DMXplore wall-mountshelf. It shows the dimensions of the shelf, the position of the mounting bracket alongits side, and the location of physical interfaces accessible from the front. For additionalinformation about the shelf and its physical interfaces, see“Shelf description” (p. 4-2),and“Electrical interfaces” (p. 10-13). Physical interfaces on the faceplates of circuitpacks vary depending upon the circuit pack. For more information about interfaces onthe circuit packs, and the circuit packs supported on this shelf, see“Circuit packcodes” (p. 4-9).

Figure 1-1 1665 DMXplore wall-mount shelf front/side view with mountingbracket

MA-DMXplore-042

C GROUP

B GROUP

A/D GROUP

CTL

4

8

12

16

41 2 3

1

5

9

13

2

6

10

14

3

7

11

15

MDI MDO ALARM

1 2 3

OUT

PWR-A

ON

ON

-48V-A

RTN-A

RTN COM

GRD

RTN-B

-48V-B

PWR-B

IN

LAN

FAULT

MN/ABN

IN IN

OUT OUT

CIT

RS-232

UPDATE

ACO

CR/MJ

ACTIVE

FAULT

ACTIVE

FAULT

S1:1SYSCTL

AL

VLNC1

1665 DMXplore

S1:1XX:x

VLNC6S1:1XX:x

VLNC6

AB

CD

EF

GH

IJK

LM

7.5”

10.5”

12”

System overview Introduction to 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1-5

Rack-mount shelf

The following illustration is a front and side view of a 1665 DMXplore rack-mountshelf. It shows the dimensions of the shelf and position of the mounting bracket alongits side. Low-speed physical interfaces associated with the circuit packs are located inthe rear of the shelf and are not shown. For information about the location and type ofphysical interfaces on the shelf, see“Shelf description” (p. 4-2), and“Electricalinterfaces” (p. 10-13). Physical interfaces the faceplates of circuit packs varydepending upon the circuit pack. For more information about interfaces on the circuitpacks, and the circuit packs supported on this shelf, see“Circuit pack codes” (p. 4-9).

1850 TSS-5 High Capacity rack-mount shelf

The Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-5) High Capacity rack-mountshelf is compatible with circuit packs for 1665 DMXplore. When equipped with aVLIU10 interface board, it supports all of the functions available for these circuitpacks through Release 2.1.

The following illustration is a front and side view of an Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TransportService Switch (TSS-5) High Capacity rack-mount shelf. It shows the dimensions ofthe shelf, the position of the mounting bracket installed for front mounting in a 19-inchrack, and the location of physical interfaces accessible from the front. The mountingbrackets shipped with the shelf can also be rotated for installation in 23-inch racks.Optional brackets for ETSI racks are also available. For additional information aboutthe shelf and its physical interfaces, see“Shelf description” (p. 4-2), and“Electrical

Figure 1-2 1665 DMXplore rack-mount front/side view with mounting bracket

FA

ULT

FANFAULT

PWRON

A

B

PWRON

BA

RC

OD

E

AC

TIV

E

LA

N

FA

ULT

CR

MJ

MN

AG

N

UP

DN

T

AC

O/T

ST

CIT

RS

232

FA

ULT

IN AC

TIV

E

OU

T

FA

ULT

IN AC

TIV

E

OU

T

17.3 In.

3.5 In.

13.5 In. MA-DMXplore-043


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

interfaces” (p. 10-13). Physical interfaces on the faceplates of circuit packs varydepending upon the circuit pack. For more information about interfaces on the circuitpacks, and the circuit packs supported on this shelf, see“Circuit pack codes” (p. 4-9).

Functionality

There are 5 circuit pack slots in each shelf:

• 1 VLIU slot for the VLIU10. The VLIU10 provides access to the low-speedelectrical interfaces of the shelf.

• 1 Control slot for the SYSCTL circuit pack. The SYSCTL provides an RS-232 portand an 10/100bps Ethernet LAN port that support CIT operations.

• 2 Main slots for high-speed OC-3 or OC-12 optical line interface unit combo cardsthat also house the switch fabric supporting the DS1 and DS3 interfaces located onthe shelf.

• 1 Function Group C slot for 10/100 Mbps Ethernet circuit packs that supportelectrical and, on some circuit packs, optical interfaces.

Figure 1-3 1665 DMXplore High Capacity rack-mount front/side view withmounting bracket

4.9 In.

MK-DMXplore-003

18.31 In.

17.4 In.

FA

ULT

FANFAULT

PWRON

A

B

PWRON

BA

RC

OD

E

AC

TIV

E

Lucent

LA

N

FA

ULT

CR

MJ

MN

AG

N

UP

DN

T

AC

O/T

ST

CIT

RS

232

FA

ULT

IN AC

TIV

E

OU

T

FA

ULT

IN AC

TIV

E

OU

T

ABCDEFGHIJKLM

9.45 In.

11.8 In.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1-7

The 1665 DMXplore front or rear access panels, depending upon shelf type,contain the physical interfaces associated with the shelf. The following interfacesare supported:

– 4 miscellaneous discrete inputs (MDI) and 4 miscellaneous discrete outputs(MDO) (The VLIU10 in the High Capacity Rack-mount shelf supports 2additional, unused MDOs.)

– 16 dedicated DS1 interfaces

– 2 functional DS3 interfaces

– 4 10/100BASE-T Fast Ethernet interfaces supported by Function Group Ccircuit pack

– 2 −48VDC A & B power feeds

– Optional AC power converter available

– 1 office alarm interface (CR/MJ, MN/Audible, Visual).

1665 DMXplore Release 2.1 supports the following circuit packs:

• System Controller: SYSCTL (VLNC1)

• OC-3 1310 Long Reach (LR) with support for 16 DS1s (VLNC6)

• OC-3 1310 Long Reach (LR) with support for 16 DS1s and 2 DS3s (VLNC5)

• OC-12 1310 Long Reach (LR) with support for 16 DS1s (VLNC26)

• OC-12 1310 Long Reach (LR) with support for 16 DS1s and 2 DS3s (VLNC25)

• 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet Private Line, 4 ports (VLNC15)

• Optical/Electrical 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet Private Line, 2 optical 100BASE-LXports and 4 10/100BASE-TX electrical ports (VLNC30)

Capacity

1665 DMXplore provides a cross-connect fabric for a variety of signals. This switchfabric is contained in the high-speed circuit packs, installed in the MAIN slots of the1665 DMXplore shelf. These MAIN slots have the capacity to house OC-3 or OC-12high-speed interfaces.

Listed below is the number of signals that 1665 DMXplore can transport using thecapabilities of the VLNC6/26, VLNC5/25, VLNC15, and VLNC30 packs availablethrough Release 2.1:

• 16 DS1s

• 2 DS3s (DS3 on VLNC5 and VLNC25 only)

• 4 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet Private Line

• 2 100BASE-LX Optical Ethernet Private Line (VLNC30 only)

• 1 OC-3 (protected/unprotected)

• 1 OC-12 (protected/unprotected)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

DS1 and DS3 interfaces are also equipment protected by the MAIN packs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1-9

Shelf size

The 1665 DMXplore wall-mount shelf has the following characteristics:

• Width: 7.5 inches

• Height: 10.5 inches

• Depth: 12.0 inches

The 1665 DMXplore rack-mount shelf has the following characteristics:

• Width: 17.3 inches (includes integral fan unit)



The 1850 TSS-5 High Capacity rack-mount shelf has the following characteristics:

• Width: 17.4 inches (includes integral fan unit)



Operations

1665 DMXplore is representative of ten years of Alcatel-Lucent’s innovation andexperience in network operations, control, and maintenance. Level 1 and Level 2Target Identifier (TID) Address Resolution Protocol (TARP), a consistent and standardform of address resolution, allows the 1665 DMXplore to be easily monitored andmaintained.

1665 DMXplore also supports the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) ConnectionlessNetwork Protocol (CLNP) over the Data Communications Channel (DCC) of theSONET link. Networks of up to 1000 network elements are supported via IS-IS Level1 and Level 2 routing.

1665 DMXplore is designed for easy installation and operation. 1665 DMXplore comesequipped with default cross-connections that pre-provision fixed mapping for 1+1applications. This provides aplug-and-playoption for initial installation. With Release2.1, the user can provision whether or not the default cross-connections will beestablished when the 1665 DMXplore is installed. Users can also provisioning theirown cross-connections for UPSR instead of 1+1 protection.

Centralized operation is supported by a full set of single-ended operations (SEO),control, and maintenance features. Integrated test capabilities and default provisioningsimplify installation.

Basic maintenance tasks can be performed using faceplate LED displays and controls.A craft interface terminal (CIT) or a remote OS provides access to more sophisticatedmaintenance, provisioning, and reporting features.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Built-in maintenance capabilities support both installation and system operation. A1665 DMXplore can be tested and installed without external test equipment.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1-11

Feature release plan...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section outlines the major features through 1665 DMXplore, Release 2.1.

Release 2.1 features

Below is a list of important features that are included in Release 2.1.

• Optical/Electrical Ethernet Private Line Pack (2 optical 100BASE-LX ports and 4electrical 10/100BASE-TX ports (VLNC30)The VLNC30 circuit pack has support for two optical 100BASE-LX Ethernet ports.These ports use SFP optics. The VLNC30 also supports four 10/100BASE-TXports. It provides data transport at the rate of 10/100 Mbps using standardencapsulation according to ITU G.7041 for Generic Framing Procedure (GFP), ITUG.707 for Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) at the STS-1 and VT1.5 level with LCAS.The VLNC30 can transmit signals across spans as long as 100 meters for electricalinterfaces and 10,000 meters for optical interfaces. VLNC30 circuit pack isdesigned specifically to support Fast Ethernet Private Line applications. EachVLNC30 circuit pack can support 6 Private Lines. The VLNC30 is an unprotectedpack.

• Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) opticsThe Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) optics are used on the VLNC30 pack. SFPoptics arepluggableoptics. This means that the optics are purchased separatelyfrom the circuit pack and equipped orplugged-inonly as additional interfacesbecome necessary. This makes 1665 DMXplore interface density more scalable andcan save customers money initially.

• The new 1665 DMXplore High Capacity rack-mount shelf is an ETSI compliantshelf that has all interfaces brought to the front of the shelf on the removableinterface board (VLIU10).

• Client Signal Fail1665 DMXplore supports the Client Signal Fail on all Ethernet VCGs.

• Locked DSn cross-connectionsIn the locked mode, 1665 DMXplore does not select the best signal from bothrotations of a UPSR. Instead, traffic is added and dropped (locked) from onerotation of the ring only (provisionable). The main advantage of locked DS1/DS3cross-connections is the lack of UPSR switching which also results in the ability toreuse time-slots around a UPSR.With 1665 DMXplore, the following cross-connections may coexist within thesame STS-1: VT add/drop, VT pass-through, VT locked to Side 1, and VT lockedto Side 2.

System overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-12 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

• Provisionable Default mapping1665 DMXplore comes fully provisioned with a default set of cross-connections for1+1 applications. This provides the option of a very quick and simple installationand turn-up. In Release 2.1, it becomes possible to disable all defaultcross-connections.

• Increased limit of 250 NEs in an OSI Level 1 areaThe previous limit of 50 NEs in an OSI Level 1 area has been increased to 250. ALevel 2 sub-domain may contain a maximum of 50 Level 1 areas and a maximumof 1000 NEs.

Release 2.0 features

Below is a list of important features that are included in Release 2.0.

• 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Private Line interface (VLNC15)The VLNC15 circuit pack has support for four 10/100 Mbps ports and providesdata transport at the rate of 10/100 Mbps using standard encapsulation according toITU G.7041 for Generic Framing Procedure (GFP), ITU G.707 for VirtualConcatenation (VCAT) at the STS-1 and VT1.5 level with LCAS. The VLNC15can transmit signals across spans as long as 100 meters. VLNC15 circuit pack isdesigned specifically to support Fast Ethernet Private Line applications. EachVLNC15 circuit pack can support 4 Private Lines. The VLNC15 is an unprotectedpack.

• OC-12/16DS1/2DS3 Main pack - high-speed optical interface (VLNC25)The 1665 DMXplore OC-12 high-speed interface can be protected by 1+1 or UPSRswitching. The VLNC25 provides 1 long-reach, 1310nm, OC-12 interfacesupporting STS-1 and VT1.5 path switching. The OC-12 OLIU can interface withother OC-12 rings in the network and can also be used as an interface for OC-12linear optical extensions. Fiber access is provided via 2 LC-type connectors on theVLNC25 faceplate. The VLNC25 also houses the switch fabric/circuitry for theshelf and supports 2 DS3 and 16 DS1 interfaces. The VLNC25 is OSP hardened.

• OC-12/16DS1 Main pack— high-speed optical interface (VLNC26)The 1665 DMXplore OC-12 high-speed interface can be protected by 1+1 or UPSRswitching. The VLNC26 provides 1 long-reach, 1310nm, OC-12 interfacesupporting VT1.5 and STS-1 path switching. The OC-12 OLIU can interface withother OC-12 rings in the network and can also be used as an interface for OC-12linear optical extensions. Fiber access is provided via 2 LC-type connectors on theVLNC26 faceplate. The VLNC26 also houses the switch fabric for the shelf andsupports 16 DS1 interfaces. The VLNC26 is OSP hardened.

• In-service upgradesThe 1665 DMXplore’s combo cards support in-service upgrades, allowing you togo from supporting OC-3 to OC-12 for instance, without loss of service.1665 DMXplore supports an in-service upgrades from the VLNC6 to VLNC5,VLNC5 to VLNC25, from the VLNC6 to VLNC26, and the VLNC26 to VLNC25.

System overview Feature release plan

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1-13

• 1665 DMXplore rack-mount shelfA rack-mount version of the 1665 DMXplore shelf is available in Release 2.0. Thisshelf is designed to fit in a standard 7 foot bay of either 19 or 23 inches in width.It provides all of the interfaces currently located on the access panel of thewall-mount shelf, but at the rear of the shelf.

• High-speed OC-12 UPSRThe VLNC25 and VLNC26 support 1 high-speed UPSR. This is a standardscompliant UPSR protected configuration. 1665 DMXplore is the only SONET CPEof its kind to offer UPSR protection switching, allowing for more networkflexibility.

• OC-12 1+1 protectionThe linear application mode is a standards compliant 1+1 protected configuration,providing unidirectional, non-revertive line switching.

• OC-3/12 high-speed single- and dual-homed arcsSingle or dual-homed OC-3 or OC-12 UPSR at VT1.5, STS-1, or STS-3c (STS-3cpass-throughs only when using the high-speed OC-12 circuit packs) level.

• High-speed OC-12 unprotected

• R2.0 Ethernet Features (supported by VLNC15)

– Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) per ITU G.7042

– Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) per ITU G.7041

– Ethernet MAC address table search and support

– STS-1 and VT1.5 VCAT

• VLNC15 Utilization of Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)1665 DMXplore allows SNMP to be used in provisioning/monitoring alarms andtraps relative to the Ethernet circuit packs.

• Telcordia support of LCAS, VCAT, and diverse routing

• FTP/FTAM GatewayAlso referred to as FTTD (File Transfer Translation Device), the FTTD allows1665 DMXplore to function as a Gateway Network Element (GNE) that canfacilitate the download of files located at FTP servers to remote NEs connected tothe 1665 DMXplore.

• Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

In normal ARP usage for an Ethernet LAN, the sending system broadcasts an ARPrequest on the physical LAN. The ARP request contains the target IP address and asksthe system with this IP address to respond with its physical Ethernet address. Allsystems on the LAN receive the request, but only the system which recognizes thetarget IP address as its own will send a point-to-point ARP reply to the sending system.The broadcast ARP request on a physical LAN only reaches systems which areattached to this physical LAN. If the sending system and the target system are ondifferent physical networks, the target system will not receive the ARP request and thus


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-14 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

can not respond to it. Proxy ARP lets a system, called ARP sub-net gateway, answerARP requests received from one of its physical (LAN) networks for a target systemwhich is not attached to this physical network.

To allow SNMP manager/NTP server located in the IP-based access DataCommunication Network (DCN) to communicate with NEs located in the OSI-basedDCN, 1665 DMXplore supports IP tunneling solution to encapsulate and route IPpackets over OSI-based embedded DCN. The provisioning of static routes on theexternal router(s) is required to route the IP packets from the access DCN to theembedded DCN. The Proxy ARP support on the Gateway Network Element (GNE)will eliminate this need of static routes on the external router(s).

• Holdover, free running, and OC-3/12 line timing (from high-speed packs in M1 andM2)

Highlighted features from past releases

Below is a list of important features included past releases of the 1665 DMXplore.

• OC-3/16DS1/2DS3 Main pack - high-speed optical interface (VLNC5)1665 DMXplore OC-3 long-reach (55 km), high-speed interface can be protectedby 1+1 or UPSR switching. The VLNC5 provides 1 OC-3 interface supportingVT1.5 and STS-1 path switching. The OC-3 OLIU can interface with other OC-3rings in the network and can also be used as an interface for OC-3 linear opticalextensions. Fiber access is provided via one pair of LC-type connectors on theVLNC5 faceplate. The VLNC5 also houses the switch fabric for the shelf andsupports 16 DS1s and 2 DS3s interfaces.

• OC-3/16 DS1 Main pack— high-speed optical interface (VLNC6)1665 DMXplore OC-3 long-reach (55 km), high-speed interface can be protectedby 1+1 or UPSR switching. The VLNC6 provides 1 OC-3 interface supportingVT1.5 and STS-1 path switching. The OC-3 OLIU can interface with other OC-3rings in the network and can also be used as an interface for OC-3 linear opticalextensions. Fiber access is provided via one LC-type connector on the VLNC6faceplate. The VLNC6 also houses the switch fabric for the shelf and supports 16DS1 interfaces.

• DS3s 1+1 protected (or unprotected)2 DS3 add/drop capacity per VLNC5 pack.

• DS1s 1+1 protected (or unprotected)16 DS1 add/drop capacity with the VLNC5 and VLNC6.

• High-speed OC-3 UPSRThe VLNC5 and VLNC6 support 1 high-speed, standards compliant UPSR. 1665DMXplore is the only SONET CPE of its kind to offer UPSR protection switching,allowing for more network flexibility.

• 1+1 protectionThe linear application mode is a standards compliant 1+1 protected configuration,providing unidirectional, non-revertive line switching.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1-15

• Protected or unprotected interfaces1665 DMXplore interfaces can be equipment protected, network (SONET)protected, or unprotected. In order to have network protection the MAIN packsmust be equipment protected. Equipment protection is accomplished by virtue ofcircuit pack redundancy in MAIN1 and MAIN2 slots. This allows for trafficrestoration and circuit pack replacement without loss of service. SONET protectionis accomplished via UPSR and 1+1 capabilities.

• Default mapping1665 DMXplore comes fully provisioned with a default set of cross-connections for1+1 applications. This provides the option of a very quick and simple installationand turn-up.

• Timing options1665 DMXplore supports Line timing from the OC-3 high-speed interface, as wellas holdover and free running timing modes. Holdover and free running modes areguaranteed to function at or above SONET Minimum Clock (SMC, +/− 20 ppm).

• SONET Standard DCC and TARPMany of the traditional SONET maintenance, provisioning, operations, control, andsynchronization features are included in 1665 DMXplore. The flexible SONETstandard provides a formidable foundation for 1665 DMXplore to build upon. 1665DMXplore is compatible with any other-vendor NEs that support TARP, OSI, IAOLAN, and TL1 as specified in Telcordia Technologies GR-253. 1665 DMXploresupports 2 DCC terminations.

• 4 MDIs/4 MDOs1665 DMXplore provides 4 Miscellaneous Discrete Inputs (MDIs) and 4Miscellaneous Discrete Outputs (MDOs) for remote monitoring of other officeequipment.

• Environmentally hardened1665 DMXplore is environmentally hardened for outside plant applications (OSP).

• NEBS Level 31665 DMXplore conforms to all specifications for NEBS Level 3 compliance.

• FCC Class A1665 DMXplore conforms to all specifications for FCC Class A Compliance (FCCPart 15, GR-1089-CORE).

• Performance monitoring1665 DMXplore allows standard performance monitoring over all SONETinterfaces.

• Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)Provides access from Lucent OMS orWaveStar® CIT over TCP/IP LAN to a 1665DMXplore and connected 1665 DMX, DDM-2000, and other NEs that support1665 Data Multiplexer product family operations interworking.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-16 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

• WaveStar® CITWaveStar® CIT manages the 1665 DMXplore system through the LAN/Serial ports,providing TL1 messaging, software download, and full operations, maintenance,and provisioning functions through a Graphic User Interface (GUI).

• Remote software download1665 DMXplore can download system software from a remote location to enablethe remote upgrade of 1665 DMXplore software by technicians located at anotherphysical location.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1-17

2 2Features

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter briefly highlights the features of 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (1665DMXplore), Release 2.1 and earlier. These features are described in more detail inChapter 3, “Topologies”, Chapter 4, “Product description”, andChapter 5, “Operations,administration, maintenance, and provisioning”, as applicable.

Contents

Hardware features 2-2

In-service upgrades 2-4

Networking capabilities 2-5

Cross-connection types 2-7

Management and operations features 2-9

Synchronization features 2-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

2-1

Hardware features...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section briefly describes the major hardware features supported for Release 2.1and earlier for 1665 DMXplore.

Below is a list of the sections included in Hardware Features:

• Network interface circuit packs (those housed in the MAIN slots of the 1665DMXplore shelf)

• Ethernet circuit packs, housed in the C slot of the 1665 DMXplore shelf

• Rack mount version of the 1665 DMXplore shelf

• Circuit pack compatibility with the High Capacity rack-mount shelf of the 1850TSS-5 rack-mount shelf

Important! For more detailed information on the capabilities of the circuit packs,refer to the section entitled“Circuit pack codes” (p. 4-9)in Chapter 4, “Productdescription”. For technical specifications refer toChapter 10, “Technicalspecifications”.

Main circuit packs

This section briefly details the circuit packs supported in Release 2.1 that are installedin the MAIN1 and MAIN2 slots of the 1665 DMXplore.

OC3-12 network interface (high-speed) circuit packs

The 1665 DMXplore supports the following high-speed network interface cards inRelease 2.1, installed in one, or both, of the MAIN slots of the shelf :

• VLNC5 — OC-3 (1310nm, long-reach, OSP hardened, includes support for 16 DS1interfaces and 2 DS3 interfaces)

• VLNC6 — OC-3 (1310nm, long-reach, OSP hardened, includes support for 16 DS1interfaces)

• VLNC25 — OC-12 (1310nm, long-reach, OSP hardened, includes support for 16DS1 and 2 DS3 interfaces)

• VLNC26 — OC-12 (1310nm, long-reach, OSP hardened, includes support for 16DS1 interfaces)

Features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Function Group C circuit packs

Circuit packs installed in the Function Group C slot are associated with the shelfGroup C electrical interfaces.

1665 DMXplore, Release 2.1 supports the following Ethernet interface circuit packs,installed in the Function Group C slot of the shelf:

• VLNC15 — Fast Ethernet (support for 4 ports, 10/100BASE-TX)

• VLNC30 (R2.1) — Fast Ethernet (support for 2 100BASE-LX optical and 410/100BASE-TX electrical ports)

Pluggable Transmission Modules (PTMs)

PTM interfaces in the VLNC30 pack are supported by Small Form-factor Pluggable(SFP) optics. This means that the optics are purchased separately from the circuit packand equipped orplugged-inonly as additional interfaces become necessary. This makes1665 DMXplore interface density scalable and can lower initial costs.

Features Hardware features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

2-3

In-service upgrades...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section briefly describes the in-service upgrades that are available in 1665DMXplore, Release 2.1.

In-service electrical upgrade from DS1 to DS1/DS3 interface and/or OC-12

1665 DMXplore supports an in-service electrical upgrade through an upgrade of theMAIN network interface circuit packs in order to support different combinations ofDS1 and DS3 interfaces and to enable an in-service switch from OC-3 to OC-12.

• In-service electrical upgrade from DS1 to DS1/DS3:

– VLNC6 to VLNC5

– VLNC26 to VLNC25

• In-service optical upgrade from OC-3 to OC-12:

– VLNC5 to VLNC25

– VLNC6 to VLNC26

Features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Networking capabilities...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section briefly describes the major networking capabilities supported through 1665DMXplore, Release 2.1.

High-speed optical

1665 DMXplore supports OC-3 and OC-12 linear optical extensions using 1+1protection as the default protection option. Single-homed and dual-homed ringextensions are supported. UPSR switching can be used at the STS-1 and VT1.5 levelwith circuit packs in the MAIN slots that support the low-speed interfaces on the shelf.For additional information see“Optical topologies” (p. 3-2).

VT1.5 granularity

1665 DMXplore supports VT1.5 granularity. Full VT granularity is supported for theOC-n interfaces on the Main packs. VT cross-connections are supported to the DS1ports and the VLNC15 and VLNC30. Cross-connections are supported on up to 9 ofthe 12 available STS1s on the VLNC15 and VLNC30 packs. VT cross-connections aresupported for up to 6 STS1 on the VLNC15 and VLNC30.

Private Line Ethernet

1665 DMXplore supports dedicated Private Line links between two Ethernetend-points. Private Line service requires minimal provisioning, typically just SONETcross-connections. Fractional Private Line over SONET is also supported. Foradditional information see“Ethernet services” (p. 3-14)andAppendix A, “Ethernet”.

For more information about Ethernet circuit packs, refer to“Group C circuit packs”(p. 4-11).

Client Signal Fail

Beginning in Release 2.1, 1665 DMXplore supports Client Signal Fail . Client SignalFail can be monitored on all Ethernet VCGs.

Features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

2-5

DS1/DS3 terminal loopbacks

1665 DMXplore supports terminal loopbacks of its DS1 and DS3 interfaces. A terminalloopback of the 1665 DMXplore connects the entire signal that is about to bepassed-through the low-speed interface to the DSX back toward the cross-connectfabric to the high-speed optical line. During a terminal loopback, the low-speed DSXinterface outputs an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). Terminal loopbacks are used duringinstallation and maintenance procedures to test the integrity of near and far-endinterfaces as well as fibers and system circuitry.

DS1/DS3 facility loopbacks

1665 DMXplore supports DS1/DS3 facility loopbacks. A facility loopback loops thesignal at the low-speed interface so that the signal received from the DS1/DS3 facilityis transmitted back toward the facility. Facility loopbacks are used for installation andmaintenance procedures to test the integrity of the low-speed facilities and theDS1/DS3 terminal equipment.

Features Networking capabilities

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Cross-connection types...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore has cross-connect capabilities offering users flexibility in directingtraffic flow through systems to support a wide variety of customer applications usingtwo-way cross-connections.

Making cross-connections

Cross-connections are made by specifying the SONET rate (VT1.5 or STS-n), the endpoint addresses (AIDs), and the cross-connection type (for example, two-way). Eachsingle cross-connection command establishes a two-way cross-connection.

For simpler installation and turn up 1665 DMXplore has been designed with a defaultset of cross-connections and a default 1+1 application (1+1 protection). The defaultcross-connections are only applicable to the 1+1 application. This allows for aplugand playoption when installing the 1665 DMXplore.

In Release 2.1, it becomes possible to disable all default cross-connections.

Manual cross-connect rates

The following signals can be cross-connected:

• VT1.5

• STS-1

• STS-3c

Add/drop

An add/drop cross-connection is any connection between a high-speed (network)interface and a low-speed (tributary) interface.

Unidirectional Path Switched Ring

A Unidirectional Path Switched Ring (UPSR) is self-healing ring configuration inwhich traffic is sent onto both rotations (both fibers) of the ring in opposite directions.Path-switchedmeans that if the working signal fails, the path switches to the protectionsignal. Protection switching is done independently for each SONET path. UPSRsoperate in an integrated, single-ended fashion— negating the need for complexnetwork-level coordination in the effort to restore traffic.

Linear 1+1

The linear application mode is a standards-compliant 1+1 protected configuration,providing unidirectional, non-revertive line switching.

Features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

2-7

Locked DSn cross-connection (R2.1)

In the lockedmode, 1665 DMXplore does not select the best signal from both rotationsof a UPSR. Instead, traffic is added and dropped (locked) from one rotation of the ringonly (provisionable). The main advantage of locked DS1 cross-connections is the lackof UPSR switching which also results in the ability to reuse time slots around a UPSR.

1665 DMXplore also allows the mixing of both locked and unlocked VTs within thesame STS-1. With 1665 DMXplore, the following cross-connections may coexistwithin the same STS-1: VT add/drop, VT pass-through, VT locked to Side 1, and VTlocked to Side 2.

Features Cross-connection types

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Management and operations features...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section briefly describes the major features related to management and operationof 1665 DMXplore, supported through Release 2.1. It also includes descriptions offeatures that will be supported in future releases of 1665 DMXplore.

WaveStar ® CIT GUI

The CIT manages the 1665 DMXplore system through the serial RS-232 or IAO/LANport, providing TL1 messaging, software download, and full operations andprovisioning capability via a Graphical User Interface (GUI) or TL1 command builder.The CIT can run a full-featured GUI or TL1 scripts. Using the GUI, a crafts personcan access all 1665 DMXplore software functions and context-sensitive help. The TL1command builder is a flexible TL1 command builder that supports full TL1management through LAN or RS-232 interfaces. It provides a simple list of TL1commands and prompts to help complete them more quickly.

The CIT is not used to download release software to the system (the PC is used, butnot the CIT software). Release software can be copied to other NEs remotely, providedthe initial download of 1665 DMXplore release software has occurred on each system.


Performance monitoring (PM) data is reported on the VT1.5, STS-1, STS-3c, DS1,DS3, Fast Ethernet, OC-3, and OC-12 levels.

CLI management

Ethernet operations supported by the VLNC40 are managed by a separate CommandLine Interface (CLI) that is access by a serial or network connection to this circuitpack. Details of the CLI are covered in the 1665 DMXplore CLI Guide.

TL1 management

TL1 management is supported via the RS-232 and LAN interfaces.WaveStar® CITprovides TL1 management through the RS-232 or LAN interfaces.

Features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

2-9

Remote software download

Operating software for 1665 DMXplore can be downloaded or upgraded remotely overthe data communications channel or the operations network.

Via the DCC

Software and software upgrades can be downloaded to remote NEs from a centraloffice site or any 1665 DMX/1665 DMXtend connected to the 1665 DMXplore via thedata communications channel (DCC).

Via the operations network

Software and software upgrades can be downloaded to remote NEs via the FileTransfer Protocol (FTP) from aWaveStar® CIT over the IAO LAN connected to theLAN port on the SYSCTL. This requires that FTP is enabled on the NE, and that IP isenabled and properly configured on the SYSCTL LAN port.

Proxy ARP

The address resolution protocol (ARP) is a method for associating the physical mediaaccess code (MAC) of a hardware device on a local physical network with a networkaddress that can be routed for use over the larger overall network. Using this protocol,one network device tries to locate another device associated with a specific networkaddress by broadcasting an ARP request on the on the local physical network. TheARP request contains the IP address of the device being sought. If a device on thelocal network has been configured with this network address, it responds with to theARP request its physical MAC address. Once the association between local MAChardware address and the network address of the device is established it cancommunicate with other devices on remote networks, using its network address.

ARP requests are not broadcast or routed beyond the local physical network media.Standard ARP cannot resolve addresses for network devices on the single logicalnetwork if that logical network consists of multiple physical networks linked bydifferent physical media. Devices on one physical network cannot receive ARP requestsfrom devices on another physical network. Proxy ARP uses a system, called ARPsub-net gateway, to answer ARP requests received from a device on one of its physical(LAN) networks for a target that is located on a different physical network.

1665 DMXplore supports IP tunneling to encapsulate and route IP packets overOSI-based embedded DCN. This allows SNMP manager/NTP server located in theIP-based access Data Communication Network (DCN) to communicate with NEslocated in the OSI-based DCN. The tunnels also physically separate the devices on theIP network. Proxy ARP support on the Gateway Network Element (GNE) eliminatesthe need to create static routes to route the IP packets from the access DCN to theembedded DCN.

Features Management and operations features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

ARP subnet gateway (RFC 1027)

The ARP Subnet Gateway implementation adheres to RFC1027 which states that, if theIP networks of the source and target hosts of an ARP request are different, an ARPsubnet gateway implementation should not reply to the request. This is to prevent theARP subnet gateway from being used to reach foreign IP networks and possibly bypasssecurity checks provided by IP gateways.

Because of this RFC requirement, the IP addresses of both the GNE and RNE must bein the same network with respect to network class (A, B and C). For example, if theGNE has a class C IP address 192.168.170.1, the RNE must have an IP address in thesame Class C network, in the form 192.168.170.x. For proxy ARP to function properly,the Remote NE IP address must be in the same subnet as the IP address of the router,as specified by the network mask on the router. Otherwise, the router will not send theARP request to the appropriate LAN port, and will instead route the packet through itsdefault IP gateway into the IP cloud.

However, the IP address of the remote NE should not be in the same subnet as the IPaddress of the GNE, from either the GNEs network mask perspective or the RNEsnetwork mask perspective. An easy way to achieve this on the RNE is to assign a32-bit network mask to all RNEs.

OSI seven-layer protocol stack

This feature provides interworking using the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)seven-layer protocol stack over the data communications channel (DCC). The OSIseven-layer protocol stack refers to the OSI reference model, a logical structure fornetwork operations standardized by the International Standards Organization (ISO).

Support of Simple Network Management Protocol

1665 DMXplore makes use of Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). SNMPis the most common protocol used by data network management applications to querya management agent using a supported Management Information Base (MIB). SNMPoperates at the OSI Application layer. The IP-based SNMP is the basis of most networkmanagement software, to the extent that today the phrasemanaged deviceimpliesSNMP compliance. 1665 DMXplore provides limited SNMP support of certain reportsand traps. For more information, refer to“SNMP parameters and traps” (p. 5-63)inChapter 6, “System planning and engineering”of this document. SNMP is supportedon all Ethernet circuit packs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

2-11

Remote NE status

This feature partitions a subnetwork into maintenance domains (alarm groups). AnAlarm Group is a set of NEs that share status information. Alarm groups can be nodesin a ring or any other logical grouping such as a maintenance or geographical group.Each Level 1 area can be identified as a separate Alarm Group, as long as it does notexceed 250 nodes. You must provision one NE in an Alarm Group as an alarmgateway NE (AGNE) to support office alarms and a summary alarm information ofremote NEs in the local alarm report. More than one AGNE can be provisioned peralarm group, but this is not recommended.

Security

Security features include 1-999 day password aging, customized login proprietarymessages, and up to 150 users.

TARP

1665 DMXplore is compatible with any other-vendor NEs that support Target IDAddress Resolution Protocol (TARP), OSI, IAO LAN, and TL1 as specified inTelcordia Technologies GR-253.

SONET

Many of the traditional SONET maintenance, provisioning, operations, control, andsynchronization features are included in the 1665 DMXplore. The flexible SONETstandard provides a formidable foundation for the 1665 DMXplore to build upon.

TIRKS/NMA/TEMS compatibility

1665 DMXplore is supported by Telcordia™ OSsTIRKS, NMA, andTEMS.

Multivendor operations Interworking

1665 DMXplore supports interoperability with many vendors’ equipment; particularlythose that support GR-253 standards-based SONET.

Product Family 2000/ WaveStar ® Product Family interworking

1665 DMXplore supports TARP interoperability with Product Family 2000 nodes suchas the FT-2000 OC-48 Lightwave System, the DDM-2000 OC-3/OC-12 Multiplexer,and the DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer.

1665 DMXplore also provides interoperability with allWaveStar® Product Familynodes supporting TARP.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-12 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Synchronization features...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Synchronization is an important part of all SONET products. 1665 DMXplore isdesigned for high performance and reliable synchronization and can be used in anumber of synchronization environments.

Synchronization features

1665 DMXplore supports three synchronization reference configurations:

• Line Timing from incoming OC-3/12 signal (for small COs or remote sites).

• Free Running from the multiplexer’s internal SMC (SONET Minimum Clock)Timing Generator (no synchronization inputs).

• Holdover using the multiplexer’s internal SMC oscillator to maintain the last knowngood reference frequency.

These timing modes are supported by the embedded SMC in the MAIN circuit pack.The basic timing modes can be combined into various network configurations.

Internal timing functions such as reference interfaces, the on-board clock elements, andtiming distribution, are provided by the SMC Timing Generator. The timing generatordistributes clock and frame signals, derived from the 20 ppm generator, to the rest ofthe system.

Line timing mode

In line timing mode, the timing generator derives local shelf timing from the incomingservice OC-n signal in the MAIN 1 or MAIN 2 slot. If one of the OC-n (OC-3/12)references is corrupted or unavailable, the timing generator will make a protectionswitch to the other reference without causing timing degradations. If all OC-n timingsignals are lost (for example, due to a cable cut), the timing generator will switch toholdover mode. The timing generator will normally switch back to the line timingmode when a good reference is available, but it can be provisioned to require a manualswitch.

Free running mode

In free running mode, no mode switching is performed. The timing generator derivestiming from the internal timing generator. This oscillator provides +/− 20 ppmaccuracy. At most, one NE in a network should be provisioned in the free runningmode. All other NEs in the subnetwork should be line timed to this free runningsystem to avoid performance degradation.

Features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

2-13

Holdover mode

When there is a synchronization reference failure on a system that is line timed andunprotected, the 20 ppm timing generator will switch to holdover mode and continue toprovide system timing, using the internal oscillator to maintain the last known goodreference frequency.

Features Synchronization features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-14 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

3 3Topologies

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (1665 DMXplore) supports a wide range of serviceapplications and a variety of network topologies economically and efficiently.

Contents

Optical topologies 3-2

Service applications 3-3

Small or medium-sized business access 3-4

Wireless optical build-out 3-6

Ethernet extension 3-8

Hitless bandwidth provisioning with LCAS 3-10

Packet topologies 3-12

Ethernet services 3-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

3-1

Optical topologies...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore supports OC-3 and OC-12 optical connections for the transport ofTDM or Packet over SONET (POS) data. This section briefly describes the majoroptical and packet network topologies supported through Release 2.1.

High-speed (network interface) linear optical extensions

1665 DMXplore supports 1+1 protected linear optical extensions. 1+1 protection is thedefault protection scheme and comes provisioned on every shelf, but the user mayprovision UPSR switching if desired. The high-speed linear optical extension mayconnect the 1665 DMXplore shelf, by way of OC-3/12 network interfaces in the MAINslots, to an OC-12, OC-48 or OC-192 node with OC-3/12 tributary interfaces or to anOC-3/12 node through the network interface. This feature performs linear switchingbased on line layer defects.

High-speed (network interface) OC-3/12 UPSR

1665 DMXplore supports UPSR on both the STS-1 and VT1.5 level. When both Mainslots are equipped with VLNC6, VLNC5, VLNC26, or VLNC25 OLIUs circuit packs,a switch fabric supports the low-speed interfaces. Each circuit pack establishes both aneast-to-west and a west-to-east rotation on the ring. A UPSR ring provides a veryvaluable and reliable foundation for services protecting against fiber cuts and nodefailures.

Single- and dual-homed ring extensions

The 1665 DMXplore supports high-speed OC-3/12 extensions, including single- anddual- homed ring extensions. A DDM-2000 OC-3, OC-12, 1665 DMXplore, or 1665DMXtend may be the add/drop multiplexer on the high-speed ring.

Fast Ethernet Private Line over SONET

1665 DMXplore Fast Ethernet (10/100 Mbps) Private Lines enable premium datatransport services offering 10/100 Mbps transport with optional bandwidth provisioningup to 100Mbps (variable bandwidth provisioning of 1, 2, or 3 STS1s. With theVLNC15 and VLNC30, 1665 DMXplore also allows Fast Ethernet provisioning at theVT1.5 level. Fast Ethernet Private Lines provide the user the ability to transport framescompletely transparently between two 1665 DMXplore NEs. No VLAN knowledge orpacket-layer provisioning is required by the user in this application. Simple, SONETcross-connect provisioning is all that is required. These Fast Ethernet capabilities allowthe 1665 DMXplore to provide dedicated bandwidth for individual customers and fastSONET-layer restoration.

Topologies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Service applications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The following sections detail some service applications supported by the 1665DMXplore shelf. This set of applications does not describe all possible applications ofthe 1665 DMXplore, but merely shows some scenarios for the unit.

Topologies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

3-3

Small or medium-sized business access...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore provides a low-cost solution for offering high-speed access to small tomedium-sized enterprise end customers. 1665 DMXplore can provide businesses withreliable transport for both voice and data service using DS1, DS3, and 10/100 MbpsEthernet over SONET protected OC-3 or OC-12 lines.

Enterprise access

1665 DMXplore is optimized for low-cost, small footprint entry into end-userenvironments. 1665 DMXplore can be placed in an office building, medical facility,hotel, college dormitory, or any building housing a moderate amount of distinct endusers. In its ability to provide a flexible mix of DS1, DS3, and 10/100 Mbps interfaces,1665 DMXplore is ideal as a collection point for multiple lines within a diverse MTU(Multi-Tenant Unit), providing a variety of both voice and data services.

Figure 3-1 1665 DMXplore providing enterprise access

Metro Core

OC-3 UPSR/1+1

MA-DMXplore-11

1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore

OC-48/192 UPSR

OC-12 UPSR

1665 DMXplore provides:- DS1/DS3- 10/100 Mbp Ethernet

1665DMXtend

1665DMXtend




1665DMX1665

DMX

1665DMX

UPSROC-3

Topologies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Application advantage

Using 1665 DMXplore in this application results in the following advantages:

• 1665 DMXplore is designed as an ultra-compact, full-service TDM/Ethernet CPE,eliminating the need for larger NEs or data-specific switches and routers within thebuilding. This is extremely advantageous as the cost of renting space in high-risebasements for telecommunications equipment is high.

• Low-cost fiber terminations directly to the business.

• Flexible service offerings.

• Service flexibility with a 16 port DS1/ two port DS3 circuit pack, a 4 port FastEthernet (10/100 Mbps) pack, and a Fast Ethernet pack supporting 2 100BASE-LXoptical ports and 4 10/100BASE-TX electrical ports; all of which are meant tofacilitate cost-effective and steady growth.

• Easily managed solution: if the 1665 DMXplore is connected to the 1665DMX/1665 DMXtend, 1675 LambdaUnite MSS, orWaveStar® 2.5G/10G theremotely located 1665 DMXplore can be managed from the central office using theWaveStar® CIT.

• Reliable SONET protection of both voice and data services.

• Integrated Ethernet switching and Ethernet compatibility with BLEC/enterpriseswitches.

Topologies Small or medium-sized business access

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

3-5

Wireless optical build-out...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore is environmentally hardened for outside and wireless cabinetdeployment using OC-3/12 high-speed interfaces.

Description

1665 DMXplore can be deployed in outside cabinets at such places as wireless/cellularsites, allowing for cost-effective aggregation of DS1, DS3, 10/100 Mbps Ethernet, andOC-3/12 signals and reliable, SONET protected transport of these services to Hubnodes at the CO in a scalable, compact, and easily managed NE. In this application,1665 DMXplore is line-timed from an NE that is timed from an external timingreference. For example, 1665 DMX is a Stratum 3 timed device from which the 1665DMXplore is line-timed.

Topologies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007


Using 1665 DMXplore in this application results in the following advantages:

• Cost-effective transport of wireless service in an environmentally hardened unitdesigned for outside deployment.

• Compact size of 1665 DMXplore provides for reduced cost, space, and heatgeneration at antenna sites.

• Easily managed monitoring of equipment at antenna site (such as doors, firealarms, heating or cooling systems, etc.) through the miscellaneous discreteinterfaces on 1665 DMXplore (4 MDIs and 4 MDOs).

Figure 3-2 Wireless optical build-out

OpticalCore/PSTN

1665 DMX 1665 DMX

1665 DMX

1665 DMX

Hub Node

CentralOffice

OC-12/48/192

4

MA-DMXplore-021

LANDS1/DS3

OC-3

OC-3

OC-3



1665 DMXplore

1665 DMXplore

1665 DMXplore

1665 DMXplore

Topologies Wireless optical build-out

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

3-7

Ethernet extension...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore provides a low-cost solution for offering high-speed access to small tomedium-sized enterprise end customers. 1665 DMXplore can provide businesses withreliable transport for both voice and data service using DS1, DS3, and 10/100 MbpsEthernet over SONET protected OC-3 or OC-12 lines.

Description

The following figure shows 1665 DMXplores in a few different offices within thesame high-rise building. With its OC-3/12 MAIN optics, the 1665 DMXplore is perfectfor the application pictured below because it can serve as a collection point for variousindividual business groups collocated in the same office, business unit, floor, orbuilding. It can then transmit traffic either to a 1665 DMX/1665 DMXtend/1665DMXplore located in the basement or in a wiring closet, or directly to a serviceprovider’s site outside of the building. Applications include T1 (DS1), T3 (DS3), and10/100 Mbps Ethernet.

With its Ethernet Private Line capabilities, 1665 DMXplore can provide secure linesfor vital business data within a private LAN. Furthermore, because Metro1665DMXplore employs transparent Ethernet switching through SONET networks, theintegrity and security of the private LAN that enterprises enjoy on-site is preservedthrough the larger network. Thus, multiple offices using 1665 DMXplore at differentsites can be connected by the same, secure Ethernet Private Line.

Topologies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007


Using the 1665 DMXplore in this application results in the following advantages:

1665 DMXplore is designed as an ultra-compact, full-service TDM/Ethernet CPE,eliminating the need for larger NEs or data-specific switches and routers within thebuilding. This is extremely advantageous as the cost of renting space in high-risebasements for telecommunications equipment is high.

• Enhances fiber up the riser distribution within the building

• Offers low-cost Ethernet and TDM Private Line transport

• Enables next generation Ethernet over SONET services such as VLANs,Transparent LANs, and Ethernet Private Lines

• Supports both electrical and optical Ethernet interfaces

• Low-cost multi-service optical BLEC/Enterprise network

• Strong transmission capability of high-speed (OC-3, OC-12, Gigabit Ethernet)interfaces compensates for poor quality fiber within the building

• Reliable, SONET protection of both voice and packet services

• Integrated Ethernet switching and Ethernet compatibility with BLEC/enterpriseswitches

Figure 3-3 Ethernet extension

OC-3/12UPSR/ 1+1

METROCO/POP

MA-DMXplore-019

1665DMX



1665DMXtend


1665 DMXplore

1665 DMXplore

OC-31+1/

UPSR

10/100 Mbpsand/orTDM

Topologies Ethernet extension

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

3-9

Hitless bandwidth provisioning with LCAS...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) enables in-service (or non-service affecting)bandwidth increases/decreases for Ethernet links.

Description

1665 DMXplore supports standard LCAS per ITU G.7041. Bandwidth changes toEthernet links are done one span at a time. Without LCAS, provisioning a bandwidthchange on the first span of a packet ring takes down Ethernet service around the restof the ring until the entire ring is set to operate at the same capacity.

With LCAS, planned increases or decreases of bandwidth are hitless (that is, they donot affect service). As the following figure illustrates, when capacity changes to eachspan around the packet ring are provisioned, service is not interrupted. While the spanbetween nodes A and B is set to 15 VTs, the remaining spans continue to function at10 VTs.

Application advantages

As the global market for communication services is in continuous flux, both advancesin technology and changes in state, regional, and national economies exert variouspressures on your network. Accordingly, capacity changes to your network arenecessary on a regular basis.

Figure 3-4 Hitless bandwidth provisioning: 1st span

Ethernet

Central Office

1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore

OC-3/12

JK-E-10-x .epsplore

15 VT1.5s 10 VT1.5s

10 VT1.5s10 VT1.5s

TDM

Cap


acity of span one changedto 15 VT1.5s in-service. Therest of the packet ring continuesto function.

Topologies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

LCAS enables you to meet the challenges of today’s market without affecting service.With LCAS, you are not in danger of violating stringent Enterprise customer SLAs.You can also deploy you SONET network according to long-term growth forecasts, andget the most out of the ability to adjust Private Line and packet ring capacity withinyour SONET lines.

Topologies Hitless bandwidth provisioning with LCAS

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

3-11

Packet topologies...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Packet networks can be created over a variety of SONET topologies. Because thepacket network connections use VLAN or Private Line connections over SONET, thetopology of the resulting packet network can be different from the topology of theSONET transport network. For example, a Private Line service uses a point-to-pointpacket topology, but may be carried over a SONET ring, which may in turn beconfigured with UPSR protection or no SONET protection.

The following packet topologies are supported:

• Point-to-point

• Multipoint

• Hub-and-spoke

Point-to-point

The point-to-point topology is a simple end-to-end connection, used to join twonetwork nodes that are not located on the same physical network. For example, abusiness at one location may connect to an ISP at a distant location, via apoint-to-point connection. This point-to-point connectivity can be established overdifferent media, using dedicated cross-connects or tunneling protocols. Point-to-pointconnectivity over SONET benefits from the redundancy provided by SONET protectionmechanisms. Point-to-point connectivity can also use data-layer protection mechanisms,such as Link Aggregation.

Multipoint

In a multipoint network all points converse with each other. Note that connecting threelocations by two point-to-point connections is not the same as if done by a multipointconnection. The location in the middle of the point-to point connections would have toprovide external switching to enable the outer locations to converse with each other.

One useful case of multipoint configurations is a packet ring. In a closed-ringconfiguration all nodes converse. An internal spanning tree may be configured forprotection and loop prevention. This is independent of any spanning tree protocol thatmay be running on the subscriber’s network. The spanning treebreaksone link,necessary in Ethernet bridging to avoid a loop. In the case of a link failure, thespanning tree algorithm restores connectivity by moving itsbreak to coincide with thefailed link.

A special case of multipoint configuration is where one node acts as a hub and allother nodes converse only with it. This hub configuration differs from a hub-and-spokenetwork only in that the spokes share bandwidth to reach the hub. It is more efficient

Topologies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-12 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

and may be more practical because it conserves hub ports; only two VCG (WAN) portsare needed, regardless of the number of spokes. (In a packet ring configuration thebroken link is placed between the two nodes most remote from the hub; because thosenodes don’t converse, there is no loss of useful bandwidth.) Both this topology and thehub-and-spoke described next are sometimes called point-to-multipoint.

Hub-and-spoke

The hub-and-spoke network is a hybrid between point-to-point and multipoint. Eachnode connects to the hub via a dedicated link; but, the links terminate on an embeddedswitch at the hub. In a typical back-haul application, the switch aggregates the trafficinto a single Ethernet link for hand off. As in the multipoint hub network, tags are usedto identify and direct traffic to and from the hub.

Topologies Packet topologies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

3-13

Ethernet services...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Most end-users and many edge-access networks use Ethernet to connect to theirnext-higher tier network. 1665 DMXplore supports Private Line Ethernet connections.

The Private Line services are transported over their own dedicated SONET time slots.If present, Ethernet switching functions may or may not be shared.

Private Line services are point-to-point in nature while Private LAN services aremultipoint. Private LAN services always involve internal Ethernet switching whilePrivate Line services do not.

Private Line over SONET

Private Line service over SONET provides a dedicated link between two locations. TheEthernet ports at either end and the allocated SONET bandwidth between them arecompletely dedicated to the subscriber. Private Line service requires minimalprovisioning, typically just SONET cross-connections. Fractional Private Line uses afractional portion of SONET bandwidth to provide to provide an Ethernet link withlimited bandwidth. It is a form of rate control that also improves efficiency by onlyconsuming the required SONET bandwidth in STS-1 increments. For information abouthow STS-1 tributaries can be virtually concatenated to provide Private Line service,refer to“Virtual concatenation” (p. A-6).

The intermediate link of an Ethernet Private Line connection prohibits Layer 2functionality between the two end-points. The performance of a Fractional Private Linewith limited bandwidth may be improved using flow control. Because flow control is alayer 2 mechanism, it must be managed across the Private Line by the devicesterminating the physical Ethernet links on either end. For information about flowcontrol functionality on 1665 DMXplore, refer to“Flow control” (p. A-8).

For more information about Ethernet circuit packs, refer to“Group C circuit packs”(p. 4-11).

Applications

Ethernet applications are examples of what users can do with the services andtopologies described in previous sections. The user can be the owner of the equipmentor a client of the owner. For example, an ISP can have a private network or buy theservices from an LEC to construct the application.

LAN interconnect

LAN extension

ISP access

Topologies

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-14 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Internet access

LAN interconnect

Two or more enterprise LANs are interconnected. The LANs may be point-to-pointPrivate Line connections, in which case Ethernet switching services are not provided.If Virtual Private Lines are desired, Ethernet switching is required. Even so, in athree-node LAN Interconnect application composed of Virtual Private Lines the middlenode has two termination ports, one for each neighbor. This is different from athree-node LAN Extension (next application) using Virtual Private LAN in which themiddle node may have only one (effectively a hub) port.

LAN extension

Sometimes called intranet or Layer 2 VPN, this extends an enterprise LAN to multiplelocations via embedded Ethernet switching. Either Private LAN or Virtual Private LANmay be used.

Transparent LANis a common form of LAN Extension in which the subscriber’straffic is transported without regard to the presence of subscriber VLAN tags.Transparency is achieved by the use of Port Tags, avoiding the need for the provider toadminister VLANs with subscribers. The Port Tag is effectively a customer ID; onlyports in the network assigned a particular customer ID will exchange traffic.

In Non-Transparent LANs, greater flexibility is available when the subscriber’s 802.1Qtags are used for traffic management (802.1Q mode). For example, the priority bitswithin the tag can be used to give a portion of the subscriber’s traffic, for exampleVoIP, preferential treatment through the network versus its file transfer or internettraffic. Although in a Virtual Private LAN service a Non-transparent LAN applicationrequires the administration of VLAN Id’s among customers, in a Private LAN whereno other customers share the embedded Ethernet switch this is not necessary.

ISP access

In this application an ISP uses a provider’s network to collect internet traffic. It is alsoan example of a trunking application, where traffic from multiple customers is handedoff to the ISP router on a single trunk link for efficiency. The Virtual Private LANservice may be used to efficiently transport the best-effort internet traffic. It is typicallydone using the 802.1Q mode for separating the ISP’s clients’ traffic. If the ISP’s routersupports stacked VLANs then it can be done in Transparent Mode The trunk link maybe GbE while the access links may be 10 or 100 Mb/s Ethernet.

Topologies Ethernet services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

3-15

Internet access

In this application the ISP owns the network. In this case the clients’ traffic isuntagged. The ISP adds tags for customer separation using the 802.1Q mode. The ISPadministers the tags directly, there is no third party involved.

Video distribution

Video distribution can be accomplished using Ethernet Multicasting. A Private LANservice is used to guarantee the bandwidth. Video traffic, generated at the head end, issent using a multicast address. Transparent mode or 802.1Q mode may be used. Ateach node the traffic is dropped to its user and also duplicated and sent to the rest ofthe Private LAN. Because of the duplication process, the maximum throughput is onlyhalf the line rate, for example 500 Mb/s on GbE links.

An alternative is to use SONET drop-and-continue cross-connections to implementmulticasting. This is a variation of the Private LAN service. Although it is limited toone-way video distribution, it supports full line rate throughput.

Topologies Ethernet services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-16 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4 4Product description

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter provides a detailed view of the 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (1665DMXplore) architecture. After introducing the 1665 DMXplore shelf, this chapterdescribes the system circuit packs, control, power, and cabling.

Contents

Shelf description 4-2

Circuit pack codes 4-9

Group C circuit packs 4-11

Main circuit pack descriptions 4-15

Control circuit packs 4-18

Power specifications 4-22

Cabling 4-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-1

Shelf description...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore is a single-shelf multiplexer that offers the following capabilities.

• DS-1 and DS-3 multiplexing over OC-3 or OC-12 facilities depending upon thetype of MAIN circuit pack installed

• 10/100BaseT Electrical Ethernet or 100BaseLX optical Ethernet connections,depending upon the type of Function Group C circuit pack installed, for PrivateLine transport of Ethernet over SONET

• Circuit packs in the MAIN slots and Group C slot are controlled by the VLNC1System Controller in the SYSCTL slot, which has RS-232 and LAN CIT interfaces.

Three shelf versions are available.

• The 1665 DMXplore wall-mount shelf

• The 1665 DMXplore rack-mount shelf

• The 1850 Transport Service Switch 5 High Capacity rack-mount shelf

Shelf size

The following table lists the dimensions of the three shelves that are compatible with1665 DMXplore circuit packs.

Table 4-1 1665 DMXplore dimensions and weight

Dimensions 1665 DMXplore

Wall-Mount Rack-Mount 1850 TSS-5 HighCapacityRack-Mount

Width 7.5in. (190mm) 17.3in. (439mm) 17.4in. (441mm)

Height 10.5in. (267mm) 3.5in. (89mm) 4.9in. (125mm)

Depth 12.0 (340.8mm) 13.5in. (343mm) 11.8in. (280.6mm)

Shelf Weight Empty: 7 lbs. (3.175 kg.)

Full: 10 lbs. (4.536 kg.)

10 lbs. (4.536kg)

15 lbs. (6.804kg)

Capacity

The capacity of 1665 DMXplore depends upon the circuit packs installed in theMAIN1 and MAIN2 slots. These circuit packs provide the main switch fabric for 1665DMXplore and provide OC-3 or OC-12 interfaces to the high-speed network. 1665DMXplore provides a VT1.5 and STS-1 cross-connect fabric for a variety of signals.

Product description

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

The list below shows the number and type of signals that 1665 DMXplore cantransport using the capabilities of the circuit packs available through Release 2.1.

• 16 DS1s (equipment protection through MAIN packs)

• 2 DS3s (VLNC5 and VLNC25 only - equipment protection through MAIN packs)

• 3 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet Private Line

• 2 100BASE-LX Optical Ethernet Private Line (VLNC30 only)

• 1 or 2 OC-3 (protected/unprotected)

• 1 or 2 OC-12 (protected/unprotected)

The signals supported at any one time depend upon the circuit packs that are installedin the shelf. For details about the interfaces supported by each circuit pack, seeTable4-2, “Circuit Packs in 1665 DMXplore shelf” (p. 4-9).

Shelf views

The following figures show the front of the 1665 DMXplore wall-mount shelf, the1850 TSS-5 High Capacity rack-mount shelf, and both the front and rear of the 1665DMXplore Rack Mount shelf. All shelves are equipped with the following:

• OC-3/DS1 Main circuit packs (VLNC6) in the MAIN1 and MAIN2 slot

• Fast Ethernet circuit pack (VLNC15) in the Function Group C slot

• System Controller (SYSCTL) in the CTL slot (VLNC1)

Other circuit packs are available for the CTL, MAIN1, MAIN2, and Group C slots.See“Circuit pack codes” (p. 4-9)for circuit pack details.

Wall-mount shelf

The 1665 DMXplore wall-mount shelf provides access to its electrical interfaces on anaccess panel at the right side of the shelf. Access to removable circuit packs, theinterfaces on circuit packs, and the built-in electrical interfaces of the shelf is providedfrom the front of the shelf.

Product description Shelf description

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-3

Rack-mount shelf

The 1665 DMXplore rack-mount shelf occupies 2U of vertical space. It providesaccess to its electrical interfaces on rear of the shelf. Access to removable circuit packsand the interfaces on circuit packs is provided from the front of the shelf. The shelf is

Figure 4-1 Wall-mount shelf front view

C GROUP

B GROUP

A/D GROUP

CTL

4

8

12

16

41 2 3

1

5

9

13

2

6

10

14

3

7

11

15

MA-DMXplore-007

MDI MDO ALARM

1 2 3

OUT

PWR-A

ON

ON

-48V-A

RTN-A

RTN COM

GRD

RTN-B

-48V-B

PWR-B

IN

LAN

FAULT

MN/ABN

IN IN

OUT OUT

CIT

RS-232

UPDATE

ACO

CR/MJ

ACTIVE

FAULT

ACTIVE

FAULT

S1:1SYSCTL

VLNC1

1665 DMXplore

S1:1XX:x

VLNC6S1:1XX:x

VLNC6

AB

CD

EF

GH

IJK

LM


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

shipped with brackets that can be rotated to mount the unit in a 19-inch or 23-inchequipment rack. It is shown below, equipped for installation in a 19-inch rack. Optionalmounting brackets can be ordered for mounting the shelf in an ETSI equipment rack.

1850 TSS-5 High Capacity rack-mount shelf

The 1850 TSS-5 High Capacity rack-mount shelf is compatible with 1665 DMXplorecircuit packs, and occupies less than 3U of vertical space. Access to removable circuitpacks and all interfaces is provided from the front of the shelf. The access panel forlow-speed electrical interfaces is located on a removable circuit pack, designatedVLIU10, that is installed on the front of the shelf. The shelf is shipped with bracketsthat can be rotated to mount the unit in a 19-inch or 23-inch equipment rack. It isshow below, equipped for installation in a 19-inch rack. Optional mounting bracketscan be ordered for mounting the shelf in an ETSI equipment rack.

Figure 4-2 1665 DMXplore rack-mount front and rear views

FA

ULT

FANFAULT

PWRON

A

B

PWRON

BA

RC

OD

E

AC

TIV

E

LA

N

FA

ULT

CR

MJ

MN

AG

N

UP

DN

T

AC

O/T

ST

CIT

RS

232

FA

ULT

IN AC

TIV

E

OU

T

FA

ULT

IN AC

TIV

E

OU

T

17.3 In.

3.5 In.

MK-DMXplore-001

-48-ARTN-ARTNGRDRTN-B-48-B

CO

MDI MDO1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CGROUP

A/DGROUP

BGROUP

OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ALARM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12109 16151413

ABCDEFGHIJKLM

18.32 In.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-5

Shelf description

As shown inFigure 4-1, “Wall-mount shelf front view” (p. 4-4), Figure 4-2, “1665DMXplore rack-mount front and rear views” (p. 4-5), andFigure 4-3, “1850 TSS-5High Capacity rack-mount front view” (p. 4-6), 1665 DMXplore supports 1 FunctionGroup C slot, 2 Main slots, and one CTL slot. The following information describes thetypes of circuit packs that are installed in these slots. For specific circuit packinformation, see“Circuit pack codes” (p. 4-9).

Function Group C slot

The Function Group C slot is designed to house Fast Ethernet Private Line circuitpacks. It is mapped directly to the four, GRP C RJ-45 connectors on the access panelof the wall-mount shelf and at the rear of the rack-mount shelf. On the High Capacityrack-mount shelf, four RJ-45 connectors, numbered GRP C 1 through GRP C 4 on theVLIU10, are associated with this circuit pack.

Main slots (MAIN1 and MAIN2)

The MAIN1 and MAIN2 slots are reserved for the main service circuit packs. Theyprovide the high-speed optical links from which bandwidth can be mapped to supportthe lower bandwidth TDM and packet interfaces on the shelf. The SMC (20 ppm)timing generator and main TDM switch fabrics are embedded in these circuit packs.

Control slot

The CTL slot is reserved for the non-redundant System Controller (SYSCTL) circuitpack. The System Controller contains LAN and RS-232 jacks on the front of thecircuit pack for administrative connections.

Figure 4-3 1850 TSS-5 High Capacity rack-mount front view

4.9 In.

MK-DMXplore-001

18.31 In.

17.4 In.

FA

ULT

FANFAULT

PWRON

A

B

PWRON

BA

RC

OD

E

AC

TIV

E

LA

N

FA

ULT

CR

MJ

MN

AG

N

UP

DN

T

AC

O/T

ST

CIT

RS

232

FA

ULT

IN AC

TIV

E

OU

T

FA

ULT

IN AC

TIV

E

OU

T

ABCDEFGHIJKLM


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Fan unit

1665 DMXplore wall-mount unit is convection cooled and therefore does not require afan unit. The rack-mount and High Capacity rack-mount units contain a plug-in fanunit.

Circuit pack blanks

Any unused slot in the 1665 DMXplore must be equipped with an appropriate circuitpack blank in order to meet radiated emission requirement per GR-1089.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-7

Access panel description

As shown inFigure 4-1, “Wall-mount shelf front view” (p. 4-4), Figure 4-2, “1665DMXplore rack-mount front and rear views” (p. 4-5), andFigure 4-3, “1850 TSS-5High Capacity rack-mount front view” (p. 4-6), the 1665 DMXplore shelf has severalstandard connections on the front or back of the shelf, depending on the type of theshelf.

The access panel contains the following cabling inputs:

• 2 pairs of positive and negative connections (VA and VB) for -48 VDC power

• 2 power-on LEDs (PWR-A and PWR-B), located on the side access panel of thewall-mount shelf, and on the front of the fan unit in the rack-mount shelf

• 4 10/100T Ethernet ports, mapped directly to the Function Group C slot

• 3 pairs of DS3 coaxial ports (transmit and receive)

• 16 DS1 RJ45 connectors (supported on ports 1-16 of the High Capacity rack-mountshelf)

• Connectors for 4 miscellaneous discrete input (MDI) and 6 miscellaneous discreteoutput (MDO) conditions (2 MDOs dedicated to the MAIN1 and MAIN2 slots arenot used with DMXplore circuit packs.)

• 2 audible and visualCritical /Major andMinor office alarm closures


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Circuit pack codes...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The following information identifies the Apparatus Codes for circuit packs that arecurrently available, along with the software release that first provided support for them,and the shelf slot into which than can be installed.

Available circuit packs

Table 4-2, “Circuit Packs in 1665 DMXplore shelf” (p. 4-9)contains a list of eachcircuit pack supported by 1665 DMXplore, indicates the slots into which they can beinstalled, and the release supported by each circuit pack.

Table 4-2 Circuit Packs in 1665 DMXplore shelf

Circuit Pack ApparatusCode

Slot(s) Release Comments

SystemController(SYSCTL)

VLNC1 CTL 1.0 Extended temperature certification for outsidecabinet deployment (OSP Hardened)

OC-3/16DS1 &2DS3multi-functionpack(1 OC-3port)

VLNC5 MAIN1,MAIN2

1.0.1 High-speed, long- reach, 1310 nm, OSPHardened optics with support for 16 DS1 and 2DS3 ports

OC-3/16DS1multi-functionpack(1 OC-3port)

VLNC6 MAIN1,MAIN2

1.0 High-speed, long- reach, 1310 nm, OSPHardened optics with support for 16 DS1 ports

OC-12/16DS1& 2DS3multi-functionpack(1 OC-12port)

VLNC25 MAIN1,MAIN2

2.0 High-speed, long- reach, 1310 nm, OSPHardened optics with support for 16 DS1 and 2DS3 ports

OC-12/16DS1multi-functionpack(1 OC-12port)

VLNC26 MAIN1,MAIN2

2.0 High-speed, long- reach, 1310 nm, OSPHardened optics with support for 16 DS1 ports

10/100T(support for 4ports)

Private Line

VLNC15 FunctionGroup C

2.0 Support for the 4 10/100T ports on the accesspanel, supports Ethernet Private Lines, OSPhardened

Product description

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-9

Table 4-2 Circuit Packs in 1665 DMXplore shelf (continued)



10/100

Private Line(2optical portsand 4 electricalports)


2.1 Support for the 4 10/100T ports on the accesspanel and 2 100BASE-LX ports on the faceplate(via SFP optics). Supports Ethernet PrivateLines, OSP hardened

Interface unit VLIU10 VLIU Required component of the High Capacityrack-mount shelf

ApparatusBlank

199M MAIN 1,MAIN 2

1.0 Filler plates to be used in MAIN slots of the1665 DMXplore shelf when circuit packs are notinstalled.

ApparatusBlank

199L FunctionGroup C

1.0 Filler plates to be used in the Group C slot ofthe shelf when a circuit pack is not installed.

Important! Changes may be made to planned or future offerings at any time, andwithout notice.

Product description Circuit pack codes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Group C circuit packs...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The information describes the details of each of the Ethernet circuit packs that areinstalled in the Group C slot of 1665 DMXplore. These circuit packs support the 4RJ-45 10/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces, identified as the C Group, on the shelf accesspanel. Some circuit packs provide additional optical Ethernet interfaces on the circuitpack.

10/100-BASE-TX Private Line Fast Ethernet circuit pack (VLNC15)

The VLNC15 is installed in the Function Group C slot of the 1665 DMXplore shelf tosupport Fast Ethernet Private Line applications. The VLNC15 supports the 4 RJ-4510/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces, identified as the C Group, on the shelf access panelwith a range of up to 100 meters. The VLNC15 is an unprotected pack that supportsVT1.5, STS-1, and STS-3c cross-connections. Cross-connections are supported on upto 9 of the 12 available STS1s on the VLNC15 and VLNC30 packs.

The 10/100-PL Private Line Fast Ethernet (VLNC15) circuit pack providespoint-to-point (Ethernet Private Line Service) data transport at the 10/100 Mb/s rate.This pack supports the following capabilities:

• Standard Ethernet switching per IEEE 802.1

• Standard encapsulation according to ITU G.7041 for Generic framing procedure(GFP)

• Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) per ITU G.707

• Support for up to 4 VCG ports

• Support for STS-1, STS-3c, and VT1.5 mode (Up to 168 VT1.5s may be usedbetween 0 and 63 assigned to any VCG.)

When VT mapping is selected, the up to 6 STS-1s can be reserved for up to 168 VTs.Only 3 STS-1s are reserved for STS-1 VCAT or STS-3c. Otherwise there is no VTmapping. In this case, 9 STS-1s are available for STS-1 VCAT or STS-3c. Each VCGcan use 1 (STS-1) or (STS-1-xv, x=0-3) or 1 (STS-3c), or (VT1.5-xv, x=0-63)tributaries. Only one VCG can have 1 (STS-3c) at a time (this is a limitation due tomain circuit pack). To see this information in tabular format, refer toTable 4-3,“Worksheet for VLNC15 and VLNC30 provisioning” (p. 4-14).

The VLNC15 circuit pack is designed specifically to support Fast Ethernet Private Lineapplications. Each VLNC15 circuit pack can support 4 Private Lines. In the STS-1mode the VLNC15 uses standard virtual concatenation according to ITU G.707.

Product description

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-11

Legend:

1. External Ethernet Port

2. Generic Framing Procedure

3. Virtual Concatenation Group

The ports auto-negotiate speed (100 Mb/s) and flow control when interfacing withother 802.3-compliant devices over twisted pair media. The ports supports the fullduplex mode only.

Optical/Electric 10/100 (VLNC30) Ethernet interface (R2.1)

The VLNC30 circuit pack is available in Release 2.1. It is installed in the FunctionGroup C slot of the 1665 DMXplore shelf. The Function Group C slot does notsupport an additional protection circuit pack. The VLNC30 is designed to support FastEthernet Private Line applications. Each VLNC30 circuit pack can support 6 PrivateLines. The VLNC30 supports VT1.5, STS-1, and STS-3c cross-connections.Cross-connections are supported on up to 9 of the 12 available STS1s on the VLNC15and VLNC30 packs.

The VLNC30 supports the following capabilities:

• Standard Ethernet switching per IEEE 802.1

• Standard encapsulation according to ITU G.7041 for Generic framing procedure(GFP)

• Virtual Concatenation (VCAT) per ITU G.707

• Support for up to 4 VCG ports

• Support for STS-1, STS-3c, and VT1.5 mode (Up to 168 VT1.5s may be usedbetween 0 and 63 assigned to any VCG.)

The VLNC30 supports 2 optical 100BASE-LX ports and four 10/100BASE-TXelectrical ports, that provide 10/100 Mbps links using standard Ethernet switching(IEEE 802.1), standard encapsulation according to ITU G.7041 for Generic Framing

Figure 4-4 VLNC15 Fast Ethernet (Private Line) circuit pack

JK-Xplore-1.eps

1 2 3

LAN 1

LAN 2

LAN 3

LAN 4

GFP VCG1

GFP VCG2

GFP VCG3

GFP VCG4

Product description Group C circuit packs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-12 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Procedure (GFP), and ITU G.707 for Virtual Concatenation (VCAT). The electricalinterfaces supported by the VLNC30 can transmit signals up to 100 meters. The opticalinterfaces can transmit signals up to 10,000 meters.

The VLNC30 optical ports use Small Form Pluggable (SFP) optics. SFP optics can beplugged into a circuit pack as they become necessary. This allows customers to growtheir network incrementally, only realizing the cost of optics when they are needed toprovision service. SFP optics are not included when VLNC30 packs are purchased andshipped. The SFP optics are purchased and installed separately by the customer asneeded.

When VT mapping is selected, up to 6 STS-1s can be reserved for up to 168 VTs.Only 3 STS-1s are reserved for STS-1 VCAT or STS-3c. When VT mapping is notselected, 9 STS-1s are available for STS-1 VCAT or STS-3c. Each VCG can use 1(STS-1) or (STS-1-xv, x=0-3) or 1 (STS-3c), or (VT1.5-xv, x=0-63) tributaries. Onlyone VCG can have 1 (STS-3c) at a time (this is a limitation due to main circuit pack).To help understand and apply this information, seeTable 4-3, “Worksheet for VLNC15and VLNC30 provisioning” (p. 4-14).

Electrical connections to the 100BASE-TX interface are via multi-service connectorson the 1665 DMXplore shelf while optical ports are located on the faceplate of theVLNC30.

Legend:

1. External Ethernet Port

2. Generic Framing Procedure

3. Virtual Concatenation Group

The electrical ports auto-negotiate speed (10/100 Mbps) and flow control wheninterfacing with other 802.3-compliant devices over twisted pair media. The portssupports the full duplex mode only.

Figure 4-5 VLNC30 Fast Ethernet (Private Line) circuit pack

JK-Xplore-5.eps

1 2 3

LAN 1

LAN 2

LAN 3

LAN 4

GFP VCG1

GFP VCG2

GFP VCG3

GFP VCG4

LAN 5

LAN 6

GFP VCG5

GFP VCG6


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-13

The following table can be used as a worksheet to help provision the VLNC15 andVLNC30 circuit packs. The type of signal is listed in the first column. The secondcolumn provides the maximum number of each type of signal. The third column isused to specify the number of STS-1s used by each type of signal. Column four is amultiplication sign, and columns 5 and 6 are left empty for your use.

Table 4-3 Worksheet for VLNC15 and VLNC30 provisioning

SignalType

Max. #provisioned

X STS used Total

STS-3c 1 x 3 =

STS-1-3v 3 x 3 =

STS-1-2v 4 x 2 =

STS-1-1v 4 x 1 =


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-14 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Main circuit pack descriptions...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section briefly describes 1665 DMXplore main circuit packs, installed in theMAIN1 and MAIN2 shelf slots.

OC-3/16DS1 OLIU (VLNC6)

The OC-3 OLIU (VLNC6) high-speed circuit pack provides a single, long-reach, 1310nm optical line interface unit supporting VT1.5 and STS-1 path switching. The VLNC6can be provisioned for UPSR or 1+1 protection. It can interface with OC-3 rings, OC-3linear optical extensions, and single- or dual-homed ring extensions. Fiber access isprovided via a pair of LC-type connectors on the VLNC6 faceplate.

The VLNC6 occupies the MAIN1 and/or MAIN2 slots on the 1665 DMXplore shelf.

DS1 support on the VLNC6 circuit pack

The VLNC6 OLIU supports cross connects for up to 16 DS1 lines. Each DS1 line iscross-connected to a VT1.5 time slot. The physical ports for the DS1 lines are locatedon the access panel of the 1665 DMXplore shelf. When the system is operating with aUPSR or 1+1 OC-3 high-speed interface, the 16 DS1 signals are equipment protectedwhen both MAIN slots have circuit packs in them. Line build-outs and DS1 signalencoding are software provisionable. VLNC6 supports the transport of DS1 signalscoded in either alternate mark inversion (AMI) or bipolar 8-zero substitution (B8ZS)modes. The signals received from the DS1 ports on the access panel are mapped intoSONET STS-1 signals within the VLNC6 board and then routed to the high-speedOC-3 ports on the VLNC6 circuit pack.

OC-3/16DS1/2DS3 OLIU (VLNC5)

The VLNC5 is available in Release 1.0.1. The OC-3 OLIU (VLNC5) high-speedcircuit pack provides one, long-reach, 1310 nm optical port supporting VT1.5 andSTS-1 path switching. The VLNC5 can be provisioned for UPSR or 1+1 protectionschemes and can interface with other OC-3 rings, OC-3 linear optical extensions, aswell as single- and dual-homed ring extensions. Fiber access is provided via a pair ofLC-type connectors on the VLNC5 faceplate.

The VLNC5 occupies the MAIN1 and/or MAIN2 slots on 1665 DMXplore shelf.

DS1 and DS3 support on the VLNC5 circuit pack

The VLNC5 multi-function pack supports 16 DS1 ports and 2 DS3 ports located on theaccess panel of the 1665 DMXplore shelf. The 16 DS1 and 2 DS3 ports can becross-connected to STS-1 (also VT1.5 for DS1) time slots when the system isoperating with a UPSR or 1+1 OC-3 high-speed interface. 16 DS1 and 2 DS3 signalsare equipment protected. Line build-outs and DS1/DS3 signal encoding are software

Product description

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-15

provisionable. VLNC5 supports the transport of DS1/DS3 signals coded in eitherAlternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS) modes for DS1signals and B3ZS for DS3 signals. The signals received from the DS1/DS3 ports onthe access panel are mapped into SONET STS-1 (also VT1.5 for DS1) signals withinthe VLNC5 board and then routed to the high-speed OC-3 ports on the VLNC5 circuitpack.

OC-12/16DS1/2DS3 OLIU (VLNC25)

The VLNC25 is available in Release 2.0. The OC-12 multi-function (VLNC25)high-speed circuit pack is a one-port, long-reach, 1310 nm optical line interface unitsupporting VT1.5 and STS-1 path switching. The VLNC25 can be provisioned forUPSR or 1+1 protection schemes and can interface with other OC-12 rings, OC-12linear optical extensions, as well as single- and dual-homed ring extensions. Fiberaccess is provided via a pair of LC-type connectors on the VLNC25 faceplate.

The VLNC25 occupies the MAIN1 and/or MAIN2 slots on 1665 DMXplore shelf. Thispack is OSP hardened.

DS1 and DS3 support on the VLNC25 circuit pack

The VLNC25 multi-function pack supports 16 DS1 ports and 2 DS3 ports located onthe access panel of the 1665 DMXplore shelf. The 16 DS1 and 2 DS3 ports can becross-connected to STS-1 (also VT1.5 for DS1) time slots when the system isoperating with a UPSR or 1+1 OC-12 high-speed interface. 16 DS1 and 2 DS3 signalsare equipment protected. Line build-outs and DS1/DS3 signal encoding are softwareprovisionable. VLNC25 supports the transport of DS1/DS3 signals coded in eitherAlternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS) modes for DS1signals and B3ZS for DS3 signals. The signals received from the DS1/DS3 ports onthe access panel are mapped into SONET STS-1 (also VT1.5 for DS1) signals withinthe VLNC25 board and then routed to the high-speed OC-12 ports on the VLNC25circuit pack.

OC-12/16DS1 OLIU (VLNC26)

The OC-12 multi-function (VLNC26) high-speed circuit pack is a one-port, long-reach,1310 nm optical line interface unit supporting VT1.5 and STS-1 path switching. TheVLNC26 can be provisioned for UPSR or 1+1 protection schemes and can interfacewith other OC-12 rings, OC-12 linear optical extensions, as well as single- anddual-homed ring extensions. Fiber access is provided via one pair of LC-typeconnectors on the VLNC26 faceplate.

The VLNC26 occupies the MAIN1 and/or MAIN2 slots on the 1665 DMXplore shelf.This pack is OSP hardened.

Product description Main circuit pack descriptions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-16 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

DS1 support on the VLNC26 circuit pack

The VLNC26 multi-function pack supports 16 DS1 ports located on the access panel ofthe 1665 DMXplore shelf. The 16 DS1 ports can be cross-connected to VT1.5 timeslots when the system is operating with a UPSR or 1+1 OC-12 high-speed interface. 16DS1 signals are equipment protected when both MAIN slots have circuit packs inthem. Line build-outs and DS1 signal encoding are software provisionable. VLNC26supports the transport of DS1 signals coded in either alternate mark inversion (AMI) orbipolar 8-zero substitution (B8ZS) modes. The signals received from the DS1 ports onthe access panel are mapped into SONET STS-1 signals within the VLNC26 board andthen routed to the high-speed OC-12 ports on the VLNC26 circuit pack.

Product description Main circuit pack descriptions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-17

Control circuit packs...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore provides extensive control features, accessible through a number oftechnician and operations system (OS) interfaces. In addition to accessing local 1665DMXplore NEs through direct interfaces, technicians and OSs can use the operationsfeatures supported via the DCC in the optical signals to access remote NEs. Controlfunctions are supported by the SYSCTL circuit pack.

System Controller (VLNC1)

The SYSCTL provides communication with other circuit packs in the 1665 DMXploreunit. The SYSCTL supports all 1665 DMXplore operations interfaces, including IAOLAN (OSI or TCP/IP), TL1, CIT, office alarms, and miscellaneous discrete interfaces.

The SYSCTL faceplate has 2 push-button switches (ACO and UPDATE), alarm/statusLEDs and a dual RJ45 CIT connector. The SYSCTL provides redundancy byduplicating all cross-connect information on the OLIU circuit packs. Transmission isnot affected if the SYSCTL fails or is removed while the shelf is in service.

The SYSCTL circuit pack provides a microprocessor, nonvolatile memory to store thegeneric program software and provisioning database, and additional memory for systemoperation.

The faceplate of the SYSCTL supportsWaveStar® CIT access to 1665 DMXplore viathe IAO LAN and a serial RS-232 port.

Multi-level operations interface

1665 DMXplore maintenance procedures are built on multiple levels of systeminformation and control. The first level consists of physical on-site indications, theinformation provided by the LEDs, displays, and activities supported by thepush-button switches located on the faceplate of the SYSCTL circuit pack. The secondlevel uses the graphic interface and menu tools provided by theWaveStar® CIT. toremotely provision and retrieve detailed performance reports, alarm and statusinformation, and system configurations. The CIT provides an operations interface for aremote NE at the other end of a network connection, and other NEs to which theremote NE has network access. The third interface level uses direct access to the OSinterfaces such as TL1 over IAO LAN (TCP/IP or OSI).

SYSCTL faceplate

The faceplate of the SYSCTL circuit pack has indicators and switches that providesystem-level information and control functions. The condition of the individualtransmission circuit packs can be determined by observing the LEDs on theirfaceplates.

Product description

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-18 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

The following figure shows the SYSCTL faceplate. There are two push-buttonswitches, Update and ACO, and the two alarm/status LEDs listed below.

• Critical (CR)/Major (MJ)

• Minor (MN)/Abnormal (ABN)

Product description Control circuit packs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-19

Figure 4-6 SYSCTL circuit pack

LAN

FAULT

MN/ABN

CIT

RS232

UPDATE

ACO

CR/MJ

S1:1SYSCTL

VLNC1

MA-DMXplore-009


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-20 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Embedded operations channel

Access and control extends beyond the local 1665 DMXplore to remote 1665DMXplore units via the SONET section DCC. 1665 DMXplore supports 2 DCCchannels.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-21

Power specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power supply

Table 4-4, “1665 DMXplore power supply requirements” (p. 4-22)lists 1665DMXplore power requirements.

Table 4-4 1665 DMXplore power supply requirements

Item Description

Power Feeders A and B

(-48VDC)

Voltage range -40 to -57VDC

External fuses required (1 per feed) Two, 2A fuses

1665 DMXplore uses on-board power conversion eliminating the need for slots forbulk power converters. Two independent −48VDC office power feeders (A and B)enter the shelf through a terminal block and are filtered and distributed to the circuitpacks. Power conversion is performed via modular power converters located on thecircuit packs. Within each circuit pack, the two power feeds are fused, filtered, andconnected to the board-mounted power modules through diodes that provide anelectrical “OR” connection. This provides the required redundancy in case of the lossof one feeder. The two green power LEDs are located to the left of the input powerterminal block.

Current drains

1665 DMXplore has the following current drain requirements.

• Wall-Mount shelf: 1.25 Amps (maximum at -48VDC)

• Rack-Mount shelf: 1.5 Amps (maximum at -48VDC)

• High Capacity Rack-Mount shelf: 2.5 Amps (maximum at -48VDC)

Heat dissipation

The heat dissipation of 1665 DMXplore is 60 watts.

Product description

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-22 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Cabling...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section briefly describes cabling information, including the number of particularcables required. For information regarding available cable lengths and orderingcomcodes, refer toChapter 7, “Ordering”.

Cable types

Table 4-5, “Cables” (p. 4-23)lists available cables along with the required number (ifany).

Table 4-5 Cables

Cable Assembly Description Quantity per Shelf

Power 2 twisted pair cables per shelf1

DS1 (RJ-45 Transmit and Receive) Up to 16 as required2

DS3 (receive and transmit are notbundled)

Up to 4 per MAIN slot housing a VLNC5/25circuit pack (as required)3

Office Alarm 1 Kit (26 AWG, 30’, 8 conductors)4

Miscellaneous Discrete 1 Kit (26 AWG, 30’, 8 conductors)4

LAN 10/100 BaseT (Crossover) 1 per shelf (as required)5 ,6

LAN 10/100 BaseT (Straight Through) 1 per shelf (as required)5 ,6

LAN 100 BASE-TX Up to 4 per shelf (as required)6

WaveStar® CIT Interface 1 per shelf (as required)6

Notes:

1. One cable assembly supports both the −48VDC and −48VDC (A and B) main powerfeeders on the 1665 DMXplore shelf. A cable assembly kit is available (12 AWG, 30’).Wires are stripped and connected directly to the field wiring terminal block on the shelf.

2. One DS1 Cable Assembly is required for each DS1 channel in service. 1 cable is neededfor receive and the other for transmit interfaces. The cables can be RJ-45 to RJ-45 orRJ-45 to blunt cut cable for connection to DSX panel. Lengths up to 550’.

3. One DS3 cable is required for each DS3 circuit in service. 1 cable is needed for receiveand the other for transmit interfaces. Populate in pairs (1 receive and 1 transmit), asrequired up to a total of 4. Lengths up to 250’.

4. Same cable is used for MDI/MDO and Alarm (26 AWG, 30’, 8 conductors). 3 cable kitsare required per shelf (MDI/MDO/Alarms).

5. The Crossover cable is used when connecting to a PC. The Straight Through cable isused when connecting with a hub.

Product description

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4-23

6. The same cable is used for LAN operations and CIT interface as for 10/100 BASE-TXtransmission.

Product description Cabling

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-24 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5 5Operations, administration,maintenance, and provisioning

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter describes the operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning(OAM&P) functions for the 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (1665 DMXplore).

Contents

Maintenance 5-4

Multi-level operations 5-5

IAO LAN ports (detail) 5-9

Operations philosophy 5-12

Alcatel-Lucent Operations Interworking (OI) 5-13

Multi-vendor Operations Interworking 5-15

Data Communications Channel (DCC) 5-16

Software download (generic) 5-19

Database backup and restore 5-21

Maintenance signaling 5-22

Fault detection, isolation, and reporting 5-23

Loopbacks and tests 5-24

WaveStar® CIT 5-25

Introduction to theWaveStar® CIT 5-26

WaveStar® CIT access 5-27

Protection switching 5-30

Line protection switching 5-31

Path protection switching (path switched rings) 5-32

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-1

Equipment protection 5-33

Performance monitoring 5-34

Performance monitoring terms 5-35

DS1 performance monitoring parameters 5-39


VT1.5 performance parameters 5-51

STS-N performance parameters 5-53

OC-N performance parameters 5-55

Ethernet performance monitoring parameters 5-58

Performance monitoring data storage 5-60

Performance parameter thresholds 5-61

TCA transmission to OS 5-62

SNMP parameters and traps 5-63

Provisioning 5-75

Default provisioning 5-76

Remote provisioning 5-77

Cross-connect provisioning 5-78

Automatic provisioning on circuit pack replacement 5-79

Port-state provisioning 5-81

Channel-state provisioning 5-82

Flow control (VLNC15/30 circuit packs) 5-83

Reports 5-84

Alarm report 5-85

Performance monitoring reports 5-86

State reports 5-87

Provisioning reports 5-88

Maintenance history reports 5-89

Version/equipment list 5-90

Administration 5-91

Software upgrades 5-92

IP Access for network management 5-93

Time and date synchronization 5-98

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Office alarms interface 5-100

Remote NE status 5-101

SONET Network size 5-104

Directory services 5-105

Security 5-108

Password administration (CIT and system) 5-110

User-defined miscellaneous discrete interface 5-115

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-3

Maintenance

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section describes the maintenance philosophy of 1665 DMXplore.

Contents

Multi-level operations 5-5

IAO LAN ports (detail) 5-9

Operations philosophy 5-12

Alcatel-Lucent Operations Interworking (OI) 5-13

Multi-vendor Operations Interworking 5-15

Data Communications Channel (DCC) 5-16

Software download (generic) 5-19

Database backup and restore 5-21

Maintenance signaling 5-22

Fault detection, isolation, and reporting 5-23

Loopbacks and tests 5-24

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Multi-level operations...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The following figure shows the multiple levels of operations procedures for 1665DMXplore. The 1665 DMXplore operations procedures are built on three levels ofsystem information and control, spanning operations needs from summary-level statusto detailed reporting.

Example

The following figure, shows the multi-level operations procedures for 1665 DMXplore.The 1665 DMXplore operations procedures are built on three levels of systeminformation and control, from on-site indicators and switches, to remote methods forstatus reporting and control.

SYSCTL faceplate (operations level 1)

Office alarms are provided by a set of discrete relays that control office visual alarms.Separate relays handle critical/major alarms (CR/MJ) and minor (MN) alarms. Theserelays are located on the access panel at the right of the wall-mount shelf, or at therear of the rack-mount shelf.

Figure 5-1 Multi-layered operations

SYSCTL LEDs and Pushbuttons

Routine Operations and Maintenance

Fault Verification

Circuit Pack Replacement

Maintenance and Provisioning via

CIT interface

Detailed Reports

Manual Controls

Provisioning

Layer 1:

Circuit Pack Fault and Active LEDs

Default Provisioning

Serialor

IAO LAN

Alarm Surveillance

Performance Monitoring

Remote Control

Security

MK-DMXplore 0-0 6

Operations Center

Security

X.25 or IAO LAN (TCP/IP or OSI)

Layer 3:

OS Access

Maintenance and Provisioning

via direct OS access

Automated Service

Provisioning

Software Download/

Layer 2: CIT

Database Backup and Restoration

Software Download/

Database Backup and Restoration

Direct TL1 or CLI interface access


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-5

The first operations tier consists of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and push buttons onthe SYSCTL faceplate. These allow routine tasks and diagnostics to be performedwithout a craft interface terminal (CIT) or any test equipment. The SYSCTL faceplateprovides system-level alarm and status information for the local and remote terminals.The circuit pack faceplate FAULT LEDs allow fast and easy fault isolation to aparticular circuit pack.

The SYSCTL faceplate LEDs default to show local system information. The highestactive alarm level is shown by the red LEDs for CR and MJ alarms. Yellow LEDs areshown for MN and ABN alarms. A green PWR ON LED shows that the power is onand the terminal is receiving a −48VDC source.

The Update/Initialize (UPD/INIT) button addresses the local system. The recessedUPD/INIT button serves several functions during installation and circuit packreplacement. During the first 10 seconds after powering up the SYSCTL circuit pack,depressing this button initializes the nonvolatile memory with provisioning and stateinformation. Secondly, after removing a circuit pack or low-speed input, depressing thisbutton updates the system equipment list to show the slot or signal is now unequipped.

The SYSCTL faceplate’s remote display functions serve the single-ended maintenanceneeds of access transport applications. When any alarm or status condition exists at aremote 1665 DMXplore shelf, that alarm can be viewed in the Alarm List on the CIT.

Table 5-1, “SYSCTL faceplate LEDs” (p. 5-6)details the various LEDs andpush-button switches and describes their functions.

Table 5-1 SYSCTL faceplate LEDs

LED/Push-button

Indicator name Function

FAULT Fault Indicates isolated circuit pack failure

CR/MJ Critical/major Indicates critical/major alarm for local system.

MN/ABN Minor/Abnormal Indicates minor or abnormal conditions

UPD/INIT Update/Initialize Updates the local system.

ACO Alarm Cut-off Indicates that the 1665 DMXplore is active andthat there is an active alarm, but the alarmindication has been cut off.

Local craft interfaces (operations level 2)

An on-site craft person can connect a local terminal or PC to the 1665 DMXplore foradministrative access. This is generally through a serial connection to the RS-232 porton the SYSCTL. The serial port on the faceplate of the SYSCTL can be used for anon-site CIT and TL1 administrative connection, and for software downloads.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Multi-level operations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1665 DMXplore also has a LAN port on the faceplate of the SYSCTL circuit pack.The LAN port, normally used for remote access, can also be used for on-site access. Anetwork connection to the LAN port supports TL1 over OSI and IP networkconnections. Software download via FTAM or FTP is also supported.

Remote Operations System (OS) TL1/LAN interfaces (operations level 3)

The third operations level consists of the remote access to OS interfaces. Access forTL1 and related SONET network monitoring is provided via the CIT LAN and serialconnection to the SYSCTL.

1665 DMXplore supports TL1 alarm surveillance and performance monitoring withOSs such as Telcordia’s Network Monitoring and Analysis (NMA). 1665 DMXploresupports service provisioning with memory administration OSs such as Lucent OMS orTelcordia’s TEMS. The TL1 message set has been updated to offer full remotereporting capabilities.

The OS can use more than one NE as a GNE to provide redundancy and distribute theTL1 message volume across multiple links to the OS. The TL1 GNE serves as a singleinterface to the OS for NEs in the same subnetwork. The TL1 GNE receives operationsinformation from NEs through the DCC. It reports this information, and its owninformation, to the OS using TL1 messages. The OS can send TL1 commands throughthe GNE to any NE in the subnetwork. 1665 DMXplore, as well as other-vendor NEsthat adhere to GR-253-CORE, can serve as the TL1 GNE for 1665 DMXplore.

CIT LAN (IAO LAN) and RS-232 CIT (Serial)

The LAN interface on the SYSCTL can be used for a CIT network connection to theunit. OSI or IP based network connections are supported. OAM&P activities such asloopbacks and testing, protection switching, provisioning, PM, retrieving reports, andsecurity on other 1665 DMXplore NEs in a subnetwork are supported through the CIT.

A remote CIT connection through the serial port on the SYSCTL is also possible if theport is equipped with a modem for remote dial-in access. However this port is usuallyused for on-site serial access to the unit.

The following figure shows how the 1665 DMXplore works with the variousoperations interfaces.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-7

Figure 5-2 1665 DMXplore operations interfaces

TL1/EIA-232D Asynch

TL1/TCP-P or TL1/0SVIEEE 802.3 LAN

LEDs

Switches

TL1/OSI or TL1/TCP-IPover SONET DCC

Office Alarms

TL1 over OSI supports TARPProtocol per GR-253-CORE

* LAN could also interface with LAN on another NE

Local OperationsInterfaces

Main

CIT/Management

SystemRemote NE

MA-DMXplore-014

1665DMXplore



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

IAO LAN ports (detail)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore supports a LAN port on the front of the SYSCTL. The LAN can beconnected to the intraoffice LAN, and is also referred to as the IAO LAN port. Thisport is recommended for convenient, localWaveStar® CIT access. When, for example,the WaveStar® CIT is directly connected to the LAN port, a LAN crossover cable isrequired (to connect the transmit wire-pair at one end to the receive wire-pair at theother end, and vice versa).

The IOA LAN port on the SYSCTL supports 10/100BaseT Ethernet (per TelcordiaTechnologies GR-253, ANSI/IEEE 802.2 and 802.3, and ISO 8802.2 and 8802.3) overfour-wire twisted pair using an RJ-45 connector. The IAO LAN port automaticallyadapts its rate to 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s to match the capability of the other nodes onthe same IAO LAN, with 10 Mb/s as the default rate.

OSI on the IAO LAN

When the OSI protocol stack is used on an IAO LAN port of the SYSCTL, the termOSI LAN is sometimes used. The OSI LAN is effectively an extension of the DCC.All remote operations supported over the DCC are also supported over the OSI LAN.The term DCC connectivity, used throughout this document means, DCC and/or OSILAN connectivity.

TCP/IP on the IAO LAN

The IAO LAN port on the SYSCTL also supports the TCP/IP protocol stack. TCP/IPcommunications on the IAO LAN port can be enabled or disabled. By default, TCP/IPis disabled on the IAO LAN port. When the TCP/IP protocol stack is used on an IAOLAN port, the intraoffice LAN may be referred to as a TCP/IP LAN.

1665 DMXplore supports TL1 over TCP/IP for the IAO LAN. As a TL1 responder,1665 DMXplore TCP/IP GNE accepts incoming TL1 connections, encoded asdescribed, to SYSCTL TCP port 3081 with length-value encoding.

Each TL1 message is encapsulated into the TCP data stream as follows:

• Version number (1 byte, value set to 3)

• Reserved (1 byte, value set to 0)

• Length (2 bytes, value set to length in bytes of TL1 message + 4)

• TL1 Message (variable length)

The length-value encoding is the preferred encoding for machine/machine interactions.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-9

Port 3082: Raw Encoding. Each raw encoded TL1 message is encapsulated into theTCP data stream of length 1 - 4096 bytes. The TL1 message must be parsed to find theboundary between successive TL1 messages (see Telcordia GR-831 CORE for thesyntax of TL1 messages).

Port 3083: Telnet Encoding. The Telnet encoding is a variation on the raw encoding. Itencapsulates TL1 messages in a TCP stream and uses Telnet for transmitting text overTCP/IP.

OSI or TCP/IP on the same IAO LAN

It is generally recommended that the IAO LAN port be used for OSI or TCP/IP, butnot both protocols simultaneously on the same IAO LAN port.

The following figure provides examples of common connections to the 1665DMXplore from the IAO LAN.

Figure 5-3 IAO LAN connections

Front IAOLAN Port

nc-dmx-003

Front IAOLAN P


CIT = WaveStar CITfi

ort

OSI

OC-12UPSRwithDCC

Remote or Collocated Site

TCP/IP 10/100 BaseTEthernetLAN Hub

10/100 BaseTEthernetLAN Hub

OSs

Remote Location

Operations Center

IP WAN

CO

SYSCTL

1665DMXplore

CIT

CIT

CIT

SYSCTL

CIT

1665DMXplore

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning IAO LAN ports (detail)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

IAO LAN compatibility

Table 5-2, “IAO LAN compatibility” (p. 5-11)lists 1665 DMXplore IAO LANcommunications compatibility with other products and the applicable OSI and/orTCP/IP protocol stacks. (WaveStar® CIT and OS access applications compatibility viathe IAO LAN is covered separately later.)

Table 5-2 IAO LAN compatibility

Product 1665 DMXplore

OSI TCP/IP

1665 DMXplore yes yes

1665 DMX yes yes

1665 DMXtend yes yes

DDM-2000 OC-3 yes yes

DDM-2000 OC-12 yes yes

FiberReach - -

FT-2000 ADR - -

WaveStar® TDM 2.5G/10G(2-Fiber)

yes yes

WaveStar® BandWidth Manager yes yes

1675 LambdaUnite MSS yes yes

WaveStar® CIT yes yes

Lucent Optical Management System yes yes

Navis® Ethernet ManagementSystem

yes yes

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning IAO LAN ports (detail)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-11

Operations philosophy...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore has incorporated an operations philosophy that is optimized foroperations in the access transport environment. This allows operation and maintenanceof remote NEs from a single centralized operations center. It also allows techniciansworking at remote sites to gain access to NEs at other locations.

1665 DMXplore uses the SONET data communications channel (DCC) to provideremote CIT access, remote CO alarms, remote alarm reports, and remote OS access.The terms remote operations, single-ended operations (SEO), and OperationsInterworking (OI) are synonymous.

SEO capability

The following figure shows the SEO capability that provides remote access via DCC toall 1665 DMXplore systems in a subnetwork from a single 1665 DMXplore location.This minimizes the need for technician travel because most maintenance, provisioning,and administration can be performed on all NEs with DCC connectivity by accessingany one NE. The SEO capability can be disabled between NEs to create maintenanceboundaries (for example, interoffice applications) or for security reasons.

Figure 5-4 Remote operations philosophy

RemoteOperation

Center

SYSCTL

Single Span

Single-Ended Operations

OC-3/12

OC-3/12

OC-3/12OC-3/12

Legend:SONETDCC enab


led

IAO LAN Port,TCP/IP LAN, or

TL1

Serial Portor

IAO LAN Port

nc-dmx-014

1665 DMXplore

1665 DMXplore

1665 DMXplore

1665 DMXplore

WaveStarCIT

fi


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-12 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Alcatel-Lucent Operations Interworking (OI)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

For SONET network elements, OI provides the capability to access, operate,administer, maintain, and provision remote Alcatel-Lucent NEs from anyAlcatel-Lucent NE in a subnetwork or from a centralized OS. OI among theAlcatel-Lucent 2000,WaveStar® , 1665 DMXplore, and 1665 Data Multiplexer ProductFamilies uses Target ID Address Resolution Protocol (TARP).

OI support

The following Alcatel-Lucent products support OI:

• DDM-2000 OC-12 Multiplexer, R7.0 and later

• DDM-2000 FiberReach Multiplexer, R3.0 and later

• DDM-2000 OC-3 Multiplexer, R13.0 and later

• FT-2000 OC-48 Add/Drop-Rings Terminal, R9.1 and later

• All WaveStar® Product Family systems

• All 1665 Data Multiplexer Product Family systems

The Alcatel-Lucent OI is available among NEs that are connected through the SONETDCC or IAO LAN. With this feature, users can perform OAM&P activities on acentralized basis, saving travel time and money.

OI features including the following:

• Remote OS access via TL1 over TCP/IP

• Remote login

• Remote office alarms

• Remote software download and copy

Alarm groups

An alarm group is a set of SONET NEs that share status information betweenthemselves, such as alarms, LEDs, and ACO status. The set of remote NEs that an NEcan exchange status information with is determined by the value of the local alarmgroup parameter. This parameter is provisioned at each local NE and specifies whetherthat local NE does or does not exchange remote NE status with other Alcatel-LucentNEs in the same SONET subnetwork. In 1665 DMXplore, all NEs are defaulted intothe same alarm group (number 255).

Alarm groups can be nodes in a ring, nodes of a linear extension, or any other logicalgrouping such as a maintenance group or geographical group.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-13

All members of the same alarm group share NE status information but do not shareinformation with other alarm groups.

Alarm group functions

Depending on provisioning, a member of an alarm group can:

• Know the alarm/status of all members of the same alarm group.

• List a report of the summary alarm or status condition of other NEs in the group.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Alcatel-Lucent Operations Interworking (OI)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-14 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Multi-vendor Operations Interworking...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TARP

To support multi-vendor OI, the 1665 DMXplore supports Target ID AddressResolution Protocol (TARP).

TARP provides NSAP-TID translations and is the established multi-vendor standard forSONET NEs that support TL1 OS interfaces. 1665 DMXplore supports the TARP DataCache (TDC) function to reduce the frequency of TARP propagation throughout thesubnetwork and to improve performance.

Compatibility

The 1665 DMXplore is developed to be compatible with any other-vendor NEs thatsupport TARP, OSI, IAO LAN, and TL1 as specified in Telcordia TechnologiesGR-253. In addition, 1665 DMXplore’s TARP Manual Adjacency feature enables it tooperate in networks that include CMISE-based NEs which may not support TARPpropagation. 1665 DMXplore supports user provisioning of several OSI parameters toallow users to adjust their operations subnetwork, if necessary. For example, to supportsubnetwork partitioning of large subnetworks, 1665 DMXplore supports userprovisioning of NSAP area addresses and Level 2 Intermediate System (IS)functionality.

The 1665 DMXplore’s compatibility with other-vendor NEs will be tested byindependent third parties such as Telcordia Technologies on behalf of the SONETInteroperability Forum (SIF).

OI applications supported

1665 DMXplore supports the following Alcatel-Lucent proprietary OI applicationsbetween Alcatel-Lucent NEs in multi-vendor subnetworks:

• Remote CIT login

• Remote software download and copy

• Remote NE-to-NE automatic time/date synchronization and start-up.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-15

Data Communications Channel (DCC)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provisioning the DCC

To support remote operations over the DCC embedded in the SONET section overheadof the optical signal, the DCC itself must be provisioned as indicated in the followingparagraphs.

DCC enable/disable

By default, the DCC is enabled on all optical SONET ports. DCC communications canbe enabled or disabled on each port independently.

DCC protection mode

The DCC protection mode is determined by the transmission protection mode assignedto the high-speed (main OLIUs) optical port (per theapplicationparameter). Theprotection mode can be linear (1+1) identical, or distinct (UPSR). 1+1 is the default forthe high-speed optical ports.

User side and network side

The operation of each DCC span also depends on one end of the span being designatedthe User side and the other end being designated the Network side. The DCCUser/Network side assignments are provisionable.

By default, the high-speed port dcc-m1-1 is designated the Network side and dcc-m2-1is designated the User Side. If each 1665 DMXplore on a high-speed ring applicationis connected to its neighbor with a fiber-pair between ports MAIN1 and MAIN2, thedefault UPSR side/Network side assignments are sufficient.

The following figure shows the User and Network side designations for 1665DMXplores on a high-speed UPSR.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-16 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

DCC compatibility

Table 5-3, “DCC compatibility” (p. 5-17)lists supported DCC communicationscompatibility for 1665 DMXplore. 1665 DMXplore supports Section DCC running theOSI protocol stack.

Table 5-3 DCC compatibility

Product Optical InterfacesSupported

1665 DMXploreHigh-Speed MainSlots

1665 DMXplore High-Speed OC-3 UPSR, 1+1

1850 Transport Service Switch5

High-Speed OC-3 USPR

High-Speed OC-12 UPSR

1665 DMX High-Speed OC-192 NA

OC-48 NA

Low-Speed OC-48 NA

OC-12 UPSR, 1+1

OC-3 UPSR, 1+1

1665 DMXtend High-Speed OC-3 UPSR, 1+1

Low-Speed OC-3 UPSR, 1+1

Figure 5-5 Default User/Network Side designation on a UPSR

M1User Side

Xplore-047

M2Network Side

M1User Side

M2Network Side

M1User Side

M2Network Side

UPSR

1665DMXplore

OC-3 OLIU

OC-3 OLIU

OC-3 OLIU


1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Data Communications Channel (DCC)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-17

Table 5-3 DCC compatibility (continued)

Product Optical InterfacesSupported

1665 DMXploreHigh-Speed MainSlots

DDM-2000 OC-3 High-Speed OC-12 UPSR, 1+1

OC-3 UPSR, 1+1


DDM-2000 OC-12 High-Speed OC-12 UPSR, 1+1


FiberReach High-Speed OC-12 UPSR, 1+1

OC-3 UPSR

FT-2000 ADR High-Speed OC-48 NA


OC-3 UPSR, 1+1

WaveStar® TDM 2.5G/10G(2-Fiber)

High-Speed OC-48 NA


OC-3 UPSR, 1+1

WaveStar® BandWidthManager, Release 4.0

High-Speed OC-48 NA


OC-3 UPSR, 1+1

1675 LambdaUnite MSS High-Speed OC-192 NA

OC-48 NA


OC-3 UPSR, 1+1

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Data Communications Channel (DCC)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-18 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Software download (generic)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore supports local and remote software downloads.

When new software is downloaded to the 1665 DMXplore SYSCTL, a compressedsoftware image is download to FLASH memory. The new software is uncompressedand moved to the active boot memory space. During this process, the older softwarerelease continues to run in random access memory (RAM). Installation is notservice-affecting, so down time is limited to the time it takes to reboot.

Local software download

1665 DMXplore supports the following local software downloads.

• Local software download from aWaveStar® CIT connected to the CIT RS-232(RS-232 serial) port on the SYSCTL circuit pack faceplate

• Local software installation via File Transfer Protocol (FTP) from aWaveStar® CITconnected to theCIT LAN (IAO LAN) port on the SYSCTL circuit pack faceplate.Software installation via FTP requires the following:

– FTP Client software is enabled on the NE

– IP parameters are provisioned on the NE.

Important! Serial Download (TERM) is not supported in the MicrosoftWindows®

XP Operating System. Therefore, FTP must be used to install software when usingtheMicrosoftWindows® XP Operating System.

Remote software download

Remote software download reduces the need to travel to remote sites when thesoftware version of multiple 1665 DMXplore systems is being upgraded throughout anetwork.

• Remote software download from a local PC connected to the CIT RS-232 (RS-232serial) port on the SYSCTL circuit pack faceplate to a remote:

– 1665 DMXplore

– 1665 DMX

– 1665 DMXtend

– DDM-2000 OC-3

– DDM-2000 OC-12

– FiberReach


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-19

Both the local and remote NEs must have an active software generic.

• Software copy from the local 1665 DMXplore to a remote:

– 1665 DMXplore

• Remote software download via FTP to 1665 DMXplore. Both the FTP gatewaynetwork element (GNE) and remote NE must have an active software generic.

• Remote software download via an FTAM-FTP gateway to 1665 DMXplore. TheFTAM-FTP gateway is also referred to as the file transfer translation device(FTTD).

Impact of software download and activation

Local software downloads to the SYSCTL temporarily disrupt operationscommunications because a system controller reset is involved, and the dormantsoftware is not activated immediately.

Remote software download or copy of compressed dormant software is accomplishedwithout any disruption of operation, because the dormant software is not activatedimmediately.

The dormant SYSCTL software may be applied at any time the user specifies, forexample, the same time for all NEs to be upgraded. Activation of the dormant NEsoftware generic requires the 1665 DMXplore system controller to reset, thustemporarily disrupting operations communications.

Remote software download compatibility

You can download software remotely from aWaveStar® CIT connected to a 1665DMXplore via the Front Serial or LAN Port to the following products:

• 1665 DMXplore

• 1665 DMX

• 1665 DMXtend

• 1665 DMXplore

• DDM-2000 OC-3

• FiberReach

Digital signature capability

1665 DMXplore verifies software downloads using a digital signature. When FTP overTCP/IP is used for a software download, a digital signature is transmitted with thesoftware download and verified by the network element. If the verification fails, 1665DMXplore reports an autonomous message and the software download fails. Thedigital signature is discarded after verification.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Software download (generic)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-20 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Database backup and restore...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section describes the database backup and restore feature in 1665 DMXplore.

The 1665 DMXplore uses the following connections to perform database backup andrestore:

• A direct IP connection

• OSI connectivity to an FTP GNE.

• FTAM Backup and Restore

Database backup

1665 DMXplore can back up all provisionable data via a local or remote FTP filetransfer. Data can be backed up to a remote operations system via an FTAM-FTPgateway. The FTAM-FTP gateway is also referred to as the file transfer translationdevice (FTTD).

The backup database is stored on aWaveStar® CIT, and Lucent Optical ManagementSystem (Lucent OMS), or another FTP server.

Database restore

In the event of a catastrophic failure, 1665 DMXplore can restore all provisionabledata (from the backup file) via local or remote FTP. Data can be restored from aremote operations system via an FTAM-FTP gateway. The FTAM-FTP gateway is alsoreferred to as the file transfer translation device (FTTD).

The backup database maybe stored on aWaveStar® CIT, and Lucent OpticalManagement System (Lucent OMS), or another FTP server.

Automatic database backup

1665 DMXplore supports automatic database backups. This allows users to establish abackup interval, date, and time. The database backups may be saved on theWaveStar®

CIT or another FTP server.

The user can also specify the number of backups to destination files before overwritingthose same files with subsequent backups. To eliminate the scenario of multiple 1665DMXplore systems initiating automatic backups simultaneously, 1665 DMXplore doesnot support a default scheduled backup date/time; the user must provision their owndate/time. For information about theConfiguration → Software → Configure AutoBackup Interval command, refer to theWaveStar® CIT help.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-21

Maintenance signaling...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Indication Signals

Alarm indication signals (AIS) are maintenance signals that notify downstreamequipment that a defect or equipment failure has been detected.

Compliance

Maintenance signaling is compliant with SONET (Telcordia Technologies GR-253) andasynchronous (Telcordia Technologies TR-TSY-000191) network requirements. Alarmindication signals comply with GR-253 section 6.2.1.2.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-22 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Fault detection, isolation, and reporting...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore continuously monitors incoming signals and internal systemconditions. Incoming SONET signals are monitored for loss of signal (LOS), loss offrame (LOF), loss of pointer (LOP), line AIS, path AIS (only rings will be switcheddue to path AIS), bit error ratio (BER) thresholds and unequipped signals. The BERthreshold crossings are detected for DS1, DS3, OC-3, OC-12, STS-1, and STS-3csignals.

Fault detection

When an internal fault is detected, automatic diagnostics isolate the faulty circuit pack.Faults are reported to local technicians and operations systems so that techniciandispatch and repair decisions can be made.

Fault isolation

All fault conditions detected by the system are stored and made available to bereported, on demand, through the CIT. In addition, a history of past alarm and statusconditions and CIT events is maintained and available for on-demand reporting. Eachevent is real-time and date stamped.

Fault reporting

The system also automatically and autonomously reports all detected alarm and statusconditions through the office alarm relays, SYSCTL and circuit pack faceplate andequipment LEDs, and TL1 message-based OS interface.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-23

Loopbacks and tests...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore allows technicians to perform loopback tests on all low- andhigh-speed interfaces. Low-speed DS1 and DS3 electronic loopbacks, directed towardthe high-speed line (terminal loopback), are individually controllable from the CIT orthe OS interface. Active electronic loopbacks are reported in the alarm and statusreport. DS1 and DS3 facility loopbacks toward the DSX are also available.

Manual optical (OC-n) loopbacks

Front access to the optical connectors on the optical line interface unit (OLIU) circuitpack allows easy manual optical loopback. This loopback is performed by connecting afiber jumper from the MAIN circuit pack output to its input. In some cases alightguide buildout assembly is required to prevent receiver overload when performingloopbacks.

Software controlled electrical loopbacks

There are three software-controlled electrical loopbacks. The first is DS1/DS3 andEthernet terminal loopbacks. A terminal loopback connects the entire signal that isabout to be passed-through the low-speed interface to the DSX (in the case of DS1/3signals) back toward the cross-connect fabric to the high-speed optical line. AIS is theoutput to the DSX. Terminal loopbacks are used for installation and maintenanceprocedures to test the integrity of near and far- end interfaces as well as fibers andsystem circuitry.

The second loopback is the DS1 or DS3 Facility Loopback and it connects the DS1 orDS3 transmit side input to the DS1 or DS3 receiver side output.

The third is an electrically-operated OC-12 facility loopback.

Internal testing capabilities

Technicians can use the internal testing capabilities for installation and manualtroubleshooting. The DS1 and DS3 test signal generators and detectors are integratedinto the system, eliminating the need for external test equipment to performtransmission tests.

1665 DMXplore also allows technicians to test specific system components.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-24 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

WaveStar® CIT

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section describes theWaveStar® CIT.

Contents

Introduction to theWaveStar® CIT 5-26

WaveStar® CIT access 5-27


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-25

Introduction to theWaveStar® CIT...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

The WaveStar® CIT is the primary tool used to interface with 1665 DMXplore. TheWaveStar® CIT user-interface software is installs and operates on your PC.

The WaveStar® CIT supports the following user interface options:

• Graphical user interface (GUI)

• TL1 command builder

• TL1 cut-through

The WaveStar® CIT is referred to as theWaveStar® CIT because the 1665 DMXploreuser-interface software is integrated with theWaveStar® CIT software for theWaveStar® products.

WaveStar ® CIT functionality

The WaveStar® CIT provides an easy-to-use interface and security features to preventunauthorized access. TheWaveStar® CIT supports the following:

• Local access control based on login and password

• OSI neighbor discovery for easy access to the local NE(s)

• User provisioning of cross-connections, equipment, Ethernet services, softwaremanagement, protection provisioning, and fault management

• Reports on NE equipage, cross-connections, alarms, and states

TL1 interface

The interface between theWaveStar® CIT and the 1665 DMXplore supports TL1messages. This interface allows theWaveStar® CIT to issue TL1 commands andreceive responses, as well as receive TL1 alarm reports from autonomous events thatare detected by the 1665 DMXplore.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-26 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

WaveStar® CIT access...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WaveStar ® CIT access methods

The WaveStar® CIT can access a network element using the following:

• Front IAO LAN port supporting OSI or TCP/IP communications

• Front serial port

WaveStar ® CIT direct local access

The recommended method for temporary local access is to connect theWaveStar® CITto 1665 DMXplore via the CITLAN port on the system controller (SYSCTL) circuitpack faceplate.

The WaveStar® CIT can also be connected to the serialCIT RS-232 port on theSYSCTL

circuit pack faceplate.

Important! When theWaveStar® CIT is directly connected to the CIT LAN port(not to an Ethernet LAN hub), a LAN crossover cable is required.

WaveStar ® CIT access via TCP/IP LAN

For security reasons (and per SIF standards), neither local nor remote TCP/IP accessvia the 1665 DMXplore IAO LAN ports is allowed by default.

WaveStar ® CIT remote access using DCC

A WaveStar® CIT with direct physical access to a local 1665 DMXplore can also beused to access remote NEs with DCC connectivity to the local 1665 DMXplore.WaveStar® CIT remote access over DCC is functionally equivalent toWaveStar® CITdirect access.

Figure 5-6 WaveStar ® CIT Direct local access

SYSCTLFront IAO LAN Port

Front Serial Port

Serial

OSI or TCP/IP

Xplore-048


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-27

Remote access to the front serial port

1665 DMXplore can also be accessed remotely via dialup modems, but not by theWaveStar® CIT software. The serial port when equipped with the recommended cableis configured as DTE to allow a permanent modem connection.

A PC with a terminal emulation software package, such as HyperTerminal, can be usedfor access to 1665 DMXplore’s serial port via dialup modems. The PC can use itsinternal modem or an external modem (shown). This form of access supports TL1messages only, and can be used to access remote NEs with DCC connectivity to the1665 DMXplore with the modem connection.

Figure 5-7 WaveStar ® CIT access via DCC

IAO LAN (OSI or TCP/IP)or front serial ports

Xplore-050

OC-3/12UPSRwithDCC

WaveStarCIT

fi

1665DMXplore


1665DMXplore

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning WaveStar® CIT access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-28 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Figure 5-8 Remote WaveStar ® CIT Access via modem

Serial

Xplore-052

Modem

Modem

RearSerial Port

OC-3/12UPSRwithDCC

WaveStarCIT

fi

1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore


Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning WaveStar® CIT access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-29

Protection switching

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section describes the types and functions of protection switching in 1665DMXplore.

Contents

Line protection switching 5-31

Path protection switching (path switched rings) 5-32

Equipment protection 5-33


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-30 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Line protection switching...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Line protection switching (1+1) occurs automatically in response to detected faults, aswell as in response to external commands from technicians at a local or remote CIT orOS. 1665 DMXplore provides SONET standard line protection switching onhigh-speed optical interfaces as a user-provisionable option.

1+1 facility protection

The high-speed OC-3/12 circuit packs have one bidirectional port (2 unidirectionallines), with its own selector. 1665 DMXplore provides non-revertive, unidirectional1+1 line switching protection in accordance with Telcordia GR-253.

Protection switching priorities

1665 DMXplore uses standard protection switching priorities as follows:

• Lockout of protection

• Forced switch

• Automatic switch: signal fail

• Automatic switch: signal degrade

• Manual switch.

1665 DMXplore uses unidirectional 1+1 non-revertive line switching. Automaticprotection switch procedures as specified by the SONET standards are used.

Automatic line switching

Automatic line switches are initiated by signal fail and signal degrade conditions onthe received OC-n signal. This signal’s BER is calculated from violations in theSONET line overhead B2 parity byte. Signal fail is declared for incoming loss ofsignal, loss of frame, line AIS, or a BER exceeding a provisionable 10-3 to 10-5

threshold, while a BER exceeding a provisionable 10-5 to 10-9 threshold causes thesignal degrade condition. A line protection switch is completed within 50 millisecondsof the onset of a hard failure such as a fiber cut.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-31

Path protection switching (path switched rings)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore supports path switched ring applications using the path protectionswitching schemes described in Telcordia Technologies GR-1400. This scheme offers60-millisecond restoration times and simple network administration for accessapplications. The ring facility consists of two fibers, with service and protection traffictravelling in opposite rotations around the ring. Each input is bridged and transmittedin both directions around the ring. The receiving end terminal monitors the quality ofboth signals and selects the best signal to drop.

UPSR configurations

1665 DMXplore supports the following OC-3/12 path switched ring configurations:

• VT1.5/STS-1/STS-3c

Path protection switching is non-revertive. STS-n path switching is triggered byincoming line LOP, AIS, and unequipped or STS-n path BER exceeding aprovisionable 10-3 to 10-5 threshold or signal degrade threshold. The system alsosupports VT path protection switching based on VT AIS, LOP, unequipped, and signaldegrade.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-32 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Equipment protection...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Equipment protection switching results from the failure of a MAIN, high-speed(network interface) circuit pack. If the circuit pack in MAIN1 fails, the systemautomatically switches all signals to the pack in slot MAIN2.

Protection switching priorities

The following protection switching priorities on equipment are user-controllablethrough TL1 commands:

• manual switch.

If protection is not desired, SONET interfaces can be provisioned for no protection bynot equipping the adjacent slot.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-33


Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section lists and describes performance monitoring parameters, SNMP traps andparameters, data storage, thresholds, and TCA transmission. This section is only meantto serve as a high-level overview to the performance monitoring capabilities of the1665 DMXplore. For detailed information such as OC-N, STS-N, VT1.5, Ethernet,DS1 and DS3 performance monitoring parameters, please refer toChapter 5,“Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning”.

Contents

Performance monitoring terms 5-35



VT1.5 performance parameters 5-51

STS-N performance parameters 5-53

OC-N performance parameters 5-55

Ethernet performance monitoring parameters 5-58

Performance monitoring data storage 5-60

Performance parameter thresholds 5-61

TCA transmission to OS 5-62

SNMP parameters and traps 5-63


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-34 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Performance monitoring terms...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section lists and describes terms related to performance monitoring andperformance monitoring reports for 1665 DMXplore.

Proactive maintenance

Proactive maintenance is corrective action, taken to correct degrading conditions beforethey result in complete failure that interrupts service. The conditions associated withSONET sections, lines and paths within the SONET network can be monitored for thispurpose using the performance monitoring parameters that are available with 1665DMXplore.

The following figure shows DS1 line and path and DS3 line and path performancemonitoring. 1665 DMXplore monitors DS3 line and path parameters from the DSX-3and DS3 path parameters from the optical path.

Reactive maintenance

Reactive maintenance is the response to the failure of a transmission line or path thatcompletely interrupts service. 1665 DMXplore provides alarm indications that canindicate this type of failure.


Performance is monitored by observing the number of errors or violations that occurfor line or path parameters. This information is accumulated and stored the current15-minute and 24-hour registers. A second 24-hour register maintains the number oferrors recorded during the previous 24 hours. The number of errors accumulated duringthe previous 8 hours are maintained in 31 additional 15-minute registers.

Figure 5-9 DS1/DS3 performance monitoring

DS1/DS3 Line, Path OC-n Section, Line. Path

STS-n Path

DS3 Path

STS-n Path

OC-3

Input

MA-DMXplore-018


1665DMXplore

DSX-1

DSX-3


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-35

DS1 performance monitoring

Tariffed service verification consists of monitoring performance parameters that can beassociated with the customer’s end-to-end service. 1665 DMXplore provides thiscapability for DS1 services with the DS1 performance monitoring feature. Based onANSIT1.403, 1665 DMXplore provides both Superframe Format (SF) and extendedsuperframe format (ESF). With the SF format the F-bits are used for framing only andnear-end PM is provided. With ESF format, the F-bits and the extended super formatare used. The ESF format retrieves performance messages written into the ESF datalink by the customer’s terminal equipment. From these ESF messages, the 1665DMXplore can determine and report near-end and far-end error performance of theentire DS1 link. Thresholds are set for DS1 PM parameters. Reports of thresholdsbeing exceeded can be used to indicate degraded performance. The number ofthreshold crossing occurrences are retrieved by the message-based operations system todetermine if the service is operating within tariffed limits.

DS3 performance monitoring

1665 DMXplore provides DS3 performance monitoring with three DS3 path PMoptions: P-bit (parity bit), adjusted F&M bit (frame and multi-frame bit), and C-bit.

P-Bit

When FMT is set to P-bit, P-bit errors are used as the basis for determining codeviolation counts. When provisioned for P-bit, the system calculates and provides countsof DS3 P-bit coding violations (CV), errored seconds (ES), and unavailable seconds(UAS) incoming from the fiber. Quarter-hour and day registers are provided withprovisionable threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) on a per-shelf basis. Severely erroredframe seconds (SEFS) are also monitored.

Because P-bits can be corrected at nodes provisioned for VMR along a DS3 path, theDS3 P-bit PM data may not provide a complete report of the end-to-end DS3 patherrors.

Adjusted F&M bit

When FMT is set to FM-bit,F & M bits are used as the basis for determining codeviolation counts. Adjusted F&M bit performance monitoring provides an alternativemethod for determining and accumulating DS3 path performance data based on anerror estimation technique using errors on the F&M framing bits to approximate theactual error counts in the DS3 path payload. F&M bits are not corrected at nodesprovisioned for VMR along a DS3 path. When provisioned for adjusted F&M bit, thesystem calculates and provides estimated counts of DS3 adjusted F&M bit codingviolations (CV), errored seconds (ES), severely errored seconds (SES), and unavailableseconds (UAS) incoming from the fiber.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Performance monitoring terms

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-36 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Quarter-hour and current day registers are provided with provisionable thresholdcrossing alerts (TCAs) on a per-shelf basis. Severely errored frame/AIS seconds(SAS-P) are also monitored.

C-Bit

When FMT is set to cbit, C-bit errors are used as the basis for determining codeviolation counts.

The system provides counts of DS3 C-Bit parity coding violations (CV-P), erroredseconds (ES-P), severely errored seconds (SES-P), and unavailable seconds (UAS-P)incoming from the DSX-3 and the fiber. The type of performance monitoring isprovisioned per DS3 service by a CIT command.

For C-bit PM, the DS3 service can be provisioned in violation monitor (VM) orviolation monitor and removal (VMR) modes. In VM mode, the C-bit errors are notcorrected as in the P-bit option.

Quarter-hour and day registers are provided with provisionable threshold crossing alerts(TCAs). The TCAs are provisionable on a per-shelf basis. Severely errored frameseconds (SEFS) counts are also provided.

Line parameter

A line is a physical transport link that moves digital information between two points ina network. A line is bounded by two end points, where the electrical or optical signalis generated and transmitted, or received and decoded. A line can be an OC-n, DS1, orDS3 facility. The line parameters of 1665 DMXplore are used to monitor theperformance of a line to determine its health.

Path parameter

A path is a framed stream between two points in a network at a specified rate,independent of the equipment and media providing the physical transport. A path isdefined by its two end points, called path terminations, where its frame structure isgenerated and decoded. A path may be switched and carried over multiple linessegments of different bandwidths, as long as the line segments can accommodate thebandwidth specified for the path. The path parameters of 1665 DMXplore are used tomonitor the performance of a path to determine its health.

Ethernet performance monitoring

1665 DMXplore provides PM capabilities for the 10/100Mbps Ethernet interfaces. PMdata is collected at each LAN and WAN interface in the network for both incomingand outgoing directions. The WAN interface provides a connection to a SONET VirtualConcatenation Group (VCG).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-37

Listed below are the five PM parameters that provide PM data on all Ethernetinterfaces:

• Dropped Frames (errors)This parameter counts the number incoming Ethernet frames dropped at aLAN/WAN port due to a frame check sequence (FCS) error or another defect in theframe.

• Incoming Number of BytesThis parameter counts the total number of bytes incoming to a LAN/WAN port.

• Incoming Number of FramesThis parameter counts the total number of Ethernet frames incoming to aLAN/WAN port.

• Outgoing Number of BytesThis parameter counts the total number of outgoing bytes transmitted by a specifiedLAN/WAN port.

• Outgoing Number of FramesThis parameters counts the total number of outgoing frames transmitted by aspecified LAN/WAN port.

Threshold Crossing Alert reports

Thresholds can be set for the number of errors or violations that occur for line or pathparameters in a 15 minute or 24 hour period. When a 15 minute or 24 hour thresholdis exceeded, or crossed, a Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) occurs.

Threshold crossing alerts are clearly identified and the time the performance registerswere last initialized is also shown. Any registers that may have been affected by thisinitialization are marked. There are separate reports for section, line, and pathparameters, as well as Ethernet parameters.

Line and path TCA reporting may be enabled or disabled using the TL1 TCAMDparameter, or through the GUI interface provided by CIT software. Threshold reportingis provisionable, individually, at the port, line, or path level, and for Ethernetinterfaces.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-38 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

DS1 performance monitoring parameters...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section describes the performance monitoring parameters relevant to DS1 signalsincoming from the fiber or DSX-1.


Performance is monitored by observing the number of errors or violations that occurfor line or path parameters. This information is accumulated and stored the current15-minute and 24-hour registers. A second 24-hour register maintains the number oferrors recorded during the previous 24 hours. The number of errors accumulated duringthe previous 8 hours are maintained in 31 additional 15-minute registers.

Threshold Crossing Alert reports

Thresholds can be set for the number of errors or violations that occur for line or pathparameters in a 15 minute or 24 hour period. When a 15 minute or 24 hour thresholdis exceeded, or crossed, a Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA) occurs.

Threshold crossing alerts are clearly identified and the time the performance registerswere last initialized is also shown. Any registers that may have been affected by thisinitialization are marked. There are separate reports for section, line, and pathparameters, as well as Ethernet parameters.

Line and path TCA reporting may be enabled or disabled using the TL1 TCAMDparameter, or through the GUI interface provided by CIT software. Threshold reportingis provisionable, individually, at the port, line, or path level, and for Ethernetinterfaces.

DS1 ESF format

Tariffed service verification consists of monitoring performance parameters that can beassociated with the customer’s end-to-end service. Based onANSIT1.403 extendedsuperframe format (ESF), this capability retrieves performance messages written intothe ESF data link by the customer’s terminal equipment. From these messages, 1665DMXplore can determine and report the end-to-end error performance of the entireDS1 link as seen by the customer. The counts are retrieved by the message-basedoperations system to determine if the service is operating within tariffed limits.

DS1 SF format

Each DS1 circuit pack measures the near-end performance of the incoming DS1signals, allowing the service provider to determine if a good DS1 signal was receivedfrom the customer before transporting it through the network. This information can


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-39

then aid in localizing any reported performance problems. The DS1 circuit packs canalso provide this same near-end information for super frame (SF) formatted (sometimesknown as D4 framing) DS1 services, but complete end-to-end performance verificationis limited due to the lack of the PRM in the SF format.

Monitored parameters

The following table lists the DS1 line and path performance parameters that 1665DMXplore monitors, including the default and ranges for the 15-minute and 1-day(24-hour) registers.

Table 5-4 DS1 performance parameters

Facility MeasuredProvisionableParameter

15-Min 1-Day

Default Range 1 Default Range 1

DS1 Line ErroredSeconds(ES-L)

65 0-900 648 0-65535

DS1 Path CodingViolations(fmt=SF)(CV-P)

72 0-16383 691 0-1048575

CodingViolations(fmt=ESF)(CV-P)

CodingViolations FarEnd (CV-PFE)

13296 0-16383 132960 0-1048575

ErroredSeconds (ES-P)

ErroredSeconds FarEnd (ES-PFE)

65 0-900 648 0-65535

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning DS1 performance monitoring parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-40 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Table 5-4 DS1 performance parameters (continued)


15-Min 1-Day


DS1 Path SeverelyErroredSeconds(SES-P)

SeverelyErroredSeconds FarEnd (SES-PFE)

10 0-900 100 0-65535

UnavailableSeconds(UAS-P)

UnavailableSeconds FarEnd(UAS-PFE)

10 0-900 10 0-65535

SEFrame/AlarmIndicationSignal Seconds(SAS-P) SEFrame SecondsFar End(SEFS-PFE)

2 0-900 17 0-65535

Notes:

1. When an individual performance monitoring parameter threshold is provisioned as zero(0), TCA reporting for the affected parameter is disabled.

DS1 line parameters

1665 DMXplore monitors the following near end DS1 line parameter on incoming(from the DSX-1 cross-connect) DS1 signals. The parameter is measured at the inputof the DS1 circuit pack on the DS1 line side (also referred to as facility, customerterminal, or DSX side).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-41

Errored seconds (ES-L)

The near end ES-L parameter increments once for each second during which 1665DMXplore detects either one or more bipolar violations (BPVs) or excessive zeros(EXZ), or one or more LOS defects.

DS1 line PM report

Use thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS1 Line command to obtain the DS1Line PM Report. Near end DS1 line PM is reported with an AID of the DS1 interfaceand a modifier of T1. For more information about the DS1 line parameter and thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS1 Line command, refer to theWaveStar®

CIT on-line help.

Near end DS1 path parameters

1665 DMXplore monitors the following near end DS1 path parameters at the localnetwork element. The parameters are measured at the input of the local DS1 circuitpack on the DS1 line side (also referred to as facility, customer terminal, or DSX side).

Coding violations (CV-P)

For the SF format, the CV-P parameter increments once for each frame synchronizationbit error (FE) detected at the path level. For the ESF format, the CV-P parameterincrements once for each cyclic redundancy check error (CRC) detected at the pathlevel.

Errored seconds (ES-P)

For the SF format, he ES-P parameter increments once for each second during which1665 DMXplore detects FE errors, CS events, SEF defects, or AIS defects. For theESF format, the ES-P parameter increments once for each second during which 1665DMXplore detects CRC errors, CS events, SEF defects, or AIS defects.

Severely errored seconds (SES-P)

For the SF format, the SES-P parameter increments once for each second during which1665 DMXplore detects 8 or more FE events (if Ft and Fs bits are measured) or 4 ormore FE events (if only Ft bits are monitored), or SEF defects, or AIS defects.

Unavailable seconds (UAS-P)

A UAS-P is a second during which the path is unavailable. A path is consideredunavailable from the beginning of 10 consecutive severely errored seconds until thebeginning of 10 consecutive seconds, none of which are severely errored.

Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal seconds (SAS-P)

The SAS-P parameter increments once for each second during which 1665 DMXploredetects either one or more severely errored frame defects, or one or more AIS defects.The SAS-P parameter applies to SF and ESF frame formats.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-42 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Near end DS1 path PM report

Use thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS1 Line command to obtain the DS1Path PM Report. Near end DS1 path PM is reported with an AID of the DS1 interfaceand a modifier of T1. For more information about the DS1 path parameters and thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS1 Line command, refer to theWaveStar®

CIT on-line help.

Far end DS1 path parameters

1665 DMXplore monitors the following far end DS1 path parameters at the localnetwork element. If the far end network element detects an incoming error, the far endnetwork element communicates the error back to the local near end network elementusing Performance Report Message (PRM) frames or a Remote Alarm Indication (RAI)signal.

The far end parameters are measured at the input of the local DS1 circuit pack on theDS1 line side (also referred to as facility, customer terminal, or DSX side).

Important! The format must be set to ESF to monitor the far end parameters(CV-PFE, ES-PFE, SES-PFE, and UAS-PFE).

Coding violations far end (CV-PFE)

The CV-PFE parameter increments based on the PRM G bits defined in the followingtable.

Table 5-5 CV-PFE parameter increments

PRM Bit = 1 CV Count Accumulated

G1 1

G2 5

G3 10

G4 100

G5 319

G6 333

Errored seconds far end (ES-PFE)

The ES-PFE parameter is a count of one second PRM intervals containing an RAI orRAI-CI signal, or a 1 in any of the following bits: G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G6, SE, orSL.

Severely errored seconds far end (SES-PFE)

The SES-PFE parameter is a count of one second PRM intervals containing an RAI orRAI-CI signal or a 1 in any of the following bits: G6 or SE.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-43

Unavailable seconds far end (UAS-PFE)

A UAS-PFE is a second during which the path is unavailable. A path is consideredunavailable from the beginning of 10 consecutive severely errored seconds until thebeginning of 10 consecutive seconds, none of which are severely errored.

Severely errored frame seconds (SEFS-PFE)

The SEFS-PFE parameter is a count of 1 second PRM intervals that SE bit is equal to1.

Far end DS1 path PM report

Use thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS1 Line command to obtain the DS1Path PM Report. Far end DS1 path PM is reported with an AID of the DS1 interfaceand a modifier of T1. For more information about the DS1 path parameters and thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS1 Line command, refer to theWaveStar®

CIT on-line help.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-44 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

DS3 performance monitoring parameters...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section describes the performance monitoring parameters that are monitored onDS3 signals incoming from the high speed fiber and from the local DSX-3cross-connect.

In order to generate DS3 PM reports, the port Primary State must be IS (in service).(When the PST parameter is provisioned as AUTO and a valid DS3 signal is detected,the PST parameter automatically transitions to the IS state.) The VM mode should beoff because the P-bits can be corrected at nodes where the VM Mode is provisionedon, and the DS3 P-bit PM data may not provide a complete report of the end-to-endDS3 path errors.


The following table lists the DS3 line and path performance parameters that 1665DMXplore monitors, including the default and ranges for the 15-minute and 1-day(24-hour) registers.

Table 5-6 DS3 performance parameters


15-Min 1-Day


DS3 Line Coding Violations(CV-L)

387 0-16383 3865 0-1048575

Errored Seconds(ES-L), ES-L FE

25 0-900 250 0-65535

Severely ErroredSeconds (SES-L)

4 0-900 40 0-65535


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-45

Table 5-6 DS3 performance parameters (continued)


15-Min 1-Day


DS3 Path Coding Violations(CV-P)CodingViolations Far End(CV-PFE)

382 0-16383 3820 0-1048575

Errored Seconds(ES-P)ErroredSeconds Far End(ES-PFE)

25 0-900 250 0-65535

Severely ErroredSeconds (SES-P)Severely ErroredSeconds Far End(SES-PFE)

4 0-900 40 0-65535

UnavailableSeconds(UAS-P)UnavailableSeconds Far End(UAS-PFE)

10 0-900 10 0-65535

SE Frame/AlarmIndication SignalSeconds (SAS-P)SE Frame/AlarmIndication SignalSeconds Far End(SAS-PFE)

2 0-900 8 0-65535

Notes:


DS3 line parameters

1665 DMXplore monitors the following ingress near end DS3 line parameters onincoming (from the DSX-3 cross-connect) DS3 signals. Ingress refers to performancemonitoring parameters that are measured at the input of the DS3 circuit pack on theDS3 line side (also referred to as facility, customer terminal, or DSX side).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-46 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Supported performance monitoring signal formats

1665 DMXplore supports DS3 line performance monitoring on DS3 signals with P-bitparity, FM-bit parity, or CP-bit parity performance monitoring signal formats.

Coding violations (CV-L)

The near end CV-L parameter increments once for each bipolar violation (BPV) andexcessive zeros (EXZ) detected at the DS3 line layer.


The near end ES-L parameter increments once for each second during which 1665DMXplore detects either one or more bipolar violations (BPVs) or excessive zeros(EXZ), or one or more LOS defects.

Severely errored seconds (SES-L)

The near end SES-L parameter increments once for each second during which 1665DMXplore detects either one or more LOS defects, 2444 or more BPVs at a minimumBER of 7.5 X 10-5, or 45 or more BPVs at a minimum BER of 1 X 10-6.

DS3 line PM report

Use thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS3 Line command to obtain the DS3Line PM Report. Ingress near end DS3 line PM is reported with an AID of the DS3interface and a modifier of T3. For more information about the DS3 line parametersand thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS3 Line command, refer to theWaveStar® CIT on-line help.

DS3 path performance monitoring signal format

1665 DMXplore supports the following DS3 path performance monitoring signalformats:

• P-bit parity: The P bits are monitored for detecting code violations at the near end.

• FM-bit parity: The F and M bits are monitored for detecting code violations at thenear end.

• CP-bit parity: CP-bit parity is used for end-to-end DS3 path PM (near end and farend). The C bits are monitored for code violations. CP-bit parity is only allowed onDS3 signals with the C-bit signal format.

P-bit parity

When provisioned for P-bit parity, 1665 DMXplore calculates and provides counts ofthe following near end DS3 path parameters incoming from the fiber or DSX-3:

• Coding violations (CV-P)

• Errored seconds (ES-P)

• Severely errored seconds (SES-P)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-47

• Unavailable seconds (UAS-P)

• Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal seconds (SAS-P)

FM-bit parity

FM-bit parity provides an alternative method for determining and accumulating DS3path performance data based on an error estimation technique using errors on the F&Mframing bits to approximate the actual error counts in the DS3 path payload.

Adjusted F&M bit performance monitoring estimates the following near end DS3 pathparameters incoming from the fiber or DSX-3:






CP-bit parity

When provisioned for CP-bit parity, 1665 DMXplore calculates and provides counts ofthe following DS3 near end and far end path parameters incoming from the fiber orDSX-3:






Violation monitoring and removal

The DS3 path performance monitoring signal formats support provisionable P-bitmonitoring and correction (violation monitoring mode) on the outgoing DS3 signaltoward the DS3 facility.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-48 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

The following table shows the provisionable DS3 signal formats, performancemonitoring signal formats, and VM modes.

Table 5-7 DS3 signal formats, PM signal formats, and VM modes

DS3 SignalFormat

PerformanceMonitoring SignalFormat

VM Mode MonitorP-Bits

CorrectP-Bits

C-Bit P-bit parity On X X

Off X

FM-bit parity On X

Off

CP-bit parity On X

Off

Near end DS3 path parameters

1665 DMXplore monitors the following ingress and egress near end DS3 pathparameters at the local network element. Ingress refers to parameters that are measuredon incoming DS3 signals at the input of the local DS3 circuit pack on the DS3 lineside (also referred to as facility, customer terminal, or DSX side). Egress refers toparameters that are measured on incoming DS3 signals at the input of the local DS3port unit on the SONET side (also referred to as fiber side).


The near end CV-P parameter increments once for each parity error detected at the pathlevel. The CV-P parameter applies to all performance monitoring signal formats.

In the P-bit parity signal format, non-identical P-bits corresponding to the same DS3M-frame also increment the CV-P parameter.

For CP-bit parity signal format, the three C-bits in subframe 3 of a C-bit formattedDS3 frame carry the DS3 path-parity information. At the DS3 transmitter, the CP bitsin the DS3 C-bit frame are set equal to the two P-bits in frame″n″. These CP bits arethen inserted into frame″n+1″. Since the CP bits are not modified in any way whilepassing through the network, the DS3 high-speed receiver can determine if errorsoccurred in the DS3 path. The DS3 receiver computes the parity of frame″n″ andcompares that parity with the value received in the CP bits in frame″n+1″. If thevalues do not match, DS3 path parity violations are counted.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-49


The near end ES-P parameter increments once for each second during which 1665DMXplore detects either one or more parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one ormore AIS defects. The ES-P parameter applies to all performance monitoring signalformats.


The near end SES-P parameter increments once for each second during which 1665DMXplore detects either one or more AIS or SEF defects, 2444 or more BPVs at aminimum BER of 7.5 X 10-5, or 45 or more BPVs at a minimum BER of 1 X 10-6.The SES-P parameter applies to all performance monitoring signal formats.


A near end UAS-P is a second during which the path is unavailable. A path isconsidered unavailable from the beginning of 10 consecutive severely errored secondsuntil the beginning of 10 consecutive seconds, none of which are severely errored. TheUAS-P parameter applies to the P-bit parity and FM-bit parity performance monitoringsignal formats.

Severely errored frame/alarm indication signal seconds (SAS-P)

The SAS-P parameter increments once for each second during which 1665 DMXploredetects either one or more severely errored frame defects, or one or more AIS defects.The SAS-P parameter applies to all performance monitoring signal formats.

Near end DS3 path PM report

Use thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS3 Path command to obtain the DS3Path PM Report. Ingress near end DS3 path PM is reported with an AID of the DS3interface and a modifier of T3. Egress near end DS3 path PM is reported with an AIDof the SONET interface and a modifier of T3. For more information about the DS3path parameters and thePerformance → View PM Reports → DS3 Path command,refer to theWaveStar® CIT on-line help.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-50 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

VT1.5 performance parameters...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section describes the terminated SONET VT1.5 performance monitoringparameters. Terminated SONET VT1.5 path performance monitoring applies to VT1.5paths cross-connected to a non-SONET interface (for example, DS1).


The following table lists the SONET VT1.5 path performance parameters that 1665DMXplore monitors, including the default and ranges for the 15-minute and 1-day(24-hour) registers.

Table 5-8 SONET VT1.5 performance parameters


15-Min 1-Day


VT1.5 Path V5 Errored Seconds(ES-P)

40 0-900 900 0-65535

V5 Severely ErroredSeconds (SES-P)

40 0-900 900 0-65535

V5 Unavailable Seconds(UAS-P)

40 0-900 900 0-65535

Notes:


VT1.5 path parameters

1665 DMXplore monitors the following near end SONET VT1.5 path parameters onincoming (from the SONET interface) VT1.5 signals.


The Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ESP) parameter for each SONET path ismonitored. The ESP parameter increments once for each second where one or moreSTS Path layer BIP errors are detected or an AIS-P, LOP-P, or UNEQ-P defect isdetected. BIP errors are not monitored for VTs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-51


The Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SESP) parameter for each SONETpath is monitored. The SESP parameter increments once for each second where 15 ormore STS Path layer BIP errors are detected or an AIS-P, LOP-P, or UNEQ-P defect isdetected1665 DMXplore detects 1-bit RDI, but treats it as though it is the high orderbit of a 3-bit ERDI in that it includes UNEQ.


The Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UASP) parameter for each SONET pathis monitored. The UASP parameter increments once for each second where SESP isdetected after ten consecutive seconds with SESP detected. UASP continues toincrement once for each second until ten consecutive seconds without SESP aredetected.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning VT1.5 performance parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-52 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

STS-N performance parameters...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section describes the performance monitoring parameters on terminated (STS-1and STS-3c) and intermediate STS-N (STS-1 and STS-3c) paths that arecross-connected through the system. Intermediate SONET STS-N path performancemonitoring applies to STS-N paths cross-connected to another SONET interface.Terminated SONET STS-N path performance monitoring applies to STS-N pathscross-connected to a non-SONET interface (for example, DS3).


The following table lists the SONET STS-N path performance parameters that 1665DMXplore monitors, including the default and ranges for the 15-minute and 1-day(24-hour) registers.

Table 5-9 SONET STS-N performance parameters


15-Min 1-Day


STS-3cPath

Coding Violations(CV-P)

25 0-16383 250 0-1048575

STS-1Path

Coding Violations(CV-P)

125 0-16383 150 0-1048575

STS-3cPath

Errored Seconds(ES-P)

20 0-900 200 0-65535

STS-1Path

Errored Seconds(ES-P)

12 0-900 100 0-65535

STS-NPath

UnavailableSeconds (UAS-P)

10 0-900 10 0-65535

Notes:


STS-N path parameters

1665 DMXplore monitors the following near end SONET STS path parameters onincoming (from the SONET interface) STS-N signals.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-53


The Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CVP) parameter for each SONET path ismonitored. The CVP parameter increments once for each BIP error detected at the STSpath layer (the B3 byte of the incoming SONET STS Path overhead). Up to 8 BIPerrors can be detected per frame.


The Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ESP) parameter for each SONET path ismonitored. The ESP parameter increments once for each second where one or moreSTS Path layer BIP errors are detected or an AIS-P, LOP-P, or UNEQ-P defect isdetected.

Currently this product detects 1-bit RDI, but treats it as though it is the high order bitof a 3-bit ERDI in that it includes UNEQ.


The Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SESP) parameter for each SONETpath is monitored. The SESP parameter increments once for each second where 2400or more STS Path layer BIP errors are detected or an AIS-P, LOP-P, or UNEQ-P defectis detected. Currently 1665 DMXplore detects 1-bit RDI, but treats it as though it isthe high order bit of a 3-bit ERDI in that it includes UNEQ.

Currently this product detects 1-bit RDI, but treats it as though it is the high order bitof a 3-bit ERDI in that it includes UNEQ.


The Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UASP) parameter for each SONET pathis monitored. The UASP parameter increments once for each second where SESP isdetected after ten consecutive seconds with SESP detected. UASP continues toincrement once for each second until ten consecutive seconds without SESP aredetected.

STS-N path PM report

Use thePerformance → View PM Reports → STSn Path command to obtain theSTS-N Path PM Report. For more information about the STS-N path parameters andthe Performance → View PM Reports → STSn Path command, refer to theWaveStar® CIT on-line help.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning STS-N performance parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-54 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

OC-N performance parameters...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section describes the performance monitoring parameters that are applicable toSONET OC-N (OC-3, OC-12) signals.


The following table lists the SONET OC-N section and line performance parametersthat 1665 DMXplore monitors, including the default and ranges for the 15-minute and1-day (24-hour) registers.

Table 5-10 SONET OC-N performance parameters


15-Min 1-Day


OC-N Section SE FrameSeconds(SEFS)

10 0-900 30 0-65535

OC-3 Line CodingViolations(CV-L),CV-L FE

140 0-16383 1344 0-1048575

OC-12 Line CodingViolations(CV-L),CV-L FE

560 0-16383 5376 0-1048575


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-55

Table 5-10 SONET OC-N performance parameters (continued)


15-Min 1-Day


OC-N Line ErroredSeconds(ES-L)

40 0-900 900 0-65535

SeverelyErroredSeconds(SES-L)

30 0-900 90 0-65535

Unavail-ableSeconds(UAS-L)

30 0-900 89 0-65535

ProtectionSwitchCount Line(PSC-L)

2 0-63 4 0-255

PointerJustifica-tion CountDifference(PJCDIFF-P)

60 0-1048575 5760 0-16777215

Notes:


OC-N line parameters

1665 DMXplore monitors the following near end SONET line parameters for incoming(from the lightguide cross-connect) OC-N signals. The parameters are measured at theinput of the OC-N OLIU circuit pack on the OC-N line side (also referred to as LGXside).

Coding violations (CV-L)

The Near-End Line Coding Violation (CVL) parameter for each SONET Line ismonitored. The Near-End CVL parameter increments once for every occurrence of aBIP error detected at the Line layer (i.e. using the B2 byte in the incoming SONETsignal). Up to 8*N BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning OC-N performance parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-56 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007


The Near-End Line Errored Seconds (ESL) parameter for each SONET Line ismonitored. The Near-End ESL parameter increments once for every second thatcontains at least one BIP error detected at the Line layer (at any point during thesecond), or an AIS-L defect was present.

Severely errored seconds (SES-L)

The Near-End Line Severely Errored Seconds (SESL) parameter for each SONET Lineis monitored. The Near-End SESL parameter increments once for every second thatcontains an AIS-L defect.

Unavailable seconds (UAS-L)

The Near-End Line Unavailable Seconds (UASL) parameter for each SONET Line ismonitored. The Near-End UASL parameter increments once for every second that theLine was considered unavailable (at any point during the second). A Line becomesunavailable at the onset of 10 consecutive seconds that qualify as Near-End SESLs,and continues to be unavailable until the onset of 10 consecutive seconds that do notqualify as Near-End SESLs.

Protection switch count (PSC-L)

The PSC parameter records the number of times that service traffic switched to or fromanother line either automatically, by aWaveStar® CIT command, or operations systemcommand. The Near-End Protection Switch Counts (PSC-L) parameter for eachSONET line (that supports 1+1 protection switching for that line) is monitored.

Pointer justifications counts difference (PJCDIFF-P)

This is a calculation of the absolute value of the PJC parameters listed under theheadings below. PJCDIFF-P is used to calculate the difference between calculate thedifference between the PPJC-PGEN, NPJC-PGEN and between PPJC-PDET andNPJC-PDET. 1665 DMXplore monitors the first good cross-connected STS or theprovisioned STS. From this STS, the calculation is to (A) calculate the differencebetween the PPJC-PGEN, NPJC-PGEN. (B) Calculate the difference of thePPJC-PDET, NPJC-PDET. The resulting PJC is the absolute value of the differencebetween A and B.

OC-N line PM report

Use thePerformance → View PM Reports → OCn Line command to obtain theOC-N Line PM Report. For more information about the OC-N line parameters and thePerformance → View PM Reports → OCn Line command, refer to theWaveStar®

CIT on-line help.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning OC-N performance parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-57

Ethernet performance monitoring parameters...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore provides PM capabilities for the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernetinterfaces. PM data is collected at each LAN and WAN interface in the network forboth incoming and outgoing directions and is stored in quarter-hour and day bins. TheWAN interface provides a connection to a SONET Virtual Concatenation Group(VCG).

TCAs

Provisionable threshold crossing alerts (TCAs) are supported on the Ethernet interfaces.


The following table lists the Ethernet performance parameters that 1665 DMXploremonitors, including the ranges for the 15-minute and 1-day (24-hour) registers.

Table 5-11 Ethernet performance parameters

Facility MonitoredParameter

15-Min 1-Day


Ethernet Ethernetdropped frames(errors)(EDFE)(Note 1)

70,000 0-7,000,000

900,000 0-90,000,000

Incomingnumber of bytes(EINB)

70,000 0-7,000,000

900,000 0-90,000,000

Incomingnumber offrames (EINF)

70,000 0-7,000,000

900,000 0-90,000,000

Outgoingnumber ofbytes(EONB)

70,000 0-7,000,000

900,000 0-90,000,000

Outgoingnumber offrames(EONF)

70,000 0-7,000,000

900,000 0-90,000,000

All of the abovemonitoredtypes(ALL)

70,000 0-7,000,000

900,000 0-90,000,000


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-58 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Notes:

1. Counter can overflow.

Enabling/disabling

Performance monitoring is enabled/disabled via theWaveStar® CIT. From the SystemView menu, selectProvision > Prov PM Ports , then navigate to the port.

Ethernet parameters

1665 DMXplore monitors several Ethernet parameters.

Ethernet dropped frames (errors) (EDFE)

The EDFE parameter counts the number of incoming Ethernet frames dropped at aLAN/WAN port due to a frame check sequence (FCS) error or another defect in theframe.

Ethernet dropped frames (congestion) (EDFC)

The EDFC parameter counts the number of incoming Ethernet frames dropped at aLAN/WAN port due to congestion on the interface.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Ethernet performance monitoring parameters

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-59

Performance monitoring data storage...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quarter-hour and current day registers

1665 DMXplore provides current quarter-hour and current day registers for allaccumulated performance parameters. The previous 8 hours of quarter-hour andprevious day registers are also provided.

Access

1665 DMXplore can initialize these registers through the CIT or OS, locally orremotely at any time, as well as retrieve and report their contents.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-60 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Performance parameter thresholds...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provisioning

The current quarter-hour and current day thresholds for each parameter type areprovisionable, using the CIT, on a per-shelf basis. If values other than the defaults areused, only one value for each parameter type needs to be set.

Threshold-Crossing Alerts (TCAs)

Whenever the current quarter-hour or the current day threshold for a given parameter isexceeded, 1665 DMXplore generates a threshold-crossing alert (TCA) that is enteredinto the performance monitoring exception report and reported to the OS through theTL1 interface and GUI.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-61

TCA transmission to OS...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The TCA information may be reported to the OS using the TL1 message-based OSinterfaces. TCAs can be used to trigger proactive maintenance activity at the OS.

TL1 over TCP/IP access

The TL1 interfaces should be used to derive full benefit from 1665 DMXplore’sperformance monitoring capabilities. The full set of PM data stored by 1665DMXplore (TCAs and the contents of PM registers) is provided through the TL1interface.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-62 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

SNMP parameters and traps...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore makes use of Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). SNMPis the most common protocol used by network management applications, and is thebasis of most network management software. The phrasemanaged deviceimpliesSNMP compliance.

SNMP applications use a structured Management Information Base (MIB) that definesthe objects that are managed along with their related parameters and event messages,or “traps,” that can be communicated. A MIB can be composed of several modules.Some modules contain objects, parameters, and traps that are standard and are used onmany managed devices. Other modules can contain custom definitions for objects,parameters, and traps that are used to manage unique features on specific manageddevices. The MIB modules are stored on the PC that is running the SNMP application.SNMP implementation on 1665 DMXplore conforms with the MIB-II standard, definedby RFC 1213, and Entity MIB version 2, defined in RFC 2737.

SNMP standard MIB support

1665 DMXplore supports the functionality for Simple Network Management Protocol(SNMP) for the following standard MIBs:

• RFC 3418: SNMP MIB (obsoletes RFC 1907)

• RFC 1213: MIB-II standard management information structure and networkmanagement protocol for TCP/IP-based networks

• RFC 2737: Entity MIB (version 2) naming mechanisms and information protocols

• RFC 2819: Remote Network Monitoring MIB objects for managing remote networkmonitoring devices as specified in the Ethernet Statistics Group, History ControlGroup, Ethernet History Group, and Packet Capture Group

• RFC 3289: Read-only support for the Differentiated Services Architecture MIB

• RFC 2863: Ethernet port performance monitoring and traps, including the use ofthe Ethernet continuous counter, specified by the Standard Network Interfaces MIBmodule

• RFC 3635: Additional Ethernet port performance monitoring using the Ethernetcontinuous counter for Ethernet-like interfaces, specified by the Ethernet-likeInterface Types MIB module

• RFC 2674: VLAN MIB components, specified in the dot1qVlan group aresupported for the dot1qVlanStatic, dot1qPortVlan, dot1qPortVlanStatistics, anddot1qPortVlanHCStatistics tables.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-63

Standard Ethernet interface MIB module (RFC 2863)

1665 DMXplore supports the standard Ethernet interface MIB module defined inRFC2863. This module defines Ethernet traps and retrievable Ethernet port and PMparameters. This MIB module applies to individual Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernetports.

Standard Ethernet interface MIB module parameters

Object Definition

ifIndex Interface Index

ifDescr Interface description (mfg, product,version)

ifType Type of interface

ifMtu Maximum packet size

ifSpeed Interface maximum rate (bps) - for GbEcircuit pack, this is 1,000,000,000, for FEcircuit pack, value is based on value ofthe line rate parameter. If the line rate is10M, ifSpeedvalue is 10,000,000. If theline rate parameter is 100M,ifSpeedvalueis 100,000,000.

ifPhysAddress MAC Address

ifAdminStatus Administration status (up, down ortesting) (read only). Value is always up.

ifOperStatus Operational status (up, down, testing,unknown, dormant, notPresent orlowerLayerDown). If board/port isremoved, value is notPresent. If there isan existing alarm on the port, i.e., Loss ofsignal (LOS) or Auto-NegotiationMismatch (ANM) on the port, then thevalue is down, else the value is up.

ifLastChange TimeTicks since last re-initialization

ifInOctets Total Bytes Received

IfInUcastPkts Frames Received: Broadcast FramesReceived - Multicast Frames Received

ifInMulticastPkts Multicast Frames Received

ifInBroadcastPkts Broadcast Frames Received

ifInDiscards Dropped Frames

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning SNMP parameters and traps

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-64 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Object Definition

ifInErrors CRC Error + Oversize Frames +Fragments + Jabber + MAC Rx Error

ifInUnknownProtos (always 0)

ifOutOctets Bytes Sent

IfOutUcastPkts Frames Sent - Out Multicast Frames - OutBroadcast Frames

ifOutMulticastPkts Out Multicast Frames

ifOutBroadcastPkts Out Broadcast Frames

IfOutDiscards (always 0) (not supported in this release)

ifOutErrors (always 0) (not supported in this release)

ifName Interface name - (always set to NULL)

ifHCInOctets Total Bytes Received

ifHCInUcastPkts Frames Received: Broadcast FramesReceived - Multicast Frames Received

ifHCInMulticastPkts Multicast Frames Received

ifHCInBroadcastPkts Broadcast Frames Received

ifHCOutOctets Bytes Sent

ifHCOutUcastPkts Frames Sent - Out Multicast Frames - OutBroadcast Frames

ifHCOutMulticastPkts Out Multicast Frames

ifHCOutBroadcastPkts Out Broadcast Frames

ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable 1665 DMX and 1665 DMXtend supportREAD-ONLY

Traps enabled or disabled - 1665DMXplore

ifHighSpeed Interface speed (Mbps) - for GbE circuitpack, this is 1,000, for FE circuit pack,value is based on line rate parameter. Ifthe line rate is 10M,ifSpeedvalue is 10.If the line rate is 100M,ifSpeedvalue is100.

ifPromiscuousMode Promiscuous mode (true or false) - 1665DMX and 1665 DMXtend supportREAD-ONLY

ifConnectorPresent Physical connector present (true or false)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-65

Object Definition

ifAlias Interface alias name - READ-ONLY - -(always set to NULL)

ifCounterDiscontinuityTimeTimeStamp Time of last counter discontinuity

Table 5-12 Standard Ethernet interface MIB module trap

Object Definition

linkUp link up

linkDown link down

Standard Ethernet MIB module (RFC 3635)

1665 DMXplore supports the standard Ethernet PM MIB module defined in RFC2358and RFC2665. This module defines additional retrievable Ethernet PM parameters. ThisMIB module applies to individual Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports.

Table 5-13 Standard Ethernet PM MIB module parameters

Object Definition

ifIndex Interface Index

dot3StatsAlignmentErrors Fragments

dot3StatsFCSErrors CRC Error

dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames Collision

dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames (always 0) (not supported in this release)

dot3StatsSQETestErrors (always 0) (not supported in this release)

dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions (always 0) (not supported in this release)

dot3StatsLateCollisions Late Collision

dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions (always 0) (not supported in this release)

dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors (always 0) (not supported in this release)

dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors (always 0) (not supported in this release)

dot3StatsFrameTooLongs Oversize Frames

dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors MAC Rx Error

dot3StatsSymbolErrors (always 0) (not supported in this release)

dot3StatsDuplex Status Duplex Status (half duplex (2), full duplex(3) - added by RFC2665


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-66 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Table 5-13 Standard Ethernet PM MIB module parameters (continued)

Object Definition

dot3ControlFunctionsSupported pause (0) - 802.3 flow control - added byRFC2665

dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes (always 0) - added by RFC2665 (notsupported in this release)

dot3PauseAdminMode Flow control default mode (read only) -added by RFC2665

dot3PauseOperMode Flow control operational mode (disabled(1), enabled transmit & receive (4)) -added by RFC2665

dot3InPauseFrames (always 0) - added by RFC2665 (notsupported in this release)

dot3OutPauseFrames (always 0) - added by RFC2665 (notsupported in this release)

VLAN MIB module (RFC 2674)

1665 DMXplore supports the VLAN MIB components, specified in the dot1qVlangroup of RFC 2674. The dot1qVlanStatic, dot1qPortVlan, dot1qPortVlanStatistics, anddot1qPortVlanHCStatistics tables are supported.

Table 5-14 dot1qVlanStatic values

Object Definition

dot1qVlanStaticName PortList - Not supported)

dot1qVlanStaticEgressPorts PortList

dot1qVlanForbiddenEgressPorts PortList - Not supported)

dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts PortList - Ports for transmitting untaggedegress packets

dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus

dot1qNextFreeLocalVlanIndex Not Supported

Table 5-15 dot1qPortVlan values

Object Definition

dot1qPvid Vlan Index


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-67

Table 5-15 dot1qPortVlan values (continued)

Object Definition

dot1qPortAcceptableFrameTypes Admin all

Admit only

Vlan Tagged

dot1qPortIngressFiltering Truth Value

dot1qPortGvrpStatus Enabled Status - Not supported

dot1qPortGvrpFailedRegistrations Not supported

dot1qPortGvrpLastPduOrigin Mac Address - Not supported

Table 5-16 dot1qPortVlanStatistics values

Object Definition

dot1qTpVlanPortInFrames

dot1qTpVlanPortOutFrames Not supported - always 0

dot1qTpVlanPortInDiscards

dot1qTpVlanPortInOverflowFrames

dot1qTpVlanPortOutOverflowFrames

dot1qTpVlanPortInOverflowDiscards

Table 5-17 dot1qPortVlanHCStatistics values

Object Definition

dot1qTpVlanPortHCInFrames

dot1qTpVlanPortHCOutFrames Not supported - always 0

dot1qTpVlanPortHCInDiscards

Private MIB support

1665 DMXplore supports the functionality for Simple Network Management Protocol(SNMP) for the following standard MIBs:

• Ethernet performance monitoring and traps using the SONET 15-minute and24-hour registers of the 1665 DMXplore, specified by the Private EthernetPerformance Management MIB module

• Private MIB supporting virtual bridges, identified by the slot, virtual switch ID, andspanning tree groups as specified by the spanning tree group ID


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-68 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

• Performance monitoring of individual Virtual Concatenation Groups using thePrivate VCG MIB module that specifies VCG traps

• Monitoring of individual 1665 DMXplore circuit packs using a private MIBmodule for equipment information and equipment traps.

Private Ethernet MIB module

1665 DMXplore supports a private Ethernet PM MIB module for Ethernet traps andfor retrieving Ethernet PM parameters. This private Ethernet PM MIB module appliesto individual Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports.

Table 5-18 Private Ethernet PM MIB module parameters

Object Parameter Definition

dmxEthPmonTypeCurrent port type FE or GbE port

dmxEPmonCurrentEinb Incoming number of bytes(EINB)

Total Bytes Received

dmxEPmonCurrentEinf Incoming number of frames(EINF)

Frames Received or TotalFrames Received

dmxEPmonCurrentEdfe Dropped frames:congestion (EDFC)

Dropped Frames

dmxEPmonCurrentEdfe Dropped frames: errors(EDFE)

CRC Error + OversizeFrames + Fragments +Jabber + MAC Rx Error(Note)

dmxEPmonCurrentEonb Outgoing number of bytes(EONB)

Bytes Sent

dmxEPmonCurrentEonf Outgoing number of frames(EONF)

Frames Sent

dmxEthPmonIntervalIndex 15 minute bucket index 1 to 32

dmxEthPmonTypeInterval port type FE or GbE port

dmxEPmonIntervalEinb Incoming number of bytes(EINB)

Total Bytes Received: 15minute

dmxEPmonIntervalEinf Incoming number of frames(EINF)

Frames Received or TotalFrames Received: 15minute

dmxEPmonIntervalEdfe Dropped frames:congestion (EDFC)

Dropped Frames: 15minute


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-69

Table 5-18 Private Ethernet PM MIB module parameters (continued)

Object Parameter Definition

dmxEPmonIntervalEdfe Dropped frames: errors(EDFE)

CRC Error + OversizeFrames + Fragments +Jabber + MAC Rx Error:15 minute

dmxEPmonIntervalEonb Outgoing number of bytes(EONB)

Bytes Sent: 15 minute

dmxEPmonIntervalEonf Outgoing number of frames(EONF)

Frames Sent: 15 minute

dmxEthPmonDayIndex day index current or previous 24 hourperiod

dmxEthPmonDayType port type FE or GbE port

dmxEPmonDayEinb Incoming number of bytes(EINB)

Total Bytes Received: 24hour

dmxEPmonDayEinf Incoming number of frames(EINF)

Frames Received or TotalFrames Received: 24 hour

dmxEPmonDayEdfe Dropped frames:congestion (EDFC)

Dropped Frames: 24 hour

dmxEPmonDayEdfe Dropped frames: errors(EDFE)

CRC Error + OversizeFrames + Fragments +Jabber + MAC Rx Error:24 hour

dmxEPmonDayEonb Outgoing number of bytes(EONB)

Bytes Sent: 24 hour

dmxEPmonDayEonf Outgoing number of frames(EONF)

Frames Sent: 24 hour

Table 5-19 Private Ethernet PM MIB module traps

Object Definition

dmxIncFeLanLos Loss of signal (LOS) on FE LAN port

dmxIncFeLanLosClr LOS clear on FE LAN port

dmxIncFeLanAnm Auto-Negotiation Mismatch (ANM) on FELAN port

dmxIncFeLanAnmClr ANM clear on FE LAN port

dmxIncGeLanLos Loss of signal (LOS) on GbE LAN port


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-70 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Table 5-19 Private Ethernet PM MIB module traps (continued)

Object Definition

dmxIncGeLanLosClr LOS clear on GbE LAN port

dmxIncGeLanAnm Auto-Negotiation Mismatch (ANM) onGbE LAN port

dmxIncGeLanAnmClr ANM clear on GbE LAN port

Private bridge MIB module

1665 DMXplore supports virtual bridges, identified by slot, virtual switch ID, andspanning tree groups, as specified by the spanning tree group ID. This private MIB isimplemented in place of RFC 1493, which does not support these 1665 DMXploreattributes.

Table 5-20 Private Bridge MIB module parameters

Group/Table Parameter Definition

DmxStp Table dmxStpSlotId slot ifindex

dmxStpVrtswId virtual switch ID: 1..4095

dmxStpId spanning tree group ID:1..4095

dmxStpPriority priority: 0..65535 (TL1:strp)

dmxStpMaxAge max age: 6..255 (TL1:stmaxage)

dmxStpForwardDelay forward delay: 4..255(TL1: stfdtm)

dmxStpRootCost root cost (TL1: strtpcost)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-71

Table 5-20 Private Bridge MIB module parameters (continued)

Group/Table Parameter Definition

DmxStpPort Table dmxStpPortId port ifindex

dmxStpId spanning tree group ID:1..4095

dmxStpPortType VCG, EPORT

dmxStpPortState spanning tree port status:

FWG: Forwarding

LLG: Learning/Listening

BLK: Blocked - 802.1kmode only

DISA: Disabled - Admin.

DISF: Disabled - Failed

DCD: Discarding - 802.1wmode only

dmxStpPortPriority priority: 0..65535 (TL1:strp)

dmxStpPortPathCost port path cost: 1..65535(TL1: stpcost)

dmxStpPortHelloTime hello time (TL1: sthellotm)

dmxStpPortProtocolSpecifi-cation

spanning tree port mode:802.1D, 802.1W (TL1:stpmd)

dmxStpPortRole spanning tree port role:ROOT, DESG, and ALT(TL1: stprole)

Private VCG MIB module

1665 DMXplore supports a private VCG MIB module for VCG traps. This privateVCG MIB module applies to individual VCGs.

Table 5-21 Private VCG MIB module traps

Object Definition

dmxIncVcgFail Incoming VCG fail

dmxIncVcgFailClr Incoming VCG fail clear


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-72 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Private MIB module

1665 DMXplore supports a private MIB module for retrieving equipment informationparameters and equipment traps. This private MIB module applies to individual circuitpacks.

Table 5-22 Private MIB module parameters

Object Definition

dmxCardType Circuit pack type.

dmxCardAPP Circuit pack apparatus code

dmxCardSSN Circuit pack series number

dmxCardCLEI Common Language Equipment code

dmxCardECI Equipment Catalog Item code

dmxCardSLN Circuit pack serial number

dmxSftwVersion Version of the software currently stored inthe circuit pack

dmxCardEccMode Ethernet Cross-connect Mode. This modeonly pertains to the LNW71 Fast Ethernetcircuit pack. Values: STS1, STS3c

dmxCardVlanTagMode Virtual LAN tagging mode. Thisparameter is ONLY reported for slotscontaining an Ethernet circuit pack.Values: 802.1TAG (IEEE 802.1Q mode),TRANS (Transparent mode), NOTAG (NoTag mode)

Table 5-23 Private MIB module traps

Object Definition

dmxCpNotAllowed Circuit pack not allowed

dmxCpNotAllowedClr Circuit pack not allowed clear

dmxFACTERM Illegal circuit pack type

dmxFACTERMClr Illegal circuit pack type clear

dmxFETERM FE-LAN circuit pack failed

dmxFETERMClr FE-LAN circuit pack failed clear

dmxGETERM GE-LAN circuit pack failed

dmxGETERMClr GE-LAN circuit pack failed clear

dmxCpRemoved Circuit pack removed


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-73

Table 5-23 Private MIB module traps (continued)

Object Definition

dmxCpRemovedClr Circuit pack removed clear

dmxCpInserted Circuit pack inserted


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-74 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Provisioning

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section describes the many types of provisionable parameters for that are availablein 1665 DMXplore.

Definition

Provisioning is the modification of certain programmable parameters that define howthe node functions with various installed entities. Provisioning requests may alter autoprovisioned values of an entity that already exists. Parameter modifications may beinitiated locally or remotely with aWaveStar® CIT or an OS. Parameter modificationsmay be applied to the node via the intra-office local area network (IAO LAN), serialport, or any data communications channel (DCC). The provisioned data is maintainedin NVM and/or hardware registers. The provisionable parameters and values (currentand original) are maintained in the nonvolatile memory.

Contents

Default provisioning 5-76

Remote provisioning 5-77

Cross-connect provisioning 5-78

Automatic provisioning on circuit pack replacement 5-79

Port-state provisioning 5-81

Channel-state provisioning 5-82

Flow control (VLNC15/30 circuit packs) 5-83


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-75

Default provisioning...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section describes the many types of provisionable parameters available in 1665DMXplore.

1665 DMXplore allows the user to customize many system characteristics throughprovisioning features. Provisioning parameters are set by software controls.

Default values

Installation provisioning is minimized with thoughtfully-chosen default values set inthe factory. Every parameter has a factory default value. These factory defaults forsoftware parameters are maintained in the SYSCTL circuit pack, and a singlecommand is provided to restore all default values. All provisioning data is stored innonvolatile memory to prevent data loss during power failures and maintenanceoperations.

Default cross-connections

1665 DMXplore comes fully provisioned with a default set of cross-connections for1+1 applications. This provides the option of a very quick and simple installation andturn-up. In Release 2.1, 1665 DMXplore allows the user to disable all defaultcross-connections simultaneously, before turn-up.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-76 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Remote provisioning...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Remote provisioning

Software control allows remote provisioning of 1665 DMXplore NEs. This feature isprovided especially for provisioning parameters likely to change in service, in supportof centralized operations practices.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-77

Cross-connect provisioning...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cross-connect provisioning

1665 DMXplore can be provisioned for signal routing. Depending on the application,VT1.5 and STS-n signal cross-connections may be established to route traffic in aspecific manner. All cross-connections are bidirectional. Thus, each connection goesfrom HS to LS within the MAIN pack or from HS to HS in the case of pass-throughcross-connections.

VT1.5 and STS-n signals may be cross-connected in several ways. For bidirectionaldrop services, the cross-connection is used to connect a like signal in the high-speedMAIN slot to any available time slot in low-speed 10/100 Mbps, DS1 or DS3interfaces.

STS-n cross-connections to Ethernet interfaces are also available.

The bidirectional pass-through cross-connect is used to pass VT1.5 or STS-n signalsthrough the NE all on the same time slot in the Main circuit packs.

For simpler installation and turn-up 1665 DMXplore has been designed with a defaultset of cross connections. This allows for aplug and playoption when installing the1665 DMXplore. The default cross connections are supported and connected to 1+1protected high-speed interface.

Reference:

For more information on cross-connections, refer toChapter 6, “System planning andengineering”.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-78 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Automatic provisioning on circuit pack replacement...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Replacement of a failed circuit pack is simplified by automatic provisioning of the setcircuit pack values. The SYSCTL circuit pack maintains a provisioning map of theentire shelf, so when a transmission pack is replaced, the SYSCTL circuit packautomatically downloads the correct values (those that were previously provisioned) tothe new circuit pack. Likewise, if the SYSCTL circuit pack is ever replaced, thecorrect provisioning data from every other circuit pack in the shelf is automaticallyuploaded to the new SYSCTL circuit pack’s nonvolatile memory.

Auto provisioning

Auto provisioning is the ability of an NE to detect the presence of equipment, validateit, and then assign default original values. Nonvolatile memory (NVM) and/orhardware registers maintain the parameter values. Auto-provisioning allows an NE tobe set up initially with minimal user intervention. Auto-provisioning also supports aself inventory function which allows operations center personnel to learn about andtrack activities at a remotely located NE.

Automatic provisioning on circuit pack replacement

Replacement of a failed circuit pack is simplified by automatic provisioning of theoriginal circuit pack values. The SYSCTL circuit pack maintains a provisioning map ofthe entire shelf, so when a transmission circuit pack is replaced, the SYSCTL circuitpack automatically downloads the correct values to the new circuit pack. Likewise, ifthe SYSCTL circuit pack is ever replaced, the correct provisioning data from everyother circuit pack in the shelf is automatically uploaded to the new SYSCTL circuitpack’s nonvolatile memory. However, if a SYSCTL circuit pack is replaced, someuser-provisioned data is lost, unless the data is backed up before replacement.

Items auto provisioned

Some items that are auto-provisioned include the following:

• System target identifier (TID) (which can be changed at initial start-up)

• Default threshold-crossing alert (TCA) profiles

• Circuit packs

• Synchronization default mode

Equipment removal

The NE detects and reports the removal of equipment. The removal of equipment doesnot cause the NE to delete any entities. Removal of a piece of equipment may result inequipment alarms and insertion of maintenance signals when the state-related data is


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-79

updated. However, removal of equipment does not necessarily mean that theprovisioning of the shelf slot has changed. The user must execute specific commandsto remove an entity from the system database.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Automatic provisioning on circuit pack replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-80 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Port-state provisioning...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Port state provisioning is a feature provided on 1665 DMXplore NEs that can helpsuppress alarm reporting and performance monitoring by supporting multiple states forOCn, DS1, and DS3 ports.

When equipped with a VLNC2 and VLNC50, the port state provisioning feature isprovided on 1665 DMXplore NEs. This feature can help suppress alarm reporting andperformance monitoring by supporting multiple states for GigE, OCn, and DS1 ports.

The states supported are as follows:

• Automatic (AUTO)

• In-service (IS)

• Not monitored (NMON)

Port states

Ports without signals are in the automatic state until changed to the in-service statewhen a signal is present. Commands allow a user to retrieve and change the state of aport to the not-monitored state or from the not-monitored state to the automatic state.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-81

Channel-state provisioning...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Automatic channel state provisioning is a capability provided on 1665 DMXplore NEsthat suppresses reporting transient alarms and events during provisioning by supportingmultiple states (AUTO, IS, NMON) for VT1.5, STS-1, or STS-3c channels.

Automatic channel state provisioning

While an end-to-end circuit is being set up, particularly during VT1.5, STS-1, orSTS-3c-n cross-connect provisioning, several transient maintenance signals result.Without automatic channel state provisioning, these are reported as alarms and events.You can generally ignore these transient alarms, and initiate corrective action only ifthe alarms persist after the provisioning is completed. To avoid the confusion createdby this, 1665 DMXplore provides automatic channel state provisioning.

Channel states

A VT1.5, STS-1, or STS-3c channel is kept in the default automatic (AUTO) state or,for pass-through connections, the default not-monitored (NMON) state until thereception of a valid signal (a framed non-AIS, non-LOP, or non-UNEQ). A channelstate transition from the AUTO state is based on the absence of all monitored pathlevel defects in that channel. While in the AUTO state, no alarms or events arereported on the channel. On receiving a valid signal, the channel automatically changesto the in-service (IS) state, where it resumes normal alarm and event reporting. Anadditional state, not-monitored (NMON), is also supported in which alarm and eventreporting is suppressed regardless of the validity of the signal being received on thechannel. The user can submit commands to manually change a channel from IS orAUTO to NMON, and from NMON to AUTO. A user cannot manually change fromAUTO or NMON to IS. In a UPSR ring, the state will go from AUTO to IS as soon asa good signal is received on either side of the ring.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-82 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Flow control (VLNC15/30 circuit packs)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provisioning on VLNC15/30 circuit packs

The VLNC15/30 circuit pack automatically provides both local and end-to-end flowcontrol if flow control is enabled for a LAN port. Similarly, disabling flow control foran LAN port disables both forms of flow control.

Table 5-24 Flow control

LAN Port Flow ControlState

Flow Control Status Use/Comments

Disabled Disabled 1665 DMXplore does notparticipate in flow control.

The LAN port does notrespond to flow controlrequests.

The LAN port does notgenerate flow controlrequests due to congestion.

Flow control requests aretransported when received.

Enabled Enabled Flow control requirementsare sent to the far-end 1665DMXplore. LAN portsgenerate flow controlrequirements for fractionalservice.

Drop Drop Disables Network-elementcontrolled flow control anddrops end-to-end flowcontrol messages.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-83

Reports

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section describes the reports generated by 1665 DMXplore. It primarily containsinformation about SYSCTL-controlled circuit packs

Contents

Alarm report 5-85

Performance monitoring reports 5-86

State reports 5-87

Provisioning reports 5-88

Maintenance history reports 5-89

Version/equipment list 5-90


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-84 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Alarm report...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

The system provides an alarm report that lists all the active alarms and standingconditions, including a remote alarm status feature that summarizes alarms in otherNEs in an alarm group.

Report details

A description of the condition (for example, controller failure, incoming high-speedsignal failure, synchronization hardware, etc.) is included in the report along with atime stamp indicating when the condition was detected, its severity, and whether it isservice affecting or not. The option to display specified subsets of alarm conditions isprovided (for example, critical alarms only).

Status conditions include:

• Manually initiated abnormal conditions (for example, forced switch, loopbacks,system testing)

• Incoming AIS detected

A description of the status condition (for example, DS1 loopback active, DS3 facilityloopback active, and so on) is included in the report along with a time stamp indicatingwhen the condition began.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-85

Performance monitoring reports...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

TCA summary report

1665 DMXplore provides a report that lists the number of performance-monitoringparameters, related to SONET and DS1 operations, that have crossed their thresholds.This report provides a snapshot of the system performance level. If there is signaldegradation, it is quickly pinpointed so that corrective action may be taken beforecustomers are affected, thus supporting proactive maintenance.

This report provides separate parameter summaries for each signal level in the system,including SONET section, line, and path, DS1 line and path, as well asdropped/incoming/outgoing Ethernet bytes and frames. The parameter summaries showthe user which performance status to request if they want further information.

Performance status reports

These reports provide detailed information on the current and previous 8 hours inquarter-hour (15-minute) increments, as well as the current and previous day’sperformance. Threshold crossing alerts are clearly identified and the time theperformance registers were last initialized is also shown. Any registers that may havebeen affected by this initialization are marked. There are separate reports for section,line, and path parameters, as well as Ethernet parameters.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-86 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

State reports...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The state report shows the protection state of all SYSCTL-controlled circuit packsinstalled in the system and the state of the individual low-speed and high-speedchannels.

Interface states

For 1+1 protected OC-n lines, the interface state is reported as active or standby.

Circuit pack states

The circuit pack state is reported as active or standby.

Path states

The state of the individual VT1.5 /STS-n channels and paths may be one of thefollowing:

• not monitored (NMON)

• in service (IS)

• auto (AUTO).

The system reports this information on all interfaces. While in AUTO state, no alarmsor events are reported on the channel. On receiving a valid signal, the channelautomatically changes to the in-service (IS) state, where it resumes normal alarm andevent reporting. An additional state, not-monitored (NMON), is also supported inwhich alarm and event reporting is suppressed regardless of the validity of the signalbeing received on the channel. For VT1.5/STS-n channels and paths, the AUTO statewill transition to the IS state if a good signal is detected.

Port states

The state of individual ports may be NMON, IS, or AUTO.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-87

Provisioning reports...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore provides a variety of provisioning reports that contain the currentvalues of all electronically-provisionable parameters and hardware-selectableparameters. For more information on the provisioning reports generated, refer to theMetropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer User Operations Guide, 365-372-332.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-88 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Maintenance history reports...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

A maintenance history report contains the following past conditions:

• Alarms

• Status

• Protection switching

• User interface commands (for example, provisioning, loopback request, manualprotection, and so on.)

Summary

The maintenance history report contains time stamps indicating when each conditionwas detected and when it cleared, as well as when the command was entered. Anysystem controller reset clears all records in the log.

Reference:

Refer toMetropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer User Operations Guide,365-372-332, for details on the history log.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-89

Version/equipment list...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore provides a full inventory report on all hardware and softwarecurrently installed in the system.

Information provided

The version/equipment list provides the following information:

• Circuit pack name

• Slot/Socket ID

• 10-characterCLEI code

• 6-digit equipment catalog item (ECI)

• 7-character apparatus code

• 6-character series number

• 12-character serial number (includes date and location of manufacture)

• 6-digit program version (software generic) code

• Program version for dormant area.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-90 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Administration

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section provides information on system administration.

Contents

Software upgrades 5-92

IP Access for network management 5-93

Time and date synchronization 5-98

Office alarms interface 5-100

Remote NE status 5-101

SONET Network size 5-104

Directory services 5-105

Security 5-108

Password administration (CIT and system) 5-110



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-91

Software upgrades...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore provides an in-service software installation capability to update thegeneric program in local and remote systems. Upgrades are distributed on CD-ROMscontaining the new software and an installation program. These software upgrades arethe primary mechanism to add new feature enhancements to the in-service 1665DMXplore network. All software upgrades are in-service and do not affect anyprovisionable parameters. For example, cross-connections are left unchanged by thesoftware upgrade.

In the 1665 DMXplore system, software download takes place in two stages. In thefirst stage, the new generic software is downloaded into a dormant flash area as acompressed file. In the second stage, the new generic is decompressed and moved intoan active flash space. During this process, the old release continues to run fromrandom access memory (RAM). Installation is not service-affecting, so down time islimited to the reboot time.

Local installation procedure

The procedure is straightforward. You connect a personal computer (PC) to the RS-232front serial port on the local 1665 DMXplore, start the installation program, and areprompted with a few warnings before the upgrade installation actually begins. Afteryou confirm that it is alright to proceed, the PC takes over the process and completesthe installation.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-92 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

IP Access for network management...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

For network management purposes, the 1665 DMXplore supports the following typesof IP Access:

• 1665 DMXplore can serve as a TL1 Translation Device (T-TD) by acting as agateway network element that allows Lucent OMS and/orWaveStar® CIT tocommunicate to other network elements (NEs) through an IP access network. Thiscapability allows you to send TL1 commands from Lucent OMS orWaveStar® CITlocated on a TCP/IP based network to various NEs connected on an OSI network.

• 1665 DMXplore can functionally encapsulate IP packets within OSI packets to betransmitted through the OSI network to the proper NE. Thus 1665 DMXploresupports IP based protocols such as FTP by providing end-to-end IP connectivitybetween OS and NE. This capability is called IP tunneling. IP tunneling is requiredto support remote database backup/restore in between 1665 DMXplore systems.

• With a SYSCTL and VLNC50 installed, 1665 DMXplore can also serve as a FileTransfer Translation Device (FTTD) by acting as an FTAM-FTP gateway networkelement. The FTAM-FTP gateway network element translates FTAM over OSIpresentation to FTP over TCP/IP. The FTAM-FTP gateway supports softwaredownloads, database backups, and database restores.

• 1665 DMXplore supports Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) for datanetwork applications once Ethernet service becomes available. 1665 DMXploreprovides limited support for certain reports and traps (alarms and eventsautonomous messages).

• 1665 DMXplore also supports Network Time Protocol (NTP) using IP tunneling tosynchronize the time and date to a standard time reference.

TL1 translation

1665 DMXplore can copy the application information within an IP packet into an OSIpacket. This translation is performed at the application layer. When acting as a TL1translation device, 1665 DMXplore system must be provisioned with a list of possibleOSs. If an OS is not on the list residing within the system, a connection from that OSwill not be accepted. When 1665 DMXplore is used as a TL1 translation device it isreferred to as the T-TD GNE (Gateway Network Element).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-93

An IP fringe application, where an IP based OS located in the IP access DCN managesan IP managed NE (non 1665 DMXplore) on the fringe of 1665 DMXplore OSI-basedembedded DCN. The IP application initiated at the OS terminates at the IP managedNE. Note that if the IP managed NE is not directly connected to the 1665 DMXploreremote NE via the

LAN, but can be reached via additional routers, some static routes have to beprovisioned manually on the routers.

Figure 5-10 TL1 translation device

OC-3/12

IP to OSITranslation

OSI

OSI

OSI

OSI

TCP/IPTL1

TCP/IPTL1

TCP/IPTL1

TCP/IPWAN

1665DMXploreT-TD GNE

OpticalEMS

1665 DMXplore = 1665 Data Multiplexer ExploreCIT = WaveStar CIT

fi

CompatibleNE

1665DMXplore

CIT

CompatibleNE

1665DMXplore

CompatibleNE

1665DMXplore

Xplore-020

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning IP Access for network management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-94 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Encapsulating IP packets

The 1665 DMXplore GNE acts as the tunnel entrance, i.e., the interface between IPand CLNP. When an IP packet is received from the LAN interface of the GNE, if it isnot destined for the GNE, the received IP packet is encapsulated into CLNP PDU(s) assimple CLNP user data, loosing any IP protocol meanings (such as IP addressing andlife time), as shown in the following figure.

For the CLNP PDU that contains the encapsulated IP packet, the CLNP source addressis the NSAP of the NE where the IP packet is encapsulated (tunnel entrance), and theCLNP destination address is the NSAP of the NE where the IP packet will bede-capsulated (tunnel exit). The CLNP PDU then is routed via the ISO-10589″IS to ISintra-domain information exchange protocol (IS-IS)″ within the embedded OSI DCN.Therefore, the IP tunneling over CLNP is transparent for the IP world. The CLNPworld is only used to carry the IP traffic and there is no possible connections betweenthe OSI applications and the IP applications. The IP tunnel serves as a normalpoint-to-point link for the IP traffic between two NSAP entities (the tunnel entranceand tunnel exit). Note that because the IP traffic flows in both directions between twoNSAP entities, the tunnel entrance entity also serves as the tunnel exit entity, and viceversa.

In the tunnel entrance, the way to associate an IP destination address in the IP packetwith an OSI NSAP address (the NSAP of tunnel exit entity) can be derived by thestatic user provisioned information or by the automatic distributed tunnel routinginformation, called Tunnel Auto Provisioning (TAP).

Tunnel Auto Provisioning (TAP)

In the OSI networks, the network elements use the ISO-10589″IS to IS intra-domaininformation exchange protocol (IS-IS)″ to exchange the topology information. Theknowledge by every network element of the whole network topology at a given timeallows the computation of the optimal route to any possible destination on the network.The IS-IS protocol provides for the inclusion of optional variable length fields in allIS-IS packets. This allows additional IP specific information to be added to the OSIIS-IS routing packets.

Figure 5-11 Encapsulated IP packets

IP Header User Data

User Data

User Data

User Data

IP Header

IP Header

IP Header

CLNP Header

CLNP Header

CLNP Header

IP Packet

Encapsulated

Encapsulated

and

(if necessary)

Segmented


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-95

The topological information between network elements (or called intermediate systems)is communicated by sending a specific IS-IS PDU called LSP (Link-State PDU). In theLSP optional fields, the NEs send (advertise) information about the IP sub-nets that canbe reached via that NE. By default, this will be locally attached subnet, but othersub-nets can also be provisioned for the advertisement.

The advertising of IP information using the LSP options can be enabled or disabled viathe user interfaces. Based on the specification of the IS-IS protocol, any intermediatesystems that could not recognize the encoded optional fields shall just ignore and passthrough these fields unchanged. This makes it possible for NEs that advertise both OSIand IP routing information work with NEs that advertise OSI routing information only.

With automatic distribution of IP routing information via IS-IS LSP, a NE, whichlearned such information, then can associate an IP destination address of an IP packetwith an OSI NSAP address, and uses this NSAP address as the destination address ofCLNP PDU(s) which encapsulates the IP packet.

FTAM-FTP gateway network element

1665 DMXplore can serve as a File Transfer Translation Device (FTTD) by acting asan FTAM-FTP gateway network element. The FTAM-FTP gateway network elementtranslates FTAM over OSI presentation to FTP over TCP/IP. The FTAM-FTP gatewaysupports software downloads, database backups, and database restores.

The following figure shows a 1665 DMXplore provisioned as an FTAM-FTP gatewaynetwork element. The FTAM-FTP gateway network element allows remote 1665DMXplore network elements to request software downloads and database restores froman FTP server. The FTAM-FTP gateway network element also allows remote 1665DMXplore network elements to backup databases to an FTP server.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-96 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Figure 5-12 FTAM-FTP gateway

OC-3/12UPSR

Xplore-046

OSI

OSI

OSI

OSI

TCP/IP

TCP/IP

TCP/IPWAN

1665DMXplore

FTAM-FTPGateWay


FTPServer

CompatibleNE

1665DMXplore

or

CompatibleNE

1665DMXplore

or

CompatibleNE

1665DMXplore

or


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-97

Time and date synchronization...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore can synchronize the time and date among all NEs in a network tohelp correlate events reported by different NEs.

The time and date is synchronized:

• Manually using theWaveStar® CIT Administration → Set Date and Timecommand.

• Automatically from another NE via the DCC.

• Automatically by the OS

Provisioning

In a new installation, it is recommended that the time and date be manuallyprovisioned in at least the first 1665 DMXplore in each ring. Each subsequent 1665DMXplore that is added to the network tries to learn the current time and date fromone of the existing NEs automatically.

After start-up (or any subsequent controller resets), the 1665 DMXplore’s time anddate revert back to the last time and date before the reset. 1665 DMXplore waits 5minutes, in case other NEs are also resetting (for example, as part of a softwareupgrade of the network), before starting to check with other NEs for the current timeand date. If necessary, the 1665 DMXplore checks with all remote NEs for the currenttime and date.

The 1665 DMXplores allow up to 2 minutes for each remote NE to respond beforechecking with the next remote NE for the current time and date, and keep checkinguntil a valid current time and date is found.

1665 DMXplore accepts a provisioned time and date value or any remote NE date laterthan00-01-01 as a valid current time and date.

Network Time Protocol (NTP)

Network Time Protocol (NTP) assures accurate synchronization of the 1665 DMXplorewith reference to radio and/or atomic clocks located on the Internet.

Considerations

The automatic time and date synchronization is intended to achieve time and datesynchronization among compatible NEs with DCC connectivity in a network, but suchsynchronization can not be guaranteed at start-up for all network configurations or overthe course of time.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-98 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

TL1 command responses and autonomous messages include 1665 DMXplore’s currenttime and date.

Time and date synchronization compatibility

1665 DMXplore supports time and date synchronization with the following products:

• 1665 DMXplore

• 1665 DMX

• 1665 DMXtend

• 1850 TSS-5

• DDM-2000 OC-3

• DDM-2000 OC-12

• FiberReach

• FT-2000 ADR

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Time and date synchronization

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-99

Office alarms interface...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description

The office alarms interface is a set of discrete relays controlling audible and visibleoffice alarms. CR (critical) and MJ (major) alarm conditions are reported through onepair of relays. MN (minor) alarm conditions are reported through another pair ofrelays.

Steady state current

The steady state current for office alarm connections must not exceed 1.0 Amp at 60Volts or 1.8 Amps at 30 Volts. The maximum transient currents (20 msec duration)during initial contact closure must not exceed 9 Amps at 60 Volts or 18 Amps at 30Volts.

Provisionable alarm delay and alarm clear delay

1665 DMXplore provides provisionable incoming signal alarm delay and alarm cleardelay. The alarm clear delay only applies to equipment alarms. It does not apply tosignal failures. The office alarms are not activated unless an incoming signal conditionof greater duration than the alarm delay occurs. When a failure clears, a provisionablealarm clear delay prevents premature clearing of the alarm.

Multiple alarms

When multiple alarm conditions occur, the highest-level office alarm (audible andvisible) is activated. When the highest-level alarm condition clears, the office alarmbumps down to the next highest level alarm condition.

If enabled, the Remote NE Status feature includes alarms at other NEs in the samealarm group as the local NE to determine when to activate the local office alarm andthe appropriate alarm level.

Alarm cut-off

The audible office alarms are silenced through activation of the alarm cut-off (ACO)function. Visible alarms are not extinguished by the ACO function.

If the ACO function has been activated to silence the active audible alarm and a bumpdown occurs, the audible alarm remains silent (that is, the lower level visible alarm isactivated, but the corresponding audible alarm is not reactivated). If another alarmingcondition occurs while the ACO is active, the audible alarm is activated even if thenew condition is a lower level. For example, if a major (MJ) alarm was active andsilenced using the ACO function and a minor (MN) alarming condition occurs, theaudible alarm will sound.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-100 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Remote NE status...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

If enabled, the Remote NE Status feature reflects the summary alarm/status level forboth the local and remote NEs in the same alarm group as the local NE with thefollowing local indications.

Office alarms

The local office visual alarm always shows the highest alarm level. The local officeaudible alarm is activated in response to each new alarm occurrence among the localand remote NEs. This alerts on-site craft of problems in the network with and givesthem an indication of the severity.

SYSCTL faceplate LEDs

The CR, MJ, or MN LED on the local SYSCTL circuit pack faceplate shows thehighest alarm level among the local and remote NEs. The FE LED on the localSYSCTL circuit pack faceplate is illuminated if any remote NE has an active alarm,abnormal status (indicated by the ABN LED), or activity status condition, thusidentifying the local NE to query further. (Although not dependent on the Remote NEStatus feature, the Near-End LED on the local SYSCTL circuit pack faceplate is onlyilluminated if the local NE itself has an active alarm, abnormal status, or activity statuscondition.)

Remote NE status and alarm/status retrieval

The local NE can retrieve the highest alarm/status level of each NE in a network withan active alarm, abnormal status, or activity status condition, thus identifying theremote NE to further query.

Determination of the highest alarm/status level of each NE includes the alarm/statuslevel of active miscellaneous discrete alarm/status inputs.

The Remote NE Status feature can be used to expedite maintenance activities for NEsthat report TL1 autonomous alarm/status messages to a maintenance OS at anoperations center.

The Remote NE Status feature may be enabled or disabled. By default, the Remote NEStatus feature is disabled.

Alarm group

By default, all 1665 DMXplore systems are assigned to alarm group 255. This istypically sufficient for small networks of up to 50 nodes. All NEs with DCCconnectivity that have the same alarm group number are members of the same alarm


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-101

group. All alarm group members share summary alarm/status information with eachother but not with NEs in different alarm groups. To take advantage of the remoteactivation of local office alarms, in particular, at least one member of the alarm groupshould be located in a central office.

In large networks, with IS-IS Level 2 Routing and multiple Level 1 areas, each alarmgroupmustbe confined to within a single Level 1 area only. For example, a networkwith three different Level 1 areas would require a minimum of three alarm groups, thatis, one alarm group for each Level 1 area. If desired, multiple alarm groups can bedefined within a Level 1 area, also. The maximum number of NEs in an alarm group islimited by the maximum number of nodes in a Level 1 area.

Alarm Gateway NE (AGNE)

By default, no NE is enabled as an AGNE. Even if the default alarm group number forall NEs is used, at least one NE in each alarm group must be enabled as an AGNE.Any NE in an alarm group can be enabled as an AGNE, for example, an AGNE doesnot need to be located in a central office, in fact, it is recommended that an AGNEshould not also be a TL1 TCP/IP GNE, TL1 GNE, or IS-IS Level 2 Router.

A second NE in each alarm group may be enabled as a backup AGNE, if required. It isrecommended that the maximum number of AGNEs per alarm group be limited to atmost two to assure good performance.

Instead of having every NE exchange alarm/status information with every other NE inthe same alarm group directly, only the AGNE receives alarm/status information fromevery NE directly, and the AGNE distributes the accumulated alarm/status informationfor all the NEs to every NE in the alarm group.

Provisioning sequence

If there is no AGNE, each NE in an alarm group reports anAGNE Communications Failure alarm; therefore, the following provisioning sequenceis recommended:

1. Provision one or two (at most) NEs as the AGNE

• Enable the Remote NE Status parameter

• Enable the network element as an Alarm Gateway

• Provision the alarm group number, if different than the default.

2. Provision the other NEs in the same alarm group

• Enable the Remote NE Status parameter

• Provision the alarm group number, if different than the default.

For more information about theAdministration → Set NE command, refer to theWaveStar® CIT help.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Remote NE status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-102 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Remote NE status compatibility

1665 DMXplore supports remote NE status compatibility with the following products

• 1665 DMXplore

• 1665 DMX

• 1665 DMXtend

• 1850 TSS-5 (equipped with VLNC2 and SYSCTL-supported packs)

• DDM-2000 OC-3

• DDM-2000 OC-12

• FiberReach

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Remote NE status

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-103

SONET Network size...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

There is no inherent limit to the total number of NEs in a SONET transmissionnetwork, but there is a limit to the number of nodes that can be part of the same OSIdomain, that is, with OSI LAN and/or DCC connectivity for operationscommunications among the NEs.

Maximum number of OSI nodes

A maximum of 250 OSI nodes is supported, unless IS-IS Level 2 Routing is used.With Level 2 Routing enabled, a maximum of 1000 OSI nodes are supported in adomain of up to 50 Level 1 areas. Each 1665 DMXplore counts as one OSI node.

To simplify administration and minimize provisioning, the number of nodes included inthe same OSI domain should be limited to no more than 1000, whenever practical, bydisabling all OSI LAN and DCC between some logical groupings of NEs.

IS-IS level 2 routing

IS-IS Level 2 Routing involves the assignment of NEs to multiple areas of less than250 nodes each. Level 2 routers support OSI communications between the NEs indifferent areas. Both the assignment of NEs to areas and the enabling of NEs as Level2 routers is accomplished by provisioning.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-104 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Directory services...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

What are directory services?

OS andWaveStar® CIT users access remote 1665 DMXplores using the remote 1665DMXplore Target Identifier (TID, name). However, remote 1665 DMXplores areaddressed on the DCC using Network Service Access Point Address (NSAP).Therefore, a method to provide TID-to-NSAP (name-to-address) and NSAP-to-TID(address-to-name) translations is necessary. Target Identifier Address ResolutionProtocol (TARP) provides this capability.

For SONET NEs that support TCP/IP and TL1 OS interfaces, TARP is the de-factodirectory services standard to support multi-vendor OI compatibility. TARP is specifiedin Telcordia GR-253-CORE, SONET Transport Systems: Common Criteria.

TID provisioning

Each NE in a network must be provisioned with a unique TID. The 1665 DMXplore’sdefault TID is″LT-DMXPLORE″. The terms TID and source identifier (SID) aregenerally used interchangeably.

Important! Some vendor NEs require that all TIDs start with an alphabeticcharacter, or that each TID consist of specified minimum number of characters.

To be compatible withWaveStar® products, 1665 DMXplore TIDs shouldnotinclude special characters″%″ and″#″. 1665 DMXplore TID provisioning allowsspecial characters, but T1.245 SONET Directory Services (SDS) does not supportspecial characters.

NSAP provisioning

By default, each 1665 DMXplore has a unique Network Service Access Point (NSAP)address, thus no NSAP provisioning is necessary in small networks. If the network sizeexceeds 50 OSI nodes, NSAP provisioning is required.

TARP provisioning

Although TARP functions automatically without any user provisioning, using standarddefault values, 1665 DMXplore allows provisioning of the following TARP parameters.All TARP parameters are provisionable:

• Lifetime

• Manual Adjacency

• Timers

• Loop Detection Buffer (LDB) Flush Timer


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-105

• TARP Data Cache (TDC) Enable/Disable

• TDC TID-NSAP Entries.

It is recommended that the TARP default values always be used.

TARP TID-to-NSAP translations

The three operations that depend on TARP TID-to-NSAP translations are:

1. TL1 OS access

2. WaveStar® CIT access

3. Remote (Software) Install Program/Copy Program.

When a TL1 TCP/IP or TL1 Gateway Network Element (GNE) receives a TL1 loginrequest for a TL1-RNE, the TL1 login request includes the TL1-RNE’s TID. TheTL1-GNE relies on TARP to determine the TL1-RNE’s NSAP. The TL1-GNE needsthe NSAP to establish an OSI association with the TL1-RNE. The TL1 login request isforwarded to the TL1-RNE over that OSI association.

The local 1665 DMXplore serves as a TL1-GNE and uses TARP as described abovefor WaveStar® CIT access via 1665 DMXplore’s serial ports or TCP/IP. Whenaccessing 1665 DMXplore via OSI LAN, theWaveStar® CIT (or OS) performs theTL1-GNE function and uses TARP in a similar manner, also. The local 1665DMXplore uses TARP as described above to support remote Install Program/CopyProgram.

TARP propagation

The first time a TL1-GNE (or local 1665 DMXplore) requires a TARP TID-to-NSAPtranslation for each remote NE, the TL1-GNE originates a TARP query. The TARPquery is propagated to all NEs in the same OSI routing area, and if no response isreceived from within the area, up to two additional TARP queries are propagatedthroughout the OSI domain. Each NE forwards the TARP queries to each of itsneighboring OSI nodes (that is, adjacencies), except the neighbor from which theTARP query was received.

When the TARP query reaches the remote NE with the requested TID, that remote NEresponds to the originating NE with the remote NE’s NSAP address. If there is noresponse to any of the TARP queries for a TID, after the third query times out, an errorresponse (for example,TL1- GNE unknown TID or TID not found) is returned to theoriginating NE.

TARP NSAP-to-TID translations

When a 1665 DMXplore is commanded to perform this translation, it knows theNSAPs of the remote NEs to be included in the responses but relies on TARP todetermine the corresponding TIDs.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Directory services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-106 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

To ensure that the responses to these commands always include the most up-to-datenetwork information, real-time TARP queries are originated instead of relying on theTARP Data Cache or TDC (although the TDC is updated, as appropriate, based on theresponses to these NSAP-to-TID queries).

Because the NSAPs are known, these TARP queries are addressed directly to eachremote NE (TARP propagation is not necessary). Each remote NE responds to theoriginating NE with the remote NE’s TID.

TARP data cache

In order to reduce the frequency of TARP propagation, and to improve the performanceof the affected operations, 1665 DMXplore supports a TDC option. By default, theTDC is enabled.

Each 1665 DMXplore maintains its own TDC, independently. The TDC consists ofTID-NSAP translations. Each 1665 DMXplore automatically updates its own TDCbased on the responses to previous TARP queries. The TDC may also be updated uponreceipt of an unsolicited, automatic notification from another NE in the same OSIdomain of a TID or NSAP change.

1665 DMXplore checks its TDC to see if it already has a required TID-to-NSAPtranslation before originating a TARP query. If a translation is not found in the TDC,the response to that TARP query is used to update the originating 1665 DMXplore’sTDC. 1665 DMXplore assures that its TDC maintains only one TID-NSAP translationfor each unique TID. 1665 DMXplore supports TDC sizes of up to 110 TID-NSAPtranslations. If the TDC is disabled or 1665 DMXplore’s system controller is reset, thecontents of the TDC are deleted.

TDC accuracy

In the unlikely event that a TDC includes an inaccurate TID-to-NSAP translation, 1665DMXplore confirms that both the NSAP and TID of the remote 1665 DMXplore arecorrect before a remote operation proceeds. If there is a mismatch, an error response(for example,TL1-RNE unknown TID, Inconsistent TID, orAssociation Setup Failure) is returned to the originating NE.

To correct such a situation, delete the subject TID (L4tdctid) from the TDC, thenre-request the remote operation for the subject TID. The subsequent TARP queryresults in an accurate TID-to-NSAP translation, and the TDC is updated accordingly. Abroader solution is to disable and re-enable the TDC in which caseall TDC entries aredeleted.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Directory services

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-107

Security...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Capabilities

1665 DMXplore provides security capabilities to protect against unauthorized access tothe system.

User types

Four types of users (with tiered restriction levels) are allowed access to the systemwith a valid user ID and password:

• Privileged users can execute all commandsA privileged user has access to all the system functional capabilities. Only theprivileged users have access to the security and access functions. These functionsinclude assigning/changing user ID/passwords for other users, setting targetidentifier (TID) names, resetting the system, and system initialization functions.A privileged user can terminate the login session of other individual users(including other privileged users) or terminate all login sessions of non-privilegedusers.

• General users have access to all the system functional capabilities except security,access, system initialization and software installation functions.

• Maintenance users can only execute commands that access the system, extractreports and execute maintenance functions through a specific set of commands. Noprivileged commands may be executed by maintenance users.

• Reports-only users can only execute commands that retrieve reports from thesystem.

Security can be set to a lockout state, which blocks non-privileged users from loggingin to the system.

System initialization

When the system is first initialized, three privileged default user IDs and passwords areprovided. Up to 147 user IDs and passwords can be added, deleted, and/or changed byany of the privileged users. Timeouts are provisionable on a per-user basis.

User IDs and passwords

The WaveStar® CIT always asks the user for the NE user ID and password with thefirst NE connection. The user ID and password can be saved for subsequentconnections, but the user ID and password can not be saved past the currentWaveStar® CIT session. User ID and password parameters must be administered on aper-NE basis. You may have a different user ID and/or password on one NE than youhave on other NEs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-108 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Each time the number of invalid sequential login attempts reach or exceed theprovisionable user ID lockout threshold, the network element reports a Security Alertalarm.

Inactivity timeout period

The inactivity timeout period is the number of minutes after which a user with aninactive session is logged out. A provisionable inactivity timeout period is supported ona per-user basis.

Password aging

The password aging interval is the number of days allowed before a user’s passwordexpires. When a user’s password expires, the user is prompted to select a newpassword prior to login. The values for the password aging interval are zero (0) or arange from 7 to 999 days. A value of zero (0) disables password aging. The defaultvalue is 0. Password aging does not apply to privileged users’ passwords.

WaveStar ® CIT default user IDs and passwords

The two default Privileged user IDs and passwords initially installed in theWaveStar®

CIT are LUC01 and LUC02 (LUC-zero-one, and LUC-zero-two). Their associatedpasswords are LUC+01, LUC+02, (LUC-plus sign-zero-one, LUC-plus sign-zero-two),respectively.

NE default user IDs and passwords

The three default Privileged user IDs and passwords initially installed in the NE areLUC01, LUC02, or LUC03 (LUC-zero-one, LUC-zero-two, and LUC-zero-three). Thedefault password is DMXPLR2.5G.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Security

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-109

Password administration (CIT and system)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

System administration includes performing the following:

• Changing passwords

• Changing notifications

• Performing security administration

• Viewing NE administration

• Setting TIDs

• Setting NE defaults

• Performing a LAN reset

• Provisioning data communications

• Viewing OSI routing map

WaveStar ® CIT user ID/password administration

The Administration → Security → User Provisioning command on theWaveStar®

CIT View menu allows a privileged user to create, change, or delete another user ID orpassword.

Important! Any changes made to a user’s provisioning takes place the next timethe user logs in. If the user is currently logged in, no changes take place until thatuser logs off and logs back in.

Valid WaveStar ® CIT user IDs

A valid WaveStar® CIT user ID must be a minimum of one character to a maximum often characters (no character restrictions).

Valid WaveStar ® CIT passwords

A valid WaveStar® CIT password must comply with the following:

• Length must be a minimum of six characters to a maximum of ten characters

• Must begin with a letter

• Must contain at least three non-alphabetic characters (symbol or number)

• At least one of the non-alphabetic characters must be a symbol

• When changing a password, the new password must be different than the previouspassword by at least one character.

Important! User passwords are case-sensitive.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-110 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Characters NOT allowed in a WaveStar ® CIT password

Table 5-25, “Characters NOT allowed in aWaveStar® CIT password” (p. 5-111)liststhe characters that are not allowed in aWaveStar® CIT password.

Table 5-25 Characters NOT allowed in a WaveStar ® CIT password

Character Description Character Description

Space ″ Quotation mark

@ Commercial at & Ampersand

, Comma ; Semicolon

: Colon _ horizontal bar(underscore)

= Equals sign ? Question mark

Characters allowed in a WaveStar ® CIT password

Table 5-26, “Characters allowed in aWaveStar® CIT password” (p. 5-111)lists thecharacters that are allowed in aWaveStar® CIT password.

Table 5-26 Characters allowed in a WaveStar ® CIT password


A... Z Uppercase letters * Asterisk

a... z Lowercase letters [ Left square bracket

0... 9 Digits ] Right squarebracket

’ Apostrophe ^ Caret

- Hyphen ′ Grave accent

( Left parenthesis { Left curly brace

) Right parenthesis } Right curly brace

. Period (full stop) | Vertical bar

/ Slash (Solidus) < Less than

+ Plus sign > Greater than

! Exclamation mark ~ Tilde

% Percent sign # Number sign

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning Password administration (CIT and system)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-111

Changing your own WaveStar ® CIT password

The WaveStar® CIT Administration → Change Password command allows any userto change his or her ownWaveStar® CIT password. Only privileged users can changeanother user’s ID or password.

The Change Password screen is also automatically invoked immediately after the loginscreen if a user’s password has expired. The user is prevented from performing anyother function until the password is successfully changed. This screen is also invokedthe first time a login is attempted for a new user ID.

1665 DMXplore user ID/password administration

The Administration → Security → User Provisioning command on the networkelement System View menu allows a privileged user to create, change, or deleteanother network element user ID or password.

Important! Any changes made to a user’s provisioning takes place the next timethe user logs in. If the user is currently logged in, no changes take place until thatuser logs off and logs back in.

Valid 1665 DMXplore user IDs

A valid user ID must be a minimum of five allowed characters to a maximum of tenallowed characters.

Valid 1665 DMXplore passwords

A valid password must comply with the following conditions:

• Length must be a minimum of six characters to a maximum of ten characters

• Must contain at least one alphabetic character and at least three non-alphabeticcharacters (symbol or number)

• At least one of the non-alphabetic characters must be number and at least one mustbe a symbol

• When changing a password, the new password must be different than the previouspassword by at least one character.

Important! User passwords are case-sensitive.

Characters NOT allowed in a 1665 DMXplore password and user ID

Table 5-27, “Characters NOT allowed in a 1665 DMXplore password and User ID”(p. 5-112)lists the characters that are not allowed in a password and user ID.

Table 5-27 Characters NOT allowed in a 1665 DMXplore password and User ID


Space ″ Quotation mark

@ Commercial at ; Semicolon


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-112 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Table 5-27 Characters NOT allowed in a 1665 DMXplore password and UserID (continued)


, Comma * Asterisk

: Colon ! Exclamation Mark

= Equals sign ? Question mark

\ Back slash

Characters allowed in a 1665 DMXplore password and user ID

Table 5-28, “Characters allowed in a 1665 DMXplore password and User ID”(p. 5-113)lists the characters that are allowed in a password and user ID.

Table 5-28 Characters allowed in a 1665 DMXplore password and User ID


A... Z Uppercase letters ^ Caret

a... z Lowercase letters ′ Grave accent

0... 9 Digits { Left curly brace

’ Apostrophe } Right curly brace

- Hyphen | Vertical bar

( Left parenthesis < Less than

) Right parenthesis > Greater than

. Period (full stop) ~ Tilde

/ Slash (Solidus) % Percent sign

+ Plus sign # Number sign

[ Left square bracket & Ampersand

] Right squarebracket

_ Horizontal bar(underscore)

Changing your own password

From the network element System View, theAdministration → Change Passwordcommand allows any user to change his or her own password. Only privileged userscan change another user’s ID or password.

When a user changes their own password, the new password must be different in atleast three character positions from the current password.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-113

The original password, or a significant substring of it, must not be part of the newpassword.

• If the current and new passwords are the same length, then the characters in at least3 character positions must be different.

• If the current and new passwords are different lengths, then for every possiblecontiguous substring of the length of the shorter password within the longerpassword, the characters in at least three character positions must be differentbetween the shorter password and the character substring within the longerpassword.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-114 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

User-defined miscellaneous discrete interface...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

This section describes the miscellaneous discrete environmental alarm/status inputpoints and (external) control output points.

Description

The user-defined miscellaneous discrete interface allows users to monitor and controlequipment collocated with 1665 DMXplore through a set of discrete input and outputpoints. There are 4 miscellaneous discrete inputs to monitor environmental conditionssuch as open doors or high temperature, and 4 miscellaneous discrete outputs to controlequipment such as fans and generators.

Local miscellaneous discrete input points are included in the determination of thesummary alarm/status level for each NE. But even if the Remote NE Status feature isenabled, the alarm/status ofindividual miscellaneous discrete inputs/outputs is notexchanged among NEs.

Miscellaneous discrete input alarm level

The alarm level to be associated with each miscellaneous discrete input point isprovisionable. By default, each miscellaneous discrete input is a minor alarm.

If a miscellaneous discrete input point is provisioned as an alarm (minor, major, orcritical), TL1 autonomous messageREPT ALM ENV is used to report the alarmoccurrence. This identifies the remote NE to further query.

If a miscellaneous discrete input point is provisioned as not alarmed (that is, status),TL1 autonomous messageREPT EVT COM is used to report the condition. Thisidentifies the need to retrieve any active miscellaneous discrete status conditions.

Miscellaneous discrete input description

The description to be associated with each miscellaneous discrete input alarm or statuspoint may be provisioned. The provisioned description appears as the almmsg orconddescr parameter value in applicable TL1 messages. The default description foreach miscellaneous discrete input point is environment1, environment2, and so forth.

Miscellaneous discrete output description

The description to be associated with each miscellaneous discrete output control pointmay be provisioned. The default description for each miscellaneous discrete outputpoint is control1, control2, and so forth. Control points for miscellaneous discreteoutputs may be operated and then released.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

5-115

Reference:

For information about theConfiguration → Misc. Discretes command, refer to theWaveStar® CIT help. For detailed wiring information, refer to theMetropolis®

DMXplore Access Multiplexer Installation Manual, 365-372-334.

Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning User-defined miscellaneous discrete interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-116 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6 6System planning andengineering

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section summarizes basic system planning and engineering information to planprocurement and deployment of 1665 DMXplore. There are a number of considerationsthat should be kept in mind when planning the 1665 DMXplore’s role in the network.Projected customer requirements will determine initial capacity needed, as well asevolution to higher capacities. The advanced networking capabilities of the 1665DMXplore offer many economic and planning benefits, and certain guidelines shouldbe followed to maximize these benefits. Physical installation considerations will beguided by the installation location (central office, uncontrolled, or customer locations).Initial network configuration will determine synchronization requirements.Synchronization should be planned on a network basis considering items like topology,reliability, internetwork connectivity, and service evolution.

Contents

Physical arrangements 6-3

Shelf configurations 6-4

Physical shelf specifications 6-7

Cabinet installation 6-9

Installation cabling 6-12

Environmental considerations 6-13

Power and electrical requirements 6-14

Cross-connections 6-17

Cross-connect types 6-18

Allowable cross-connects 6-19

Synchronization 6-24

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-1

Network synchronization environment 6-25


Network configurations 6-28

Synchronization messaging 6-31

Sync messaging feature details and options 6-32

Sync messaging examples 6-34

Frequently asked network timing distribution questions 6-38

IS-IS Level 2 routing guidelines 6-39

Introduction 6-40

Addressing 6-42

Level 2 routing 6-44

IS-IS Level 2 routing remote provisioning sequence 6-45

IS-IS Level 2 routing provisioning confirmation 6-47

Maximum number of OSI nodes 6-49

Engineering rules and guidelines 6-50

System planning and engineering Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Physical arrangements

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section describes the possible physical arrangements of 1665 DMXplore.

Contents

Shelf configurations 6-4

Physical shelf specifications 6-7

Cabinet installation 6-9

Installation cabling 6-12

Environmental considerations 6-13

Power and electrical requirements 6-14

System planning and engineering

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-3

Shelf configurations...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore is designed to provide a variety of wide-band and broadband voiceand data services. The following paragraphs outline the specific packs that may beused in the Function Unit groups for certain applications.

Slots

The MAIN1 and MAIN2 slots accept OC-3/12 Main OLIUs. If the shelf is onlyequipped for unprotected operation, the MAIN2 slot can be left unpopulated. TheSYSCTL (VLNC1) is always located in the CTL slot.

Main slots (MAIN1 and MAIN2)

The MAIN1 and MAIN2 slots are reserved for the service and protection OC-3 orOC-12 circuit packs. The +/− 20 ppm timing generator (SMC) and main TDM switchfabrics are embedded in these circuit packs.

Control slot

The control slot is reserved for the System Controller (SYSCTL) circuit pack.

Function Group C slot

The C slot is designed to house an Ethernet circuit pack (VLNC15 or VLNC30) and ismapped directly to the four FN GRP C connectors. This slot must be populated by anapparatus blank when not being used.

Fan unit

The 1665 DMXplore rack-mount shelf and 1850 Transport Service Switch 5 HighCapacity rack-mount shelf contain an integral fan unit. Due to the horizontalorientation of circuit packs in these shelves, a fan unit is necessary to dissipate heat.The 1665 DMXplore wall-mount unit is convection cooled.

Circuit pack blanks

Any unused slot in the 1665 DMXplore must be equipped with an appropriate CPblank in order meet radiated emission requirement per GR-1089.

Available circuit packs

Table 6-1, “Circuit packs in 1665 DMXplore shelf ” (p. 6-5)lists each circuit packsupported by 1665 DMXplore and indicates which slots they are able to be housed in,and in what release each circuit pack is available.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Table 6-1 Circuit packs in 1665 DMXplore shelf



System Controller(SYSCTL)

VLNC1 CTL 1.0 Extended temperature certificationfor outside cabinet deployment(OSP Hardened)

OC-3/16DS1 &2DS3multi-functionpack(1 OC-3 port)

VLNC5 MAIN1,MAIN2

1.0.1 High-speed, long- reach, 1310 nm,OSP Hardened optics with supportfor 16 DS1 and 2 DS3 ports

OC-3/16DS1multi-functionpack(1 OC-3 port)

VLNC6 MAIN1,MAIN2

1.0 High-speed, long- reach, 1310 nm,OSP Hardened optics with supportfor 16 DS1 ports

OC-12/16DS1 &2DS3multi-functionpack(1 OC-12 port)

VLNC25 MAIN1,MAIN2

2.0 High-speed, long- reach, 1310 nm,OSP Hardened optics with supportfor 16 DS1 and 2 DS3 ports

OC-12/16DS1multi-functionpack(1 OC-12 port)

VLNC26 MAIN1,MAIN2

2.0 High-speed, long- reach, 1310 nm,OSP Hardened optics with supportfor 16 DS1 ports

10/100T (supportfor 4 ports)

Private Line


2.0 Support for the 4 10/100T ports onthe access panel, supports EthernetPrivate Lines, OSP hardened

10/100

Private Line(2optical ports and 4electrical ports)


2.1 Support for the 4 10/100T ports onthe access panel and 2100BASE-LX ports on thefaceplate (via SFP optics).Supports Ethernet Private Lines,OSP hardened

Apparatus Blank 199M MAIN 1,MAIN 2

1.0 Filler plates to be used inunpopulated MAIN slots of the1665 DMXplore shelf. For usewhen slot is not equipped.

Apparatus Blank 199L FunctionGroup C

1.0 Filler plates to be used inunpopulated Group C slot of theshelf when Ethernet service is notbeing supported.

System planning and engineering Shelf configurations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-5

Table 6-1 Circuit packs in 1665 DMXplore shelf (continued)



Apparatus Blank 199SC SYSCTL 3.0 Filler plate used in unpopulatedSYSCTL slot of the 1665DMXplore shelf. For use whenrunning without a VLNC50 in theMAIN1 slot.

Important! Changes may be made to planned or future offerings at any time, andwithout notice.

System planning and engineering Shelf configurations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Physical shelf specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The following information about 1665 DMXplore shelves that must be consideredduring installation.

Mounting information

Shelf size and weight information are described inTable 4-1, “1665 DMXploredimensions and weight” (p. 4-2).

Mounting bracket positions

The following figure illustrates typical mounting bracket placements on the 1665DMXplore rack mount shelf.

The 1665 DMXplore rack mount shelves offer the same mounting bracket as 1665DMX. The mounting brackets can be placed differently depending on customerrequirements (6, 5, or 8 inches back from the front of the shelf).

The 1665 DMXplore High Capacity rack-mount shelf is shipped with mountingbrackets that can be rotated to mount the shelf in 19-inch or 23-inch ANSI equipmentracks. These brackets can also be positioned at multiple locations along the side of theshelf to adjust its position in the equipment rack. Optional brackets are available formounting the shelf in an ETSI equipment rack.

Table 6-2 Rack mounting specifications

Mountingspecifications

ANSI ETSI

Rack width 19” 23” 600mm

Hole horizontalspacing

18.312” 22.312” 515mm

Figure 6-1 Mounting bracket positions on1665 DMXplore shelf

TOP VIEW

MOUNTINGBRACKET

FRAMEUPRIGHT

6.0 in(15.24cm)

8.0 in(20.32cm)

5.0 in(12.7cm)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-7

Table 6-2 Rack mounting specifications (continued)

Mountingspecifications

ANSI ETSI

Hole verticalspacing

Based on 0.5” vertical centers Based on 25mmvertical centers

Mounting screw 12-24 thread M5 thread form

System planning and engineering Physical shelf specifications

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Cabinet installation...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore and its circuit packs are hardened for use in outside plant (OSP)applications.

Cabinet requirements

Outside plant cabinets for use with 1665 DMXplore equipment in NAR applicationsare compliant with GR-4874.

Refer to Telcordia Document - Generic Requirements for Electronic EquipmentCabinets, GR-487, Issue 2, March 2000. Typical requirements covered in thisspecification include Water and Dust Intrusion, Wind-Driven Rain, Thermal Shock,Impact Resistance and Shock and Vibration.

Important! Minimum airflow requirement of 200 fpm is required when using the1665 DMXplore wall-mount in OSP applications.

Equipment compartment

All covers and faceplates that are part of the 1665 DMXplore must be in place wheninstalled in the cabinet to minimize losses in cooling and maximize resistance toelectromagnetic interference. Apparatus Blanks (see engineering drawings) are orderedseparately and must be used where no circuit packs are installed.

Refer to Alcatel-Lucent Document - 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore EngineeringDrawing, ED8C947-10, Latest Issue.

Splicing compartment

Cable access ports must be provided in the base of the splicing compartment to permitthe entrance of metallic and fiber cables into the equipment. Ports must be sized toallow cables to be placed in accordance with minimum bend radii guidelines, asspecified by the cable supplier.

Battery compartment

If a battery compartment is provided, it must be segregated from the electronicscompartment. A seal must be provided to prevent gases from seeping into theelectronics and splicing compartments. The compartment must be vented to the outside.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-9

Air flow

The heat from the 1665 DMXplore rack-mount shelf is dissipated by horizontal airflow provided by fans inside the shelf. Air flow caused by equipment cabinet fans mustnot impede the function of the 1665 DMXplore shelf fans. The 1665 DMXplorerequires a minimum airflow of 100 LFM.

The 1665 DMXplore wall-mount shelf is cooled by passive convection.

Alarms for a cabinet environment

The cooling systems and temperatures within a cabinet enclosure must be monitored toavoid conditions that can cause heat-related failures.

Alarm for cooling system failure

A system failure alarm must be provided for cabinet cooling systems with forced airventilation and active heat exchange systems

High-temperature alarm

A temperature sensor must be located in the electrical equipment compartment toprovide a high-temperature alarm when an internal cabinet temperature of 65°C isreached. The air temperature must be measured at the inlet of the top 1665 DMXploreshelf.

Cabinet strength

The cabinet must be resistant to continuous low-level vibrations from sources includingtrain and vehicular traffic, rotating machinery, construction activities, etc. Physical testsmust be performed to assure the cabinet does not amplify vibrations from these sourcessuch that the vibration levels transmitted to the equipment do not exceed design limits.Tests must be performed in accordance with GR-487 and GR-63 to verify theperformance of the cabinet and equipment during vibratory test conditions.

Operating temperature range

Inlet air to the 1665 DMXplore equipment must be controlled within the range of−40°C to +65°C. Ambient air from outside the cabinet cannot be introduced into theelectronics compartment or used in any way to directly cool the 1665 DMXploreequipment within the cabinet.

Heat exchange systems for the cabinet must be sized so that maximum inlettemperature will not exceed 65°C even when the shelf is equipped in such a way thatit approaches the maximum current drains detailed in“1665 DMXplore current drains”(p. 6-14). Also, the cabinet must be sized to ensure that inlet temperature will notexceed 65°C given both severe outside ambient temperature and solar heating relativeto the conditions of the region where the shelf is deployed.

System planning and engineering Cabinet installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

The supplier must supply performance data upon request for cabinets cooled bycompact heat exchangers or any other method. This information may include theappropriate factor of safety, or excess capacity, accounting for normal fouling of theheat exchanger core. During operation, the time rate of change of the internal airtemperature must not exceed 30°C/hr as the result of solar heating and radiationcooling of the enclosure, and power cycling the equipment.

Cabinet condensation

The relative humidity of the internal air of an outside cabinet must be maintained inaccordance with GR-63. This applies even when the equipment within the cabinet doesnot have power applied, e.g., during installation of equipment. During such times asource of heat, or desiccant packs, must be provided for maintaining the necessaryrelative humidity level.

System thermal performance verification

For the fully equipped cabinet configuration, a functional test of the 1665 DMXploreshelf must be performed with all systems powered at their appropriate levels for typicalservice applications that approach the maximum current drains detailed in“1665DMXplore current drains” (p. 6-14). The cabinet surfaces must be respectively heatedat the appropriate maximum solar radiation levels. Absorbed solar heating must beestimated using the formulations and methods in accordance with GR-487 and theASHRAE handbook.

Refer to 2001 ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals — American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc., Atlanta GA.

During this testing measure, record the following:

• Power level into the cabinet in amperes

• Air Velocities in the airflow channels formed by the 1665 DMXplore circuit packsare in linear ft./min.

• Air temperature entering and exhausted from the 1665 DMXplore shelf (measuredin °C)Three K or T type thermocouples must be added at the inlet and exhaust of allcircuit pack slots. Take the average of the three thermocouples for each circuit packslot for both inlet and exhaust and record (Tinlet_avg, Texhaust_avg, TC type, andslot number).

• Ambient temperature (temperature outside the cabinet and measured in °C).

• Solar heating loads on respective cabinet surfaces (°C).

System planning and engineering Cabinet installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-11

Installation cabling...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Alcatel-Lucent offers a full complement of transmission cables and optical jumpers. Allinterfaces to the 1665 DMXplore wall-mount shelf are front-access, and all serviceinterfaces have physical connectors. Rear access cabling is available with therack-mount version of the 1665 DMXplore shelf. For additional cabling details, see“Cabling” (p. 4-23).

Cable placement and routing

Refer toMetropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer Installation Manual, 365-372-334for cable placement and routing information. Cables must be routed in accordance withthe guidelines provided in the Installation Manuals. Circuit pack cables must be routedwith half of the total number of cables from each side of the shelf.

Cable rating

Cables must be rated for a minimum temperature of 80°C .

Cable contacts

All connector contacts that mate to 1665 DMXplore equipment must be of similarcontact finishes. Alcatel-Lucent recommends the use of gold with a minimum of 30micro-inches.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-12 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Environmental considerations...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore meets NEBS Level 3 standards for use in central office environmentsas specified in GR-63-CORE and GR-1089-CORE. 1665 DMXplore also meetsstandards for uncontrolled environments as specified in GR-63-CORE andGR-499-CORE. For detailed specifications, refer toChapter 10, “Technicalspecifications”.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-13

Power and electrical requirements...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview of power requirements

The power consumption of the 1665 DMXplore products is dependent on the circuitpacks installed and their operating state. These variables must be taken into accountwhen sizing the power system.

1665 DMXplore Power supply

The following table lists 1665 DMXplore power requirements.

Table 6-3 1665 DMXplore Power supply requirements

Item Description

Voltage range −40 to −57VDC

Power Feeders A and B

(-48VDC)

Circuit Breakers Two, 2A fuses

1665 DMXplore current drains

The following table provides the maximum current drain requirements for a shelf.

Table 6-4 1665 DMXplore shelf current drains

Shelf Current Drains per Feeder in Amperes

Wall Mount Rack-Mount High CapacityRack-Mount

Maximum @−48V

Maximum @−40V

Maximum@-48V

1665 DMXplore Shelf 1.25 Amps 1.5 Amps 2.5 Amps

Power quality

1665 DMXplore products require a reliable low-noise power source in accordance withGR-947.

Refer to Telcordia Document - Generic Requirements for a −48VDCTelecommunications Switchmode Rectifier/ Power Supply, GR-947, Issue 1, December1996.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-14 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

This is usually accomplished by float charging batteries at the input to the 1665DMXplore shelves. Batteries are installed to provide backup power in the event of ACpower outages. When deployed in a float charge configuration they also providefiltering of AC power line drop outs and noise generated by equipment in the cabinet.In all cases power must be configured to avoid dropping below or exceeding thevoltage limits listed inTable 6-3, “1665 DMXplore Power supply requirements”(p. 6-14).

Electrical noise

Care must be taken to insure that electrical noise generated by the power system, fans,or other equipment does not interfere with the operation of the 1665 DMXploreproducts. Electrical noise on the −48 volt power lines at the shelf must not exceed thevoice frequency and wide-band noise limits in accordance with GR-947.

Interruptions

Momentary AC power line interruptions are accommodated by the batteries on floatcharge.

Inrush current

While there is no requirement to limit the rate of power application to the 1665DMXplore shelves, the voltage at the shelf must remain within the specified limits atall times.

Battery backup

In all cases battery backup power must be configured to avoid dropping below thevoltage limits listed inTable 6-3, “1665 DMXplore Power supply requirements”(p. 6-14). The preferred method of battery backup is a float charge configuration.Alternatively, a separate battery and charger system can be used utilizing a diode″OR″configuration. Systems employing transfer switches are not recommended unlesssufficient capacitance is installed to carry the system over through the transfer period.

Grounding and bonding

Grounding must meet the following appropriate requirements for outside plant andcustomer premises applications

• Telcordia (Telcordia Document — Network Equipment - Building System (NEBS)Requirements: Physical Protection, GR-63, Issue 2, April 2002)

• UL (UL 60950/ CAN/CSA- 22.2 NO. 60950-00 “Safety of Information TechnologyEquipment”, December, 2000)

• NEC (National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70), National Electrical Code (NEC),2002 Edition)

System planning and engineering Power and electrical requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-15

The 1665 DMXplore shelves require a single common ground reference. The 1665DMXplore shelf frame must be bonded to an earth ground within the cabinet. 1665DMXplore shelf mounting screws should be used to provide a low impedancemultipoint electrical connection through the mounting structure to earth ground. Aframe ground wire located on the shelf must be connected to the cabinet ground.

I/O protection

The DS3 interfaces (traffic ports) or other metallic telecommunications interfaces mustnot leave the cabinet unless connected to telecommunications devices providingprimary and secondary protection, as per GR-1089 and UL-60950 (UL 60950/CAN/CSA- 22.2 NO. 60950-00 “Safety of Information Technology Equipment”,December, 2000). Not applicable for Ethernet packs.

System planning and engineering Power and electrical requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-16 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Cross-connections

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section provides cross-connection information for 1665 DMXplore. Forcross-connect provisioning information, refer toChapter 5, “Operations, administration,maintenance, and provisioning”.

Contents

Cross-connect types 6-18

Allowable cross-connects 6-19


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-17

Cross-connect types...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore has cross-connect capabilities offering users flexibility in directingtraffic flow through systems to support a wide variety of customer applications usingtwo-way and multi-point (multi-point [data specific] is a future feature)cross-connections.

Types

Cross-connections are made by specifying the SONET rate (VT1.5 or STS-n), the endpoint addresses (AIDs), and the cross-connection type. Each single cross-connectioncommand establishes a two-way cross-connection.

For simpler installation and turn-up 1665 DMXplore has been designed with a defaultset of cross connections. This allows for aplug and playoption when installing the1665 DMXplore. The default cross connections are supported and connected to 1+1protected high-speed interface. In Release 2.1 it becomes possible to disable all defaultcross-connections simultaneously.

Manual cross-connect rates

The following lists the signals that can be cross-connected:

• VT1.5

• STS-1

• STS-3c

Important! The OC-3/12 circuit packs can add/drop a single STS-3c to FunctionGroup C, while the OC-12 packs can pass through all four STS-3(c)s.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-18 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Allowable cross-connects...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section describes the 1665 DMXplore two-way add/drop and pass-throughcross-connections.

Add/drop

An add/drop cross-connection is any connection between a high-speed (network)interface and a low-speed (tributary) interface.

The following figure shows a high-level schematic of a two-way add/dropcross-connection.

Unidirectional Path Switched Ring

A Unidirectional Path Switched Ring (UPSR) is a self-healing ring configuration inwhich traffic is sent onto both rotations (both fibers) of the ring in opposite directions.Path-switchedmeans that if the working signal fails, the path switches to the protectionsignal. Protection switching is done independently for each SONET path. UPSRsoperate in an integrated, single-ended fashion, negating the need for complexnetwork-level coordination in the effort to restore traffic. 1665 DMXplore also supportslocked cross connections to DS1 and DS3 interfaces where the best signal from bothrotations of a UPSR is not selected. Instead, traffic is added and dropped (locked) fromone rotation of the ring only (provisionable).

Linear 1+1

The linear application mode is a standards compliant 1+1 protected configuration,providing unidirectional, non-revertive line switching.

Figure 6-2 Two-way add/drop

NC-DMXplore-015

DS1,DS3Ethernet

(b) Two-way drop terminated path


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-19

Pass-through

A pass-through cross-connection is made between two ring interfaces in the MAIN1and 2 slots, allowing the signal to be passed-through a ring node on the same time slot.

The following figure shows a pass-through cross-connection on the high-speedinterface (OC-3/12).

Figure 6-3 Pass-through cross-connection on high-speed interface

OC-NOC-N

Two-way pass throughpath

Main TDMF abric

nc-dmx-160

System planning and engineering Allowable cross-connects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-20 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

All allowable UPSR/1+1 add/drop cross-connections

Table 6-5, “All allowable add/drop cross-connections” (p. 6-21)lists add/dropcross-connections supported by 1665 DMXplore, Release 2.1. The cross-connections inthe following table are all add/drop cross-connections.

Table 6-5 All allowable add/drop cross-connections

Source Destination

High-Speed (HS) OC-3 OLIU (UPSR)

2waypr STS-1 to DS3, 10/100 FE

2waypr STS-3c to 10/100 FE

2waypr VT1.5 to DS1, 10/100 FE

High-Speed (HS) OC-3 OLIU (1+1)








High-Speed (HS) OC-12 OLIU (1+1)




Notes:

1. At most, only one STS-3c cross-connection can be made using the VLNC15/VLNC30and the MAIN cards that are currently available.

2. A single STS-3c add/drop cross-connection is supported to the VLNC15/VLNC30.

3. The maximum cross-connectable bandwidth between the VLNC15/30 and the VLNC25/26is 9 STS-1s. This includes the STS-1s used for VT, STS-1, and STS-3c cross-connections.

4. The number of STS-1s that may be connected to the VLNC15/30 is provisionable from0-6. Thus the total number of VTs is 168.

5. Virtual concatenation at the VT and STS1 levels is supported for cross-connections to theVLNC15/30.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-21

Default cross-connections (add/drop)

Table 6-6, “Default cross-connections” (p. 6-22)lists the default cross-connections that1665 DMXplore comes provisioned with. 1665 DMXplore is provisioned with a set ofadd/drop cross-connections to facilitate a plug-and-play startup upon installation. Thisset of cross-connections is applicable only to the default, 1+1 OC-n port application.

Table 6-6 Default cross-connections

Main SlotEquipage

Default Cross-Connection Release

VT/DS1 STS-1/DS3

VLNC5OC-3/16DS1/2DS3

m-1-1-x-y ↔ a-1-x-y1 m-1-2 ↔ b-1

m-1-3↔ b-2

R1.0.1

VLNC6OC-3/16DS1

m-1-1-x-y ↔ a-1-x-y1 NONE R1.0

VLNC25OC-12/16DS1/2DS3

m-1-1-x-y ↔ a-1-x-y1 m-1-2 ↔ b-1

m-1-3 ↔ b-2

R2.0

VLNC26OC-12/16DS1

m-1-1-x-y ↔ a-1-x-y1 NONE R2.0

Notes:

1. x = 1...4 (VTG) and y = 1...4 (VT1.5)

Disabling default cross-connections

The user has the ability to enable or disable default cross-connections via thedefaultxconns parameter of theENT-SYS command. When enabled defaultcross-connections are established when a system, equipped with at least one main pack,is initialized via theINIT-SYS command with aid=ALL and ph=9, or when a mainpack is inserted in a system in which there is no expected pack in either main slot.(SeeRTRV-EQPT.) When disabled, default cross-connections are not established underany conditions.

Important! executing theINIT-SYS command with aid=ALL and ph=9, removesany existing cross-connections.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-22 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

All allowable pass-through cross-connections

Table 6-7, “All allowable pass-through cross-connections” (p. 6-23)lists pass-throughcross-connections supported by 1665 DMXplore in Release 2.0. The cross-connectionsin the following table are all pass-through cross-connections.

Table 6-7 All allowable pass-through cross-connections

Source Destination Release


2waypr STS-1 to OC-3 UPSR1 R1.0

2waypr VT1.5 to OC-3 UPSR1 R1.0


2waypr STS-1 to OC-12 UPSR1 R2.0

2waypr STS-3c to OC-12 UPSR1, 2 R2.0

2waypr VT1.5 to OC-12 UPSR1 R2.0

Notes:

1. This is a direct pass-through connection: from a particular time slot on one side of thering to the same time slot on the other side of the same ring.

2. OC-3 packs do not support STS-3c pass-throughs. OC-12 packs support pass-throughs ofall four STS-3(c)s.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-23

Synchronization

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section describes synchronization features and functions for the 1665 DMXploreAccess Multiplexer.

Contents

Network synchronization environment 6-25


Network configurations 6-28

Synchronization messaging 6-31

Sync messaging feature details and options 6-32

Sync messaging examples 6-34

Frequently asked network timing distribution questions 6-38


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-24 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Network synchronization environment...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Careful consideration should be given to proper design of the SONET network’ssynchronization environment. Proper synchronization engineering minimizes timinginstabilities, maintains quality transmission network performance, and limits networkdegradation due to unwanted propagation of synchronization network faults. Thesynchronization features of the 1665 DMXplore are designed to complement theexisting and future synchronization network and allow it not only to make use ofnetwork timing but also to take on an active role in facilitating networksynchronization.

A number of published sources give generic recommendations on setting up asynchronization network. The 1665 DMXplore is designed to operate in a network thatcomplies with recommendations stated in GR-253-CORE and GR-436-CORE.

Recommendations

The following are some key recommendations from the documents listed above. Forfurther detailed explanation, the sources should be consulted directly.

1. A node can only receive the synchronization reference signal from another nodethat contains a clock of equivalent or better quality (+/− 20 ppm).

2. The facilities with the greatest availability (absence of outages) should be selectedfor synchronization facilities.

3. Where possible, all primary and secondary synchronization facilities should bediverse, and synchronization facilities with the same cable should be minimized.

4. The total number of nodes in series from the Stratum 1 source should beminimized. For example, the primary synchronization network would ideally looklike a star configuration with the Stratum 1 source at the center. The nodesconnected to the star would branch out in decreasing Stratum level from the center.

5. No timing loops may be formed in any combination of primary and secondaryfacilities.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-25

Synchronization features...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Synchronization is an important part of all SONET products. 1665 DMXplore isdesigned for high performance and reliable synchronization and can be used in anumber of synchronization environments.

Synchronization features

1665 DMXplore supports the provisioning of two synchronization referenceconfigurations:

• Line Timing from incoming OC-3/12 signal (for small Central Offices or remotesites).

• Free Running from the multiplexer’s internal SMC (SONET Minimum Clock)Timing Generator (no synchronization inputs).

These timing modes are supported by the embedded +/− 20 ppm generator (SMC) inthe MAIN circuit pack. The basic timing modes can be combined into various networkconfigurations.

Internal timing functions such as reference interfaces, the on-board clock elements, andtiming distribution, are provided by the +/− 20 ppm Timing Generator. The timinggenerator distributes clock and frame signals, derived from the +/− 20 ppm generator,to the rest of the system.

Line timing mode

In line timing mode, the timing generator derives local shelf timing from the incomingservice OC-n signal in the MAIN 1 or MAIN 2 slot. If one of the OC-n (OC-3/12)references is corrupted or unavailable, the timing generator will make a protectionswitch (provisionable as revertive or non-revertive) to the other reference withoutcausing timing degradations. If all OC-n timing signals are lost (for example, due to acable cut), the timing generator will switch to holdover mode. The timing generatorwill normally switch back to the line timing mode when a good reference is available,but it can be provisioned to require a manual switch.

Free running mode

In free running mode, no mode switching is performed. The timing generator derivestiming from internal timing generator. This oscillator provides +/−20 ppm accuracy. Atmost one 1665 DMXplore in a subnetwork should be provisioned in the free runningmode. All other 1665 DMXplore NEs in the subnetwork should be line timed to thisfree running system, or to an NE that supports external timing interfaces, to avoidperformance degradation.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-26 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Holdover mode

When a system is line timed, in the case of unprotected synchronization referencefailure, the +/−20 ppm timing generator will switch to holdover mode and continue toprovide system timing, using the internal oscillator to maintain the last known goodreference frequency.

System planning and engineering Synchronization features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-27

Network configurations...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The following pages detail the two different network configuration types: free runningand line timing.

Free running configuration

The free running/line timing network can operate without an external clock source.This configuration may be useful for initial access transport and customer locationapplications, and also meets the needs of an end-office trunk facility. Thisconfiguration cannot be used to provide OC-n timing distribution or where SONETinterconnections to other SONET networks are needed.

One 1665 DMXplore synchronizes its transmitted OC-n signals from the internal +/-20ppm timing generator. The other 1665 DMXplore systems recover timing from theincoming OC-n signal and use this timing for their transmitted signals.

Because the free running/line timed 1665 DMXplore network is asynchronous,additional jitter may be experienced on de-multiplexed DS1s/DS3s. Certaininterconnected equipment may be sensitive to such jitter and this configuration shouldnot be used in cases where it would cause a problem for that equipment.

Important! If the network is self-contained and the DS1/DS3synchronizer/desynchronizers are using the same reference (derived from the freerunning SMC +/-20 ppm timing generator) then there is no additional jitter due topointer adjustments because there will be no timing adjustments.

The following figure shows a free running configuration in a ring network.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-28 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Line timing configuration

The external/line timing configuration integrates access transport and customer locationnetworks into the digital synchronization network. This application is ideal fornetworks where only one location has a building integrated timing supply (BITS)clock. The network is synchronized to a local central office clock via DS1 references.

Important! It is either a 1665 DMX or 1665 DMXtend system that is externallytimed, NOT a 1665 DMXplore.

The 1665 DMXplore is line timed from the 1665 DMX or 1665 DMXtend system. Thelocal office clock from which the 1665 DMX or 1665 DMXtend is timed should beStratum 3 or better, with timing traceable to a primary reference source. The 1665DMX/1665 DMXtend times its transmitted OC-n signals from the internal oscillatorthat is locked on the external reference. The remote 1665 DMXplore recovers timingfrom the incoming OC-n signal and uses this timing for its transmitted signals.

In a ring topology, synchronization messaging allows automatic synchronizationreconfiguration in the event of a fiber or equipment failure.

The following figure shows line timing in a ring configuration.

Figure 6-4 Free running - ring network

20ppm

20ppm20ppm

OC-3

Note

Note

Note

Note

Note: DS1/DS3

OC-3

OC-3 OC-3

MA-DMXplore-020

1665DMXploreLine-Timed



1665DMXploreFree Running


20ppm

System planning and engineering Network configurations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-29

Figure 6-5 Line timing - ring network

TOC-3/12

Note

Note

Note

Note

Note: DS1/DS3

OC-3/12

OC-3/12 OC-3/12

MA-DMXplore-013

1665 DMXploreLine-Timed



1665 DMXExternal-Timed

1665 DMX = 1665 Data Multiplexer1665 DMXplore = 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore

G3 TG3

TG3TG3

System planning and engineering Network configurations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-30 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Synchronization messaging...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore provides a synchronization messaging feature to ensure the integrityof network synchronization during both normal and abnormal conditions. Through theuse of synchronization messaging, the current quality of the timing source can beconveyed from one 1665 DMXplore to the next. This capability allows the 1665DMXplore to automatically change its timing reference in order to always maintain thehighest quality timing available.

Applications

The applications that are currently supported with the synchronization messagingfeature can be divided into two categories:

• Automatic synchronization reconfiguration

• Synchronization provisioning integrity.

Automatic synchronization reconfiguration

SONET was designed to operate optimally in a synchronous environment. Althoughplesiochronous and asynchronous operation can be supported through the use of pointeradjustments, transmission quality may be affected by the generation of additional jitterand wander due to pointer adjustments in some applications. Because of this, it isdesirable to maintain synchronous operation whenever possible. Through the use ofsynchronization messages, the quality of the different timing references can be madeavailable at each 1665 DMXplore NE. The 1665 DMXplore system can be optioned todetermine the best timing reference available and switch to that reference. Through thismechanism, the synchronous operation of the subnetwork can be maintained. Theswitching of timing references is hitless, and the synchronization messages also allowit to be done without creating timing loops in the process.

Synchronization provisioning integrity

A welcome side benefit of synchronization messaging is that it helps preventprovisioning errors. Provisioned timing loops on 1665 DMXplore systems will bequickly detected through the synchronization messaging algorithm and prevented byforcing the system into holdover. The system can then be provisioned correctly.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-31

Sync messaging feature details and options...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

As mentioned previously, SONET sync messaging is used to communicate the qualityof the subnetwork timing throughout the subnetwork. This is done using bits 5-8 of theS1 byte in the SONET overhead. If a 1665 DMXplore shelf is deriving timing from agiven OC-n interface, and sync messaging is enabled on that interface, the systeminterprets the received message to determine the system’s timing status. 1665DMXplore also transmits over the particular OC-n interface, and all other OC-ninterfaces that are enabled for sync messaging, the appropriate message indicating thequality of its timing and its usability.

Sync messages using S1 byte

Table 6-8, “Sync Messages with the S1 byte” (p. 6-32)lists the associated internaltiming status that are associated with sync messages (using the S1 byte) received fromthe OC-n interface when sync messaging is enabled. Messages are listed from low tohigh quality.

Table 6-8 Sync Messages with the S1 byte

Received Message Active Timing Mode 1 Quality Level

Don’t Use (DUS) Holdover 9

Traceable Stratum 4 (ST4) Holdover 8

Traceable SONET Clock w/S3-TG(SMC)

Holdover 7

Traceable Stratum 3 (ST3) OK to use 6

Traceable Stratum 3E (ST3E) OK to use 5

Traceable Transit Node Clock(TNC)

OK to use 4

Traceable Stratum 2 OK to use 3

Sync Trace Unknown (STU) OK to use 2

PRS Traceable OK to use 1

Notes:

1. This column applies only when provisioned for line timing mode.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-32 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Disabling sync messaging

Sync messaging using the SONET S1 byte can be disabled on a per OC-n interfacebasis. ADON’T USE message is transmitted on bits 5-8 of the S1 byte if this is done.

DON’T USE

The DON’T USE message is sent to indicate that its timing is not suitable forsynchronization (for example, back towards the line timing source).

Line timing

When 1665 DMXplore is configured for line timing, theDON’T USE message is sent onthe OC-n interfaces towards the NE from which the timing is being derived. Themessage received on the OC-n interface is sent on all other OC-n interfaces wheresync messaging is enabled.

Automatic synchronization reconfiguration

With automatic synchronization reconfiguration, the 1665 DMXplore shelves receiveand compare the incoming sync messages on the OC-n interfaces available for linetiming to select the highest quality synchronization reference available. If the receivedquality levels are the same on the references available for timing, the active line timingreference takes precedence. This feature guarantees the non-revertive operation ofreconfiguration.

The existence of automatic synchronization reconfiguration does not affect OC-n lineprotection switching.

System planning and engineering Sync messaging feature details and options

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-33

Sync messaging examples...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

In this section, some detailed examples are given to show specifically how the syncmessages propagate through network and assist in the recovery from a fiber failure.Through these examples, one can extend the same concept to any other network thatmay include different topologies, number of sites, failure locations, and number ofBITS clocks.

Synchronization reconfiguration in an access ring

The following figure, Part A, illustrates an access ring operating in its normalconfiguration. The 1665 DMXtend shelf at the CO is externally timed, and each of theother 1665 DMXplore shelves are line timed in a counterclockwise direction. The STUmessage is sent to indicate where timing is traceable to an external BITS and where itis valid to be used. The DON’T USE message is sent on the interface that is beingused as the line timing reference and, thus, where using that timing would create atiming loop. Sync messaging and automatic synchronization have both been enabledfor this network.

In the following figure, Part B, a fiber has been cut between sites A and B.Immediately, the 1665 DMXplore shelf at site B enters holdover and sends out theSTU message to site C. The 1665 DMXplore shelf at site B cannot switch to line timefrom site C because it is receiving theDON’T USE message on that interface.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-34 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

In the following figure, Part C, the 1665 DMXplore shelf at site C detects theincoming Traceable Stratum 3 message and sends the message to site D. The 1665DMXplore shelf at site C cannot switch to line timing from the other rotation becauseit is receiving theDON’T USE message on that interface.

In the following figure, Part D, the 1665 DMXplore at site D detects the incomingTraceable Stratum 3 message. The STU message is a better quality message than theSONET Minimum Clock message, so the 1665 DMXplore shelf at site D switches toline timing from site A. After the switch occurs, theDON’T USE message is sent backto site A, and the STU message is retransmitted to site C.

Figure 6-6 Automatic synchronization reconfiguration, part A and B

Xplore-055

BITSPRS

Traceable

a) Before Failure

BITSPRS

Traceable

b) Failure Occurs,Site B Changes Message

STU

Site A STU

Site C

Site B Site D Site B Site D

Site A

Site C

STU

STU

DUS

DUS

DUS

STU

STU

STU

DUS

STU

DUS

STU

Sync Flow

1665 DMXtend 1665 DMXtend


= 1665 DMXtend

STU

STU

STU

STU STU

STU

STU

STU


= 1665 DMXplore

System planning and engineering Sync messaging examples

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-35

In the following figure, Part E, the 1665 DMXplore shelf at site C detects theincoming STU message from site D. The STU message is a better quality messagethan the SONET Minimum Clock message being received from site B, so the 1665DMXplore shelf at site C switches to line time from site D. After the switch occurs,the DON’T USE message is sent back to site D, and the STU message is retransmitted tosite B.

In the following figure, Part F, the 1665 DMXplore shelf at site B detects the incomingSTU message from site C. The STU message is a better quality message than theinternal holdover capability, so the 1665 DMXplore shelf at site B switches to linetime from site C. After the switch occurs, theDON’T USE message is sent back to siteC, and the STU message is forwarded to site A. When the failure clears, thesynchronization remains in the new configuration unless it is manually switched back.

Figure 6-7 Automatic synchronization reconfiguration, part C and D

Xpllore-056

BITSPRS

Traceable

c) Site C Changes Message

BITSPRS

Traceable

d) Site D Reconfigures

STU

Site A STU

Site C

Site B Site D Site B Site D

Site A

Site C

STU

STU

STUDUSDUS

SMC

DUS

STU

Sync Flow

DMXtendDMXtend

DMX = Metropolis DMX Access Multiplexertend®

tend

= DMXtend

SMC

SMC SMC

STU

SMC

SMC

SMC

SMC

DUS

DUS

DMXplore = Metropolis DMXplore Access Multiplexer®

= DMXplore


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-36 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Figure 6-8 Automatic synchronization reconfiguration part E and F

Xplore-058

BITSPRS

Traceable

e) Site C Reconfigures

BITSPRS

Traceable

f) Site B Reconfigures

STU

Site A STU

Site C

Site B Site D

SMC STUSTU

DUS

DUS

DUS

Site B Site D

Site A

Site C

DUS

STU

STU

STU

DUS

STU

STU

Sync Flow

1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore


= 1665 DMXplore

SMC

SMC

DUS

DUS

DUS

DUS

DUS


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-37

Frequently asked network timing distribution questions...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The following are some frequently asked questions about network timing distribution.

1

Why does Telcordia say that DS1s carried over SONET should not be used for timing?

Telcordia has provided this recommendation because there are several limitations.Telcordia requires that DS1s carried over SONET must be used in applications such asswitch remotes and will be acceptable, provided pointer adjustments are not created.

2

Can pointer adjustments be prevented?

Neither random nor periodic pointer adjustments will occur if the 1665 DMXploreshelf is provisioned for line timing.

3

How do I time1665 DMXploreat a remote site?

Line time.

4

Why are there more issues related to timing with SONET equipment than there are withasynchronous equipment?

SONET equipment was designed to work ideally in a synchronous network. When thenetwork is not synchronous, mechanisms such as pointer processing and bit-stuffingmust be used and jitter/wander increases.

5

Can DS3 signals be used to carry DS1 timing signals without the worry of having thenetwork synchronous?

Yes, although this option is more expensive.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-38 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

IS-IS Level 2 routing guidelines

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section details the guidelines for IS-IS Level 2 Routing in OSI CLNP networkswith more than 250 total nodes.

Contents

Introduction 6-40

Addressing 6-42

Level 2 routing 6-44

IS-IS Level 2 routing remote provisioning sequence 6-45

IS-IS Level 2 routing provisioning confirmation 6-47

Maximum number of OSI nodes 6-49

Engineering rules and guidelines 6-50


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-39

Introduction...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The IS-IS routing protocol an interior gateway protocol (IGP) that is used for routingwithin a single domain. If the domain contains a large number of nodes, nodes must besplit into a number of logical areas. IS-IS Level 1 Routing provides routing betweennodes and other Layer 1 routers within a single area. IS-IS Level 2 Routing providesrouting between the other Layer 2 routers in the network areas that compose thedomain.

Support of Level 2 routing by 1665 DMXplore means that it can be used to supportrouting between areas within large domains.

Both the assignment of NEs to areas and the enabling of NEs as Level 2 routers isaccomplished by provisioning (refer to“Addressing” (p. 6-42)and“Level 2 routing”(p. 6-44), respectively).

OSI Node vs. Network Element terminology

Each 1665 DMXplore is an NE that functions as a single OSI node. Some NEs supportmultiple OSI nodes in a single device. So, the term OSI node, when used to describenetwork size, may not correspond with the number of NEs in that network.

Symbols

The graphical examples is this appendix use the symbols that are defined in thefollowing figure. The following figure illustrates an example network with nodesassigned to four different areas connected by Level 2 routers.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-40 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Figure 6-9 Network with Level 2 routers

= NE Level 2 Router

= Generic Level 2 Router

= Level 2 Subdomain

= OSI LAN

= DCC

= Area

NC-DMX-042

Area 1

Area 3

Area 2

Level 2 Subdomain

Area 4

= SNMS

= NE Level 1 Router

System planning and engineering Introduction

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-41

Addressing...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Each network node is assigned a Network Services Access Point (NSAP) address. Thisaddress is used by the IS-IS routing protocol. This address can be configured to groupnodes into different logical areas within a network domain.

NSAP address format

The Network Services Access Point (NSAP) address is composed of 20 octets. These20 octets can be represented by 40 hexadecimal characters. The 20 octet-space of theNSAP address is used store values for the 9 fields that compose the NSAP.

The following table displays the 9 fields of the NSAP, and the number of octets usedby each field.

Table 6-9 NSAP addresses

NSAPField:

AFI IDI DFI OrganizationID

RES RD Area SystemIdentifier

SEL

Octets: 1 2 1 3 2 2 2 6 1

DefaultValue:(hex)

39 840F 80 000000 0000 0000 0000 none 00

not provisionable user provisionable not provisionable

The first 4 octets of the 1665 DMXplore NSAP address are always the same andcannot be changed. The next 9 octets of the NSAP address are provisionable. The last7 octets contain the System Identifier field, which is unique to each node, and theSelector (SEL) field.

Area field

The Area field consists of two octets, that can be represented by four hexadecimalcharacters. It has a default value of 0000 (hex). The Area field can be provisioned toassign a node to a specific area. TL1 commandENT-ULSDCC-L3 can be used to changethe Area field.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-42 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Multiple area addresses

Multiple area addressing is the capability of assigning more than one area address to anode. Multiple area addresses are not supported for 1665 DMXplore. However, ifmultiple area addresses are provisioned in another node, 1665 DMXplore willrecognize its own primary area address plus up to two other area addresses. The use ofmultiple area addresses is not recommended.

System planning and engineering Addressing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-43

Level 2 routing...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

A Level 1 router directly supports one or more individual network nodes. Level 1routing is the routing that takes place within a single area, between Level 1 routers andtheir associated nodes.

Each area in a Domain must have at least one Level 2 router. Level 2 routing is therouting that occurs between Level 2 routers, and generally between the areas within anetwork domain. An area without a Level 2 router is isolated from the rest of thenetwork.

A 1665 DMXplore that has IS-IS Level 2 routing enabled, functions as a Level 1-2router. It continues to provide Level 1 routing within its area, and also provides Level2 routing to adjacent Level 2 routers. It can be connected to individual network nodes,one or more Level 1 routers, and one or more Level 2 routers.

Level 2 sub-domain

An adjacent set of Level 2 routers forms a Level 2 sub-domain. For proper OSIrouting, every Level 2 router should have at least one neighbor (via OSI LAN or DCC)that is also a Level 2 router. At least one Level 2 router in an area must be adjacent toa Level 2 router in another area, otherwise, the former area is isolated from the rest ofthe network.

Enabling Level 2 routing capability

Each 1665 DMXplore functions as a Level 1 router by default. You can use the TL1commandENT-ULSDCC-L3 to also enable Level 2 routing on a 1665 DMXplore.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-44 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

IS-IS Level 2 routing remote provisioning sequence...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Avoid isolating nodes

Avoid isolating any nodes when provisioning area addresses and Level 2 routersremotely. It may be necessary to dispatch a craft technician to recover an isolatednode.

To avoid isolating nodes, a sequence for remote provisioning is established withrespect to the local node to which theWaveStar® CIT is connected or the TL1-GNEthrough which Lucent Optical Management System (Lucent OMS) is connected.Typically, the local node or TL1-GNE is provisioned to be a Level 2 router first, butits area address is not changed initially. This general sequence can be modified innetworks with redundant OSI LAN or DCC connectivity between and within areas.

1. The nodes and sub-tending rings that are furthest away from this local node orTL1-GNE are provisioned first.

2. Work back toward the local node or TL1-GNE’s sub-tending ring.

3. Provision the local node or TL1-GNE’s sub-tending ring.

4. Provision the local node or TL1-GNE last.

If Lucent OMS is part of the network via an OSI LAN or WAN interface, provisionthe area address for the Lucent OMS.

Important! Before assigning area addresses and Level 2 routers in a network, besure no alarms (especiallyDCC failure alarms) exist; otherwise, even therecommended remote provisioning sequence might result in isolated nodes. Toconfirm the network alarm status, it is recommended that a centralized maintenancecenter with TL1 OS support be consulted.

Provisioning sub-tending rings

Always provision new area addresses for a sub-tending ring by starting with a nodethat is adjacent to the node that connects this sub-tending ring to the rest of thenetwork, and then provision the area address for each sequential adjacent node goingaround the sub-tending ring. Provision the area address of the connecting node last,especially if the connecting node supports multiple sub-tending rings.

For single-homed sub-tending rings, provision the node that will be the Level 2 routernode last; otherwise, nodes in its area could be isolated. For dual-homed rings,provision one of the nodes that will be Level 2 router first, so that OSI connectivity isestablished with provisioned nodes as soon as they complete their controller resets.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-45

Minimizing OSI communications disruption

Another important goal is to provision the network in such a way that OSIcommunications disruption is minimized. Changing a node’s area address or enabling anode as a Level 2 router causes the node to reset its controller. The reset is immediateupon completion of the command. In addition to temporarily disrupting OSIcommunications, controller resets temporarily disable automatic transmission protectionswitching.

If a node’s area address and Level 2 routing status are both being changed, bothchanges should be made with a single command.

As one node is undergoing a controller reset in an area, the next adjacent node shouldbe provisioned to minimize the overall time required to provision the nodes in an areaand minimize the time that OSI communications with the nodes in the area are lost.

System planning and engineering IS-IS Level 2 routing remote provisioning sequence

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-46 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

IS-IS Level 2 routing provisioning confirmation...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

You can use TL1RTRV-MAP-NETWORK commands to confirm the area address and Level2 router assignments of all nodes with OS LAN or DCC connectivity in a network.

Small networks

In a small network without IS-IS Level 2 Routing, theRTRV-MAP-NETWORK responseincludes the NSAPs of the local node and all remote nodes. This command may beuseful to confirm the uniqueness of the area addresses before combining two existingnetworks into one large network requiring IS-IS Level 2 Routing.

Large networks

In large networks with IS-IS Level 2 Routing, theRTRV-MAP-NETWORK response canvary based on whether or not the local node is a Level 2 router.

1. If the local node is not a Level 2 router, the response includes only remote nodesin the same OSI area as the local node and indicates which remote node is thedefault Level 2 router for the local node.The default Level 2 router is the node that the local node would rely on to route anOSI message outside the local NE’s own area. When there are multiple Level 2routers in the same area, not all nodes in the area would identify the same defaultLevel 2 router typically.

2. If the local node is a Level 2 router, user input dictates whether the responseincludes:

• only remote nodes in the same OSI area as the local node (as in #1 above) butindicating which of those remote nodes are Level 2 routers

• all remote nodes that are Level 2 routers across all OSI areas.

Thus, aRTRV-MAP-NETWORK command to one Level 2 router in each area, will identifyall nodes in a large network with IS-IS Level 2 Routing. OneRTRV-MAP-NETWORKcommand at time per area is recommended to avoid unnecessarily burdening thenetwork with many simultaneous or redundant TARP queries.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-47

Problem isolation

You can use TL1 commandRTRV-MAP-NEIGHBOR to help locate and resolve IS-ISLevel 2 Routing provisioning mistakes. This command highlights any neighbors thathave DCC enabled but do not have fully functional OSI communications. When thiscommand addressed to a reachable node with an unreachable neighbor, it identifies theNSAP area address and the Level 2 router status, if known, of the unreachableneighbor. The unreachable neighbor may simply have the wrong area address or bothnodes may need to be enabled as Level 2 routers.

The administrator must confirm that all IS-IS Level 2 Routing rules have beenfollowed to ensure successful OSI communications among the nodes in a network.There are no alarm or status conditions that will identify address inconsistency or alack of Level 2 routing capability, if these have not been configured properly.

System planning and engineering IS-IS Level 2 routing provisioning confirmation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-48 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Maximum number of OSI nodes...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Rules

The total number of nodes within a Level 1 area cannot exceed 250. When Level 2routing is enabled, 1665 DMXplore performs Level 1-2 routing as a single node withinthe Level 1 area total of 250.

Maximum number of nodes per area and OSI domain

The maximum number of nodes in a domain is determined by multiplying the numberof Level 2 routers by the maximum number of nodes per area, up to a maximum of 50areas, and a maximum total of 1000 nodes.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-49

Engineering rules and guidelines...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

To use IS-IS Level 2 Routing, the user must plan and engineer the provisioning ofLevel 2 routers and area addresses in the network.

The goal is to create a network with all nodes having OSI LAN or DCC connectivitywith each other so that access to all the nodes can be gained from any node in thenetwork.

Rules must be followed to assure OSI LAN and DCC message routing. Guidelines arerecommendations that add survivability in the event of a node, OSI LAN or DCCfailure. Rulesmustbe followed. Guidelinesshouldbe followed. There may becustomer applications that cannot adhere to some or all of the guidelines. In mostcases, the potential consequence is that a single failure would at least partially disruptoperations communications.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-50 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Rule: OSI LAN or DCC connectivity within an area

All nodes in an area must have OSI LAN or DCC connectivity within the area to allother nodes in the same area. Otherwise, the area would be segmented and messagerouting could not be expected to function properly. The following figure illustrates acorrect and an incorrect example of assigning nodes to areas.

Figure 6-10 Assigning areas

= NE Level 1 Router

= NE Level 2 Router

= DCC

= Area

nc-dmx-043

CORRECT

INCORRECT Both A and B are isolated

A B

System planning and engineering Engineering rules and guidelines

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-51

Rule: single Level 2 router sub-domain

All Level 2 routers must have OSI LAN or DCC connectivity, either directly orindirectly via other Level 2 routers, to all other Level 2 routers in the network to forma single Level 2 router sub-domain that provides connectivity to all areas. If more thanone Level 2 router sub-domain exists, the network becomes segmented and routing willnot function properly.

The following figure illustrates a correct and two incorrect examples of assigning aLevel 2 router sub-domains.

Figure 6-11 Assigning sub-domains

CORRECT

INCORRECT

INCORRECT

= NE Level 1 Router

= NE Level 2 Router = Level 2 Subdomain

= DCC

= Area

This Level 2 router subdomainand area are isolated

This area is isolated

nc-dmx-004


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-52 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Guideline: redundant routes within the Level 2 sub-domain

When practical, redundant routes in the Level 2 subdomain should be availablebetween all Level 2 routers to ensure that proper routing will occur in the event of asingle failure. To satisfy this guideline, every Level 2 router has at least two otherLevel 2 routers as direct neighbors.

The following figure illustrates a recommended example and an example that is notrecommended for redundant routes within the Level 2 subdomain:

Figure 6-12 Redundant routes with the Level 2 sub-domain

RECOMMENDED

NOT RECOMMENDED

= NE Level 1 Router

= NE Level 2 Router


= Level 2 Subdomain

= OSI LAN/WAN

= DCC

= Area

This Level 2 IS hasonly one neighboring

Level 2 IS

= SNMS

nc-dmx-045


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-53

Guideline: Level 2 router assignment in a ring

The recommended number of Level 2 routers in a ring may be one of the following:

• None

• One

• All nodes in the ring

• Two; for example, when dual-homing or dual ring interworking (DRI) is used.

The following figure illustrates examples of recommended Level 2 router assignmentsin various ring configurations.

Figure 6-13 Recommended Level 2 router assignments

No Level 2 routers

One Level 2 routerTwo adjacentLevel 2 routers (DRI)

Two adjacentLevel 2 routers

All Level 2 routers

nc-dmx-046

= NE Level 1 Router

= NE Level 2 Router


= SNMS

= OSI LAN/WAN

= DCC


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-54 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Guideline: Level 2 router area assignments in a ring

For a ring of Level 2 routers, the recommended area assignments may be one of thefollowing:

• All Level 2 routers are part of the same area.

• Each Level 2 router is part of a different area.

• A pair of adjacent Level 2 routers are in the same area (for example, withdual-homing or DRI), with either the other Level 2 routers similarly paired off orindividually in different areas.

The following figure illustrates examples of recommended Level 2 router areaassignments in a ring.

Figure 6-14 Recommended area assignments

= NE Level 1 Router

= NE Level 2 Router

= DCC

= AreaNC-DMX-047

same area different areas

different areas

dual homing


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-55

Guideline: adjacent Level 2 routers within an area

It is recommended that dual Level 2 routers in an area be adjacent to each other andhave a redundant route within the area. Failure to meet this guideline would result insome messages not being routed properly in the event of a single failure that dividesan area into two separate islands.

The following figure illustrates a recommended example and two examples that are notrecommended of dual Level 2 routers in an area:

Figure 6-15 Recommended placement of Level 2 routers

= NE Level 1 Router

= NE Level 2 Router

= DCC

= Areanc-dmx-048

If A or B sends a message to Zand there is a DCC failure between A and Z,routing will survive the failure.

RECOMMENDED

If A or B sends a message to Zand there is a DCC failure between A and Z,routing will not be successful.

NOT RECOMMENDED

Failure

If A or B sends a message to Zand there is a DCC failure between A and Z,routing will not be successful.

NOT RECOMMENDED

Failure

Failure

Z

B

A

Z

B

B A

Z

A


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-56 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Guideline: Lucent OMS own area address and Level 2 router

If Lucent OMS (or any other OS) access is via OSI LAN (or WAN), Lucent OMSshould be assigned to a different area and rely on a generic Level 2 router tocommunicate with a large network. (Lucent OMS is not expected to be a Level 2router itself.) This is recommended to avoid routing all messages to/from Lucent OMSthrough a single NE serving as a Level 2 router.

Although not shown in the examples below, Lucent OMS can support a second,redundant OSI LAN port. Each Lucent OMS OSI LAN port has its own unique NSAPbut both must be assigned the same area address.

The following figure illustrates a recommended example, an example that is notrecommended, and an incorrect example of Lucent OMS access via OSI LAN/WAN.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-57

Figure 6-16 Recommended Lucent OMS access via OSI LAN/WAN

nc-dmx-049

RECOMMENDED

Generic Level 2Router forOptical EMSinstead of an NE

NOT RECOMMENDED

INCORRECT

AllOptical EMSmessagesthrough thisone node

Optical EMShas a uniquearea address

but noLevel 2 router

= NE Level 1 Router

= NE Level 2 Router


= Optical EMS

= OSI LAN/WAN

= DCC

= Area


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-58 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Rule: Level 2 routers on an OSI LAN

If an OSI LAN (or WAN) is used to connect between areas, then at least one node ineach area on the OSI LAN must be provisioned to be a Level 2 router. Otherwise, theareas won’t route to each other via the OSI LAN.

The following figure illustrates a correct and an incorrect example of Level 2 routerassignments on an OSI LAN:

Figure 6-17 Level 2 router assignments on an OSI LAN

nc-dmx-050

CORRECT

INCORRECTThis area is isolated

= NE Level 1 Router

= NE Level 2 Router


= SNMS

= OSI LAN/WAN

= DCC

= Area


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

6-59

Guideline: OSI LAN redundancy

If an OSI LAN (or WAN) is the only method of connecting between areas, then atleast two Level 2 routers directly connected to the OSI LAN for each area arerecommended for redundancy purposes. A second, separate OSI LAN hub wouldprovide additional redundancy.

The following figure illustrates a recommended example for providing redundancybetween areas connected solely by OSI LANs:

Figure 6-18 OSI LAN redundancy

nc-dmx-051

RECOMMENDED

= NE Level 1 Router

= NE Level 2 Router


= Optical EMS

= OSI LAN/WAN

= DCC

= Area


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-60 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

7 7Ordering

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter contains information on ordering 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore (1665DMXplore) equipment and software. The information in this chapter tells you where togo for ordering information, and provides important sparing information and FIT ratesrelative to both circuit packs and other equipment.

Contents

Introduction 7-2

Engineering drawings 7-3

Software and documentation 7-4

Miscellaneous equipment and tools 7-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

7-1

Introduction...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Alcatel-Lucent has created a set of engineering drawings to facilitate the ordering of allproducts in the future. These drawings are updated for each planned Release, andcontain all of the information needed to order 1665 DMXplore equipment. Theinformation contained in the engineering drawings will not be duplicated here in theinterest of keeping all information current and consistent at all times. This chapterexplains how verify that you are using the most current version of the engineeringdrawing and where to order it.

Software and Documentation ordering information is not included in the engineeringdrawings and is therefore included in this chapter.

How to order

Equipment and software orders may be placed via Alcatel-Lucent’s online orderingprocess. For more information, contact your Account Executive.

Ordering

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Engineering drawings...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

In the interest of ensuring that ordering information is always consistent andup-to-date, Alcatel-Lucent has created a set of engineering drawing meant to contain allinformation needed to order a 1665 DMXplore system.

Where to obtain engineering drawings

Due to the fact that the engineering drawing is likely to be updated more frequentlythan the Applications and Planning Guide, the only way to order the most currentversion of the engineering drawing is from CIC.

Whenever ordering equipment, first ensure that you have the most current version ofED8C947-10. You may do so by contacting CIC through one of the methods detailedbelow.

How to order engineering drawings

The most up-to-date version of the Engineering drawing (ED8C947-10) may beobtained through CIC. There are 2 ways to obtain material from CIC.

If you are a Alcatel-Lucent employee and are on the Alcatel-Lucent internal web:

• Go to www.lucentdocs.com(www.lucentdocs.com) and follow the link forDrawings. Enter the drawing number in the proper field (ED8C947-10).

– Verify that the drawing you have is the same Issue number as the drawing onthe site.

– If it is not the same issue, follow the steps on the CIC web site for ordering anew drawing.

– If it is the same issue, the drawing is sufficient to help you configure an order.

• Contact CIC by phone: 1-888-582-3688

If you are an outside customer, contact CIC by phone: 1-888-582-3688 OR

• Go to http://www.lucent8.com/cgi-bin/CIC_store.cgi?

• Click on Drawings in the menu at the left of the screen.

• Enter the drawing number (ED8C947-10) in the field provided.

• Click on Search.

• Choose the media by which you wish to receive the drawing and purchase thedrawing.

Ordering

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

7-3

www.lucentdocs.com

www.lucentdocs.com

Software and documentation...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section provides Release 2.1 software ordering information.

Software ordering information

Listed below are some need-to-know items before ordering 1665 DMXplore software:

• Order one set of software for each shelf ordered. Software orders must be placed inaddition to the hardware order to receive software.

• It may be desirable to have backup CD-ROMs for all releases on hand for backupor initial downloading.

• The software ordering table includes cross-references to comcodes where available.

• The 1665 DMXplore software CD includes CIT software.

Available software

The following table lists the most recent 1665 DMXplore software that may beordered.

Table 7-1 Available software

Comcode ProductRelease

Description

109 650 903 R2.1.4 Metro DMXplore R2.1.4 Software InitialApplication

(NE software CD-ROM, SRD on CD-ROM,and customer documentation CD-ROM)

109 650 911 R2.1.4 Metro DMXplore R2.1.4 Software CD-ROM

(Spare Software CD-ROM)

109574103 R2.1.4 Metro DMXplore R2.1.4 Software R1.0Upgrade Application

109 650 937 R2.1.4 Metro DMXplore R2.1.4 Software R2.0Upgrade Application

109 650 945 R2.1.4 Metro DMXplore R2.1.4 Software R2.1.1Upgrade Application

Ordering

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Available documentation

The following table lists the documents included in the 1665 DMXplore documentationset.

Table 7-2 1665 DMXplore documentation set


NA 365-372-330 WaveStar® User Guide

109 454 066 365-372-331 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore Applications andPlanning Guide

109 572 214 365-372-332R2.1 Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer UserOperations Guide

109 572 222 365-372-333R2.1 Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer AlarmMessages and Trouble Clearing Guide

109 572 230 365-372-334R2.1 Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer InstallationManual

109 572 248 365-372-335R2.1 Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer TL1Message Details

109 650 895 NA Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer SoftwareRelease Description(CD-ROM)

109 650 887 NA Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer SoftwareRelease Description(Paper)

109 574 061 NA Metropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer Release 2.1Documents (CD-ROM)

Important! Use the telephone number for CIC: 1-888-582-3688 to obtain thecorrect comcodes for your desired documents.

Ordering Software and documentation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

7-5

Miscellaneous equipment and tools...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Lightguide build-outs

1665 DMXplore utilizes Alcatel-Lucent’s state-of-the-artAllWave ADVANTAGE TMFiber Optic Attenuators. These attenuators reduce optical power from the transmitterthat can otherwise result in over-saturation of the receiver, have low reflection to meetstringent system requirements, and are backward compatible with existing transmissionsystems. Unique to the AllWave ADVANTAGE optical connectivity solution (OCS),the newLC TM optic attenuators are designed to provide flat spectral loss across thefull spectrum. LC optical attenuators are ideal for networks deploying AllWave fiber,metropolitan networks, applications supported by conventional single-mode opticalfiber, multiservice network protocols, and DWDM networks.

Table 7-3, “Lightguide build-outs” (p. 7-6)lists the available LC-type lightguidebuildout attenuators for the 1665 DMXplore.

Table 7-3 Lightguide build-outs

Description Comcode

LC Build-Out Attenuators1

5 dB 108279381

10 dB 108279431

15 dB 108279480

20 dB 108279530

AllWave ADVANTAGETM Fiber OpticIdentification Kit2

108622929

Notes:

1. The LC buildout attenuators listed are polished connector (PC) style connectors at thefiber end. These attenuators must be used on the receive side in all cases.

2. The AllWave ADVANTAGE Fiber Optic Identification Kit includes labels for fiber opticapparatus products to identify Alcatel-Lucent AllWave Fiber paths. An instruction sheet isincluded with recommendations on how to install and use the labels.

Ordering

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Accessories

Table 7-4, “Miscellaneous accessories” (p. 7-7)lists the miscellaneous accessoriesavailable for 1665 DMXplore. This equipment may not be necessary at all locations. Itis to be used when the ports need to be verified for cleanliness. If care is exercisedwhen cleaning fibers, the video scope may not be needed.

Table 7-4 Miscellaneous accessories

Product Model/Description

Comcode ITE# InstallationOrder #

Optical FiberScope

Noyes OFS300-200X

408197028 ITE-7129 33712900

2.5mm UniversalAdapter Cap

For use with theNoyes OFS300-200X

408197044 ITE-7129D1 33712901

1.25mm UniversalAdapter Cap

For use with theNoyes OFS300-200X

408197069 ITE-7129D2 33712902

Video FiberScope1

Noyes VFS-1 TBD TBD TBD

Individual,presaturatedalcohol wipes

99% pureisopropyl alcohol

901375147 ITE-7136 33713600

CLETOPCleaning Cassette

Type A Reel 901375154 ITE-7137 33713700

CLETOPCleaning CassetteReplacement Reel

Type A Reel 901375014 ITE-7137 D1 33713701

Luminex Stickport cleaners

1.25 mm 901375030 ITE-7134 33713400


2.5 mm 901375022 ITE-7135 33713500


5.5″ x 5.5″ 408201226 R6033 23603300

Important! The equipment and material listed inTable 7-4, “Miscellaneousaccessories” (p. 7-7)has been tested and is proven effective. Substitution ofequipment or materials is at the discretion of the user and is not recommended.

Ordering Miscellaneous equipment and tools

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

7-7

SFP optics

1665 DMXplore utilizes small-form pluggable (SFP) optics on the VLNC30 packs. Toensure proper optical performance, mechanical fit, compliance with EMC, andcompliance with laser safety standards, the Alcatel-Lucent specified SFP transceiverslisted in the following table must be used.

Only the Alcatel-Lucent specified SFP transceivers listed below are compatible with1665 DMXplore software. If non-specified SFP transceivers are installed in 1665DMXplore, the system will reject that transceiver, and that optical port will becomeinoperable (until approved parts are installed).

Laser Safety CAUTION!

Use only the Alcatel-Lucent specified Class 1 transceiver listed inTable 7-5,“Approved SFP transceiver for VLNC30 ” (p. 7-8).

Table 7-5 Approved SFP transceiver for VLNC30

Apparatus Code Comcode Description Circuit Packs

100BASE-LX-I1 109527812 Optical FastEthernet SFP,LC-type connectors(FE-1310SM)

VLNC30

Ordering Miscellaneous equipment and tools

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

8 8Product support

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter describes the support services available to Alcatel-Lucent customers.

Alcatel-Lucent offers a number of services to assist customers with Engineering,Installation and Technical Support of their networks. Additionally, Alcatel-Lucent offersproduct-specific training courses.

Contents

Worldwide Services 8-2

Training 8-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

8-1

Worldwide Services...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Alcatel-Lucent Worldwide Services provides a full life-cycle of services and solutionsto help you plan, design, implement, and operate your network in today’s rapidlychanging and complex environment.

Engineering Services

Engineering Services provide information and technical support to customers duringthe planning, implementation, and placement of equipment into new or existingnetworks. We determine the best, most economical equipment solution for a customerand help ensure equipment is configured correctly for the customer’s network needs,works as specified, and is ready for installation on delivery. These services consist ofthe following:

• Equipment engineering

• Software engineering

• Site records

• Engineering consulting

• Additional engineering services (Network Realignment, System Capacity Planning,System Health Assessment, etc.)

Installation Services

Alcatel-Lucent offers Installation Services focused on providing the technical supportand resources customers need to efficiently and cost-effectively install their networkequipment. We offer a variety of options that provide extensive support and deliversuperior execution to help ensure the system hardware is installed, tested, andfunctioning as engineered and specified. Installation Services provides a completeflexible solution tailored to meet customers’ specific needs. These services consist ofthe following:

• Equipment installation

• Specialized equipment installation

• Network connectivity services

• Installation support services

Product support

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Technical Support

Alcatel-Lucent provides the following Technical Support Services:

• Remote Technical Support (RTS) - remote technical support to troubleshoot andresolve system problems.

• On-site Technical Support (OTS) - on-site assistance with operational issues andremedial maintenance.

• Repair and Replacement (R&R) - technical support services for equipmentrepair/return or parts replacement.

• Alcatel-Lucent On-Line Customer Support - online access to information andservices that can help resolve technical support requests.

Important! Technical Support Services are available 24 hours a day, 7 days aweek.

Customers inside the United States and Canada

Technical Support Services can be reached at1-866-582-3688: Prompt 1.

Customers outside the United States

Technical Support Services can be reached at+1-630-224-4672: Prompt 2.

Web-site

For additional information regarding Worldwide Services, refer to the Alcatel-Lucentweb-site athttp://www.alcatel-lucent.com/products(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/products)

1. Click onBrowse the catalog

2. Click onWorldwide Services Solutions

3. Select the desired service to display:

• Engineering and Installation

• Technical Support Services

Product support Worldwide Services

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

8-3

http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/products



Training...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Alcatel-Lucent offers a formal training curriculum to complement your product needs.

Registering for a course

To review the available courses or to enroll in a training course at one ofAlcatel-Lucent’s corporate training centers,

• Within the United States,

– Visit http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/Products(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/Products)

– Call 1-888-582-3688: Prompt 2.

• Outside the continental United States,

– Visit http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/Products(http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/Products)

– Contact your in-country training representative

– Call: +1-407-767-2798

– Fax:+1-407-767-2677

Suitcasing

To arrange for a suitcase session at your facility,

• Within the United States, call1-888-582-3688: Prompt 2.

• Outside the continental United States,

– Contact your in-country training representative

– Call: +1-407-767-2798

– Fax:+1-407-767-2677

Product support

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/wps/portal/Products






9 9Reliability and quality

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This chapter details reliability and quality information for 1665 Data MultiplexerExplore (1665 DMXplore).

Contents

Alcatel-Lucent’s Quality Policy 9-2

Reliability program and specifications 9-3

Failure rates 9-5

Sparing information 9-7

Sparing graph 9-8

International Standards Organization (ISO) certification 9-10

Warranty 9-11

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

9-1

Alcatel-Lucent’s Quality Policy...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Quality Policy

We will safeguard the customers’ trust by building the capability to execute flawlesslyon the promises we make.

Quality plan

This Alcatel-Lucent Quality Policy guided the development of 1665 DMXplore andwill continue affecting this product throughout its life cycle. The primary tool ensuringproduct quality is the Quality Plan.

Reliability and quality

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Reliability program and specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The reliability program provides enhanced reliability and is implemented as an integralpart of the Alcatel-Lucent Process Management Architecture (PMA) process. Thereliability program is comprehensive, and includes activities such as setting andensuring compliance with customer-focused system-reliability requirements, ensuringcomponent qualification is consistent with use environment and system design, assuringsatisfactory component-attachment reliability, predicting failure rates of FieldReplaceable Units (FRUs), making sparing recommendations, assessing reliabilityarchitecture, modeling system reliability, assuring satisfactory system-downtimeperformance, reducing hardware failure rates through Environmental Stress Testing(EST), and tracking field returns.

Design and development

During the design and development stage, reliability predictions, qualification andselection of components, definition of quality assurance audit standards, andprototyping of critical areas of the system ensure built-in reliability.

Manufacturing and field deployment

During manufacturing and field deployment, techniques such as environmental stresstesting, production quality audits, field-return tracking, failure-mode analysis, andfeedback and corrective-action further enhance the ongoing reliability improvementefforts on 1665 DMXplore.

Environmental Stress Testing (EST)

1665 DMXplore circuit packs are subjected to an Environmental Stress Testing (EST)program. The purpose of the program is to improve reliability by reducing early lifefailures and implementing root-cause analysis and corrective action on circuit packsthat fail EST.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

9-3

Transmission downtime

1665 DMXplore satisfies a stringent set of reliability specifications. Some of thecritical specifications include Telcordia Technologies downtime requirements andobjectives for multiplexers. Telcordia Technologies requirements state that thedowntime of a two-way channel within a SONET multiplexer, due to hardware failure,must be less than 1.75 minutes per year in a Central Office (CO) environment and 5.25minutes per year in a Remote Terminal (RT) environment. The correspondingobjectives for these parameters are 0.25 minutes per year in a CO environment and0.75 minutes per year in an RT environment. These requirements and objectives appearin Telcordia Technologies GR-418-CORE.

These requirements and objectives apply to all system elements needed to process atwo-way channel, including the core system as well as the high-speed and low-speedinterfaces. System-reliability analysis employing Markov modeling is used to determinethe system downtimes. As specified in Telcordia Technologies GR-418-CORE, thisanalysis assumes a mean time to repair of 2 hours for the CO environment and 4 hoursfor the RT environment. Individual Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) failure rates used inthe model were determined using the method described in Telcordia TechnologiesSR-332,Reliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment (RPP). FRUs aresystem elements that can be replaced in the field, including items such as circuit packs,removable optical interfaces, housings, cooling units, and removable LEDs.

Reliability and quality Reliability program and specifications

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Failure rates...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Circuit pack failure rates

Table 9-1, “Circuit Pack Failure Rates” (p. 9-5)provides failure-rate predictions for allcircuit packs available through R2.1. These failure rates were determined per TelcordiaSR-332. System-inlet air of 25°C is assumed in the predictions for the COenvironment. Failure-rate predictions are estimates; actual values may vary.

Table 9-1 Circuit Pack Failure Rates


Slot(s) Release Failure Ratein CO (FIT)

Failure Ratein RT (FIT)

System Controller(SYSCTL)

VLNC1 CTL 1.0 3954 7980

Hi-Cap Shelf I/Oboard

VLIU10 VLIU 3.0 321 642

OC-3/16DS1 combopack(1 OC-3 port)

VLNC6 MAIN1,MAIN2

1.0 6321 12642

OC-3/16DS1/2DS3combo pack (1 OC-3port)

VLNC5 MAIN1,MAIN2

1.01 9185 18370

OC-12/16DS1combo pack(1OC-12 port)

VLNC26 MAIN1,MAIN2

2.0 9395 18790

OC-12/16DS1/2DS3combo pack (1OC-12 port)

VLNC25 MAIN1,MAIN2

2.0 9382 18764

Fast Ethernet PrivateLine (10/100 Mbps)


2.0 4473 8946

100BASE-LX/10/100BASE-TXPrivate Line


2.1 5114 10228

100BASE-LXSFP Optics

TBS TBS

Important! The FIT rates listed inTable 9-1, “Circuit Pack Failure Rates” (p. 9-5)are subject to change.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

9-5

Equipment failure rates

Table 9-2, “Equipment failure rates” (p. 9-6)provides the steady-state equipmentfailure rates for 1665 DMXplore Fan Unit. The Fan Unit is only used in therack-mount version of the 1665 DMXplore shelf. The wall-mount version of the 1665DMXplore shelf is convection cooled and does not require a fan unit.

Table 9-2 Equipment failure rates

Equipment Failure Rate in CO (FIT) Failure Rate in RT (FIT)

Fan unit (Rack mountshelf)

TBS TBS

Rack mount shelf assembly 226 452

Wall mount shelf assembly 244 488

-48VDC Power Supply(Mascot AS Type 2025)

9460 NA

VLIU10 TBS TBS

Reliability and quality Failure rates

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Sparing information...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section provides guidelines and a procedure to determine the number of sparesneeded at each location. The number of spares for each field replaceable unit (FRU)must be determined and maintained separately, based on that FRU’s in-servicepopulation at each given location.

Lead time

Lead time, or turnaround time is the elapsed time between a known FRU failure at agiven service location and the arrival of a repaired (or new) FRU at the location wherespare circuit packs are stocked to maintain a spare FRU level consistent with thepopulation in service.

Important! The number of spares for each code must be determined andmaintained separately, based on the in-service population of the code at eachlocation.

Lead time should not be confused with mean time to repair, which is the elapsedtime between discovery of the failure of an in-service FRU and when areplacement is put into service.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

9-7

Sparing graph...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

This section provides guidelines and a procedure to determine the number of sparesneeded at each location. The number of spares for each circuit pack or port unit codemust be determined and maintained separately, based on that code’s in-servicepopulation at each given location.

Using the sparing graph

Use the following procedure to determine how many spare circuit packs, port units, orother pieces of equipment are required for each code at each location to maintain99.9% service continuity, given a ten day lead time.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Locate the failure rate for the unit under consideration using the tables above.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 ReferFigure 9-1, “Sparing graph for a 10-day lead time” (p. 9-9)and select the curvethat represents the nearest failure rate. Interpolation may be necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the curve until it intersects the vertical line that represents the number of unitsin service at the given location. Interpolation may be necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Refer to the horizontal line immediately above the intersection. The number associatedwith this line is the minimum number of spares recommended for that location.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Repeat steps 1-4 for each circuit pack, port unit, and type of equipment listed in thetables above.

Example of using the graph If there are 100 VLNC5 OC-3 OLIUs (failure rate of9350) in service at a given location and your lead time is 10 days, then you shouldorder and stock 4 spare OC-3 OLIUs port units for that location.

Sparing graph for a 10-day lead time

Use the graph below to plan the number of spares necessary for the circuit packsand equipment used in 1665 DMXplore.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 9-1 Sparing graph for a 10-day lead time

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

1 2 3 10 20 30 102 103

1098

765

43

2

1

Nu

mb

er

of C

ircu

it P

ack

/Eq

uip

me

nt S

pa

res

Number of Circuit Pack/Equipment in Service

CP FITs (in thousands)

wbwm 07001.eps

104 2x104

Reliability and quality Sparing graph

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

9-9

International Standards Organization (ISO) certification...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Various business units within Alcatel-Lucent have been certified to ISO 9001 and TL9000 in past years. Alcatel-Lucent is in the process of moving to one qualitymanagement system for the entire company. The first phase of the One LucentManagement System (LMS) achieved TL 9000 certification in 2004; work continues toincorporate all Alcatel-Lucent businesses into this system. Management anddevelopment of the 1665 DMXplore products is planned to be incorporated into LMSand thus TL 9000.

ISO 9001

TL 9000 is a telecommunications industry-specific set of requirements andmeasurements for software, hardware and services. TL 9000 is built on existingindustry standards, including ISO 9001. Conformance to TL 9000 constitutesconformance to corresponding ISO 9001 requirements. TL 9000 consolidates variousindustry requirements and customer requests for measurements; it reduces problemscaused by multiple requirements and audits; and it standardizes reporting and use ofsupplier performance data via defined measurements. TL 9000 requireswell-documented and implemented controls for design development, production,delivery, installation, and service. Its purpose is to ensure manufacturers produceproducts with consistently high levels of quality and service.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Warranty...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Hardware warranty

Alcatel-Lucent provides a one year hardware warranty on 1665 DMXplore, effectivefrom the date the unit is shipped.

Alcatel-Lucent provides two contacts for hardware failure emergencies. The Repair andReturn line is to be used whenever a piece of equipment has failed to the point that itrequires repairs, or must be replaced. The only times the Hot Line is to be used is inthe event of a service outage or during the initial installation and turn-up of 1665DMXplore.

• Repair and Return: 1-800-255-1402

• Emergency Hot Line: 1-800-689-6757

Alcatel-Lucent also provides one year of access to LWS On-Line Customer Supportweb-site (http://www.lucent.com/solutions/lws.html). Any 3rd- party vendor warrantyterms will be pass-through from original vendor.

Software warranty

Alcatel-Lucent offers a 90 day warranty for defect resolution. All warranties pertain tothe deployment of a release and do not apply to individual software licenses. For morewarranty information, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.

Alcatel-Lucent’s warranty on any software release will not exceed 90 days for defectresolution. All warranties pertain to the deployment of a release and do not apply toindividual software licenses.

For more warranty information, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

9-11

10 10Technical specifications

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section contains the technical specifications for the 1665 Data MultiplexerExplore (1665 DMXplore).

Contents

Physical specifications 10-3

Safety instructions 10-4

Interface standards 10-8


Environmental specifications 10-10


Electrical interfaces 10-13

DS1 (VLNC5, VLNC6, VLNC25, VLNC26) 10-14

DS3 (VLNC5 and VLNC25, 2 ports) 10-16

10/100T (10/100 Mbps) Ethernet (VLNC15 and VLNC30) 10-17

Optical interfaces 10-19

OC-3 OLIU (VLNC5 and VLNC6) 10-20


SONET optical specifications: OC-12 OLIUs 10-22


10/100T (100BASE-T)/ Fast Ethernet (100BASE-LX) Optical EthernetPrivate Line (VLNC30)

10-28

100BASE-LX optical Ethernet specification 10-29

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-1

Lightguide jumpers and build-outs 10-32

System performance 10-33

SONET overhead bytes 10-34

Wander/Jitter 10-35

Signal performance 10-36



Transient performance 10-39

Transmission delay 10-40

Operations Interfaces 10-41

Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) 10-42

TL1/LAN 10-44

Personal computer specifications for software download 10-45

LEDs, indicators, and office alarms 10-46


Technical specifications Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Physical specifications

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section provides 1665 DMXplore physical characteristics, including environmentaland power specifications.

Contents

Safety instructions 10-4

Interface standards 10-8


Environmental specifications 10-10


Technical specifications

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-3

Safety instructions...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Save these safety instructions

READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL INSTRUCTIONS.

When installing, operating, or maintaining this equipment, always follow basic safetyprecautions to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, includingthe following:

1. Read and understand all instructions.

2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on this product.

3. Operate this product only from the type of power sources that are indicated on themarking label.

4. Connect this product only to the type of power sources recommended byAlcatel-Lucent. For information on the powering instructions, consult theMetropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer Installation Manual, 365-372-334.

5. This equipment is suitable for mounting on a concrete or other noncombustiblesurface only. For information on proper mounting instructions, consult theMetropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer Installation Manual, 365-372-334

6. Install only equipment identified in theMetropolis® DMXplore Access MultiplexerInstallation Manual, 365-372-334. Use of other equipment may result in improperconnection of circuitry leading to fire or injury to persons.

7. Ensure that all metallic telecommunication interfaces (traffic ports) that leave thebuilding premises are connected to telecommunication devices that provide primaryand secondary protection, as applicable.

8. Do not use this product near water; for example, in a wet basement.

9. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may falland cause serious damage to the product.

10. Use caution when installing or modifying telecommunications lines.

11. Never install telecommunications wiring during a lightning storm.

12. Never install telecommunications connections in wet locations.

13. Never touch uninsulated telecommunications wires or terminals unless thetelecommunications line has been disconnected at the network interface.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intendedto alert the user to the presence of important operating andmaintenance (servicing) instructions in the literatureaccompanying this product.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

14. Never touch uninsulated wiring or terminals carrying direct current or ringingcurrent, and never leave this wiring exposed. Protect and tape uninsulated wiringand terminals to avoid risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to service personnel.

15. Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touchdangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire orelectrical shock. Never spill liquids of any kind on the product.

16. To protect the unit from overheating, slots and openings in the unit are provided forventilation. Do not block or cover these openings. Do not place this product in abuilt-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

17. To reduce the risk of an electrical shock, do not disassemble this product. Serviceshould be performed by trained personnel only. Opening or removing covers and/orcircuit boards may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrectreassembly can cause electrical shock when the unit is subsequently used.

18. Some of the 1665 DMXplore family hardware modules contain FDA/CDRH ClassI/IEC Class 1 single-mode laser products that are enclosed lightwave transmissionsystems.Under normal operating conditions, lightwave transmission systems are completelyenclosed; however, the following precautions must be observed because of thepotential for eye damage:

• Do not stare directly into the optical connectors terminating the cables.

• Ensure that technicians have satisfactorily completed an approved trainingcourse before performing lightwave/lightguide operations.

• Do not use optical instruments such as an eye loupe to view a fiber orunterminated connector.

More information about laser safety can be found in theMetropolis® DMXploreAccess Multiplexer Installation Manual, 365-372-334.

19. For a unit intended to be powered from -48 VDC or 24VDC voltage sources, readand understand the following:

• Use only Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) -48 VDC or 24VDC sources.

• Disconnect up to two power supply connections when removing power from thesystem.

• Provide a readily accessible disconnect device as part of the buildinginstallation.

• Ensure that there is no exposed wire when the input power cables are connectedto the unit.

• Include an independent frame ground drop to building ground. Refer to theMetropolis® DMXplore Access Multiplexer Installation Manual, 365-372-334.

Technical specifications Safety instructions

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-5

This electrical ground symbol is marked on the product, adjacent to the ground(earth) area for the connection of the ground (earth) conductor.

• This equipment is to be installed only in Restricted Access Areas on Businessand Customer Premises Applications in Accordance with Articles 110-16,110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70. Otherinstallations exempt from the enforcement of the National Electrical Code maybe engineered according to the accepted practices of the localtelecommunications utility.

20. For a unit intended to be powered from 100-120/200-240 V AC voltage sources,read and understand the following:

• Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquidcleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

• Do not staple or otherwise attach the power supply cord to the buildingsurfaces.

• Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk offire or electrical shock.

• Install the socket outlet near the equipment so that it is readily accessible.

• This product is equipped with a three-wire grounding type plug, a plug having athird (grounding) pin. This plug is intended to fit only into a grounding typepower outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug intothe outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeatthe safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Do not use a 3-to-2-prongadapter at the receptacle. Use of this type adapter may result in risk of electricalshock and/or damage to this product.

• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this productwhere the cord may be abused by persons walking on it.

21. Unplug this product from the wall outlet, and refer servicing to qualified servicepersonnel under the following conditions:

• When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed

• If liquid has been spilled into the product

• If the product has been exposed to rain or water

• If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions(Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructionsbecause improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and willoften require extensive work by qualified technician to restore the product tonormal operation.)

• If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged

• If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product

Collect and treat electronic products bearing or referencing the following symbol,within the European Union, at the end of their useful life in compliance withapplicable European Union and local legislation. Do not dispose of these products aspart of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained in theproduct, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human health may benegatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.

Note : In the European Union, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicatesthat the product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.

Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, whereapplicable, Alcatel-Lucent provides for the collection and treatment of Alcatel-Lucentproducts at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent also provides for the collectionand treatment of existing products that have been displaced by Alcatel-Lucentequipment.

For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for moreinformation regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contactyour Alcatel-Lucent account manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support [email protected].


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-7

Interface standards...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Transmission interface standards

Table 10-1, “Transmission interface standards” (p. 10-8)lists the transmission interfacestandards for electrical, optical, and Ethernet interfaces.

Table 10-1 Transmission interface standards

Interface Standard Comments

DS1 ANSI T1.231-1997 B8ZS/AMI option, SF/ESF

DS3 GR-499-CORE, Issue 2,1998

VMR, VM, or clearchannel

OC-3/OC-12 GR-253-CORE, Issue 3,2000

NA

GR-496-CORE, Issue 1,1998


ANSI T1.231-1997


VMR, VM, or clearchannel (DS3)

NA

100BASE-TX,100BASE-LX,1000BASE-T

IEEE 802.3 NA

IEEE 802.1D and 802.1Q

ITU G.7041, ITU G.707


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Physical specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Wall-mount shelf

The 1665 DMXplore wall-mount shelf has the following characteristics:

• Width: 7.5 inches (190mm)

• Height: 10.5 inches (267mm)

• Depth: 12.0 inches (304.8mm)

Rack-mount shelf

The 1665 DMXplore rack-mount shelf has the following characteristics:

• Width: 17.3 inches (439mm), including integral fan unit


• Depth (front to back): 13.5 inches (343mm)

High Capacity rack-mount shelf

The 1665 DMXplore High Capacity rack-mount shelf has the following characteristics:

• Width: 17.4 inches (441mm), including integral fan unit


• Depth (front to back): 11.8 inches (300mm)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-9

Environmental specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Temperature and humidity

1665 DMXplore is environmentally (OSP, Outside Plant) hardened and will function attemperatures of −40°C to +65°C and humidity of 5 to 95 percent (non-condensing) inall TDM applications when equipped with either the VLNC5, VLNC6, VLNC15,VLNC25, VLNC26, and VLNC30 circuit pack.

Therefore, the 1665 DMXplore shelf meets Telcordia Technologies’ NetworkEquipment Building System (NEBS Generic Equipment Requirements, GR-63-CORE)requirements for use in CO environments.

Important! Minimum airflow requirement of 200 fpm is required in OSPapplications.

EMI compliance

1665 DMXplore complies with the limits for a Class A device, in accordance with Part15 of the FCC rules and Telcordia GR-1089-CORE. These limits provide reasonableprotection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in acommercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiateradio-frequency energy. This equipment must be installed and operated in accordancewith the instruction manual, to avoid interference to radio communications. Thisequipment is not designed for installation in a residence location. The user assumesresponsibility for EMI interference, resulting from improper installation.

Earthquake requirements

1665 DMXplore meets the earthquake requirements defined in Telcordia TechnologiesGR-63-CORE and Pacific Bell Standard PBS-000-102PT.

Fire resistance

1665 DMXplore meets flammability requirements specified inANSIT1.307-1997. Inaddition, the 1665 DMXplore meets the fire resistance requirements ofUL 60950, 3rdEdition and Telcordia GR-63, Issue 2, April 2002.

Safety

1665 DMXplore complies with CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-00, and UL60950-00 Safety ofinformation technology equipment.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

1665 DMXplore isUL recognized for restricted access installations in business andcustomer premises applications installed in accordance with Articles 110-16 and 110-17of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA Number 70-87. Other installations, exemptfrom the requirements of the National Electric Code, may be engineered according tothe accepted practices of the local telecommunications utility.

Canadian Standards Association

1665 DMXplore has been certified by the Canadian Standards Association per standardCAN/CSA-C22.2 Number 60950-00.

Technical specifications Environmental specifications

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-11

Power specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power supply

Table 6-3, “1665 DMXplore Power supply requirements” (p. 6-14)lists 1665DMXplore power requirements.

1665 DMXplore uses on-board power conversion eliminating the need for slots forbulk power converters. Two independent −48VDC office power feeders (A and B)enter the shelf through a terminal block and are filtered and distributed to the circuitpacks. Power conversion is performed via modular power converters located on thecircuit packs. Within each circuit pack, the two power feeds are fused, filtered, andconnected to the board-mounted power modules through diodes that provide anelectrical “OR” connection. This provides the required redundancy in case of the lossof one feeder. The two green power LEDs are located to the left of the input powerterminal block.

Current drains

1665 DMXplore has the following current drain requirements.

• Wall-Mount shelf: 1.25 Amps (maximum at -48VDC)

• Rack-Mount shelf: 1.5 Amps (maximum at -48VDC)

• High Capacity Rack-Mount shelf: 2.5 Amps (maximum at -48VDC)

Heat dissipation

The heat dissipation of 1665 DMXplore is 60 watts.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-12 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Electrical interfaces

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section contains the technical specifications for the low-speed electrical interfaces.

Contents

DS1 (VLNC5, VLNC6, VLNC25, VLNC26) 10-14

DS3 (VLNC5 and VLNC25, 2 ports) 10-16

10/100T (10/100 Mbps) Ethernet (VLNC15 and VLNC30) 10-17


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-13

DS1 (VLNC5, VLNC6, VLNC25, VLNC26)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

The DS1 low-speed interface transmits and receives a standard electrical DS1 signal asspecified in GR-499-CORE (1.544 Mb/s nominal rate, DSX-1 interconnectspecification). Line coding is provisioned per DS1 port to alternate mark inversion(AMI) or AMI with bipolar 8-zero substitution (B8ZS).

Format specification

The VLNC5/6/25/26 framing format can be set to SF, ESF, and UF (unframed) for theDS1 ports.

Alarms

The following parameters are monitored on the VLNC5/6/25/26 DS1 interfaces:

• Loss of signal (LOS)

• Loss of frame (LOF)

• Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

• Bit error rate threshold (BER) based on line coding violations (CV-L)

The alarm level for the monitored parameters can be provisioned to critical (CR),major (MJ), minor (MN), or status. B8ZS and AMI coding violation failure thresholdscan be set by the user to 10-3, 10-6, 10-7, 10-8.

DS1 transmission length

When transmitting DS1 signals to a DSX panel, the Approximate Span Length is 655feet.

Loopbacks

The following loopbacks are supported on the VLNC5/6/25/26 interfaces:

• Per-port DS1 facility loopback

• Per-port DS1 terminal loopback


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-14 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Line build-outs (LBOs)

Line build-outs are software-provisionable. The maximum distance depends on thecable type. The maximum cable length for DS1 lines is 655 feet.

Table 10-2 DS3/EC1 cable lengths

Cable type LBO in LBO out

728A/B 0-225 ft. 225-450 ft.

735A 0-112 ft. 112-225 ft.


For a detailed list of PM parameters and thresholds, refer to“DS1 performancemonitoring parameters” (p. 5-39)in Chapter 5, “Operations, administration,maintenance, and provisioning”.

Technical specifications DS1 (VLNC5, VLNC6, VLNC25, VLNC26)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-15

DS3 (VLNC5 and VLNC25, 2 ports)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Electrical specification (DS3)

The low-speed DS3 interfaces transmit/receive a standard electrical DS3 signal asspecified in GR-499-CORE, Section 9 (44.736 Mb/s rate, DSX-3 interconnectspecification, bipolar 3-zero substitution (B3ZS) encoding). However, the signal doesnot have to contain a standard DS3 frame.

DS3 transmission length

When transmitting DS3 signals to a DSX panel, the Approximate Span Length is 450feet.


For a detailed list of PM parameters and thresholds, refer to“DS3 performancemonitoring parameters” (p. 5-45)in Chapter 5, “Operations, administration,maintenance, and provisioning”.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-16 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10/100T (10/100 Mbps) Ethernet (VLNC15 and VLNC30)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VLNC15

The VLNC15 circuit packs provides a 4-port, 100BASE-TX, IEEE 802.3-compliantinterface that is capable of spanning distances of 100 meters. The 10/100BASE-TXport performs protocol-transparent filtering and bridging of incoming media accesscontrol (MAC) frames. MAC frames with a destination address on the local bus arefiltered by the VLNC15 circuit packs to prevent unnecessary transmission of framesover the wide area network (WAN). The VLNC15 interface auto-negotiates mode(full/half duplex) and speed (10/100 Mbps) when interfacing with other802.3-compliant devices over twisted pair media. The VLNC15 circuit packs is notequipment protected. However, facility protection can be provided through the WANvia SONET (UPSR, or 1+1).

VLNC30

The VLNC30 circuit packs provide four 100BASE-TX, IEEE 802.3-compliantelectrical interfaces that are capable of spanning distances of 100 meters. The VLNC30also provides two optical 100BASE-LX IEEE 802.3-compliant (100 Mbps) fastEthernet interfaces that are capable of spanning distances of 10,000 meters. The10/100T port performs protocol transparent filtering and bridging of incoming mediaaccess control (MAC) frames. MAC frames with a destination address on the local busare filtered by the 10/100T circuit packs to prevent unnecessary transmission of framesover the wide area network (WAN). The 10/100T interface auto-negotiates mode(full/half duplex) and speed (10/100 Mbps) when interfacing with other802.3-compliant devices over twisted pair media. The VLNC30 circuit pack must behoused in slot 1 of Function Unit C and is not equipment protected. However, facilityprotection can be provided through the WAN via SONET (UPSR, BLSR, or 1+1)and/or through the IEEE 802.1W spanning tree algorithm.

Optical specification (VLNC30 only)

The VLNC30 utilizes 100BASE-LX SFP optics. These SFP optics can be ordered andplugged into the VLNC30 as their capacity becomes needed. Refer the sections entitled“100BASE-LX optical Ethernet specification” (p. 10-29)and“Allowed optics”(p. 10-28)for the detailed specifications of these optics.


The 10/100T circuit packs comply with the following formatting standards:

• Maximum frame size, including any added VLAN tags, is 1536 bytes

• standard IEEE 802.1Q VLANs


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-17

• Ethernet to SONET Mapping, (G.7041 (GFP) and G.707 (Virtual Concatenation)

• Protection (SONET and/or 802.1W) and Ethernet Bridging (802.1D)


For a detailed list of PM parameters and thresholds, refer to“Ethernet performancemonitoring parameters” (p. 5-58)in Chapter 5, “Operations, administration,maintenance, and provisioning”.

Technical specifications 10/100T (10/100 Mbps) Ethernet (VLNC15 and VLNC30)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-18 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Optical interfaces

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section contains technical specifications for the 1665 DMXplore optical interfaces.

Contents





10/100T (100BASE-T)/ Fast Ethernet (100BASE-LX) Optical EthernetPrivate Line (VLNC30)

10-28

100BASE-LX optical Ethernet specification 10-29

Lightguide jumpers and build-outs 10-32


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-19

OC-3 OLIU (VLNC5 and VLNC6)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

The OC-3 optics meet or exceed SONET OC-3, long-reach specifications (SONETLR-1 DFB). The distributed feedback (DFB) laser transmitter supplies a 1310 nm,scrambled non-return-to-zero (NRZ) coded signal (155.52 Mb/s).

The VLNC5 and VLNC6 long-reach OC-3 interface supports span lengths up to 55 kmand is OSP hardened. Refer to“SONET optical specifications: OC-3 OLIUs”(p. 10-25)in this chapter for detailed system, transmitter, receiver, and link budgetspecifications.

Alarms

The following parameters are monitored on the OC-3 interface:

• LOS

• LOF

• AIS-L

• RFI-L (FERF)

• Signal degrade (BER)

• Signal fail (BER)


SONET section, line, and path performance monitoring complies with the standardsoutlined in GR-253-CORE. For a detailed list of PM parameters and thresholds, referto “OC-N performance parameters” (p. 5-55)in Chapter 5, “Operations, administration,maintenance, and provisioning”.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-20 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

OC-12 OLIU (VLNC25 and VLNC26)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Optical specification

The OC-12 optics meet or exceed SONET OC-12, long-reach specifications (SONETLR-1 DFB). The distributed feedback (DFB) laser transmitter supplies a 1310 nm,scrambled non-return-to-zero (NRZ) coded signal (622.08 Mb/s).

The VLNC25 and VLNC26 long-reach OC-12 interface supports span lengths up to 53km and is OSP hardened. Refer to“SONET optical specifications: OC-12 OLIUs”(p. 10-22)in this chapter for detailed system, transmitter, receiver, and link budgetspecifications.

Alarms

The following parameters are monitored on the OC-12 interface:

• LOS

• LOF

• AIS-L

• RFI-L (FERF)

• Signal degrade (BER)

• Signal fail (BER).


SONET section, line, and path performance monitoring complies with the standardsoutlined in GR-253-CORE. For a detailed list of PM parameters and thresholds, referto “OC-N performance parameters” (p. 5-55)in Chapter 5, “Operations, administration,maintenance, and provisioning”.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-21

SONET optical specifications: OC-12 OLIUs...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The following tables present the optical specifications for the OC-12 VLNC25 andVLNC26 OLIUs.

System specifications

Table 10-3, “SONET optical system specifications” (p. 10-22)lists the VLNC25 andVLNC26 OLIU system specifications.

Table 10-3 SONET optical system specifications

System Information VLNC25 and VLNC26

Optical Line Rate 622.08 Mb/s

Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ

Optical Wavelength 1310 nm

Performance SONET LR-1 (Long Reach)

Temperature Range OSP Hardened

Transmitter specifications

Table 10-4, “SONET optical transmitter information” (p. 10-22)lists the VLNC25 andVLNC26 OLIU transmitter information.

Table 10-4 SONET optical transmitter information

Transmitter Info. VLNC25 and VLNC26

Optical Device Temperature Controller None

FDA Classification Class I

Optical Source Distributed Feed-Back (DFB) Laser

Faceplate Optical Connector LC connector


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-22 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Receiver specifications

Table 10-5, “SONET optical receiver information” (p. 10-23)lists the VLNC25 andVLNC26 OLIU receiver information.

Table 10-5 SONET optical receiver information

Receiver Information VLNC25 and VLNC26

Optical Detector InGaAsP PIN


Link budgets

The following table lists the VLNC25 and VLNC26 OLIU link budgets.

Table 10-6 SONET optical specifications and link budgets

Parameter VLNC25 and VLNC26 1

OC-12 LR-1

Minimum Wavelength 1280 nm

Maximum Wavelength 1335 nm

Maximum Spectral Width (Dl20) 1.0 nm

Minimum Side Mode Suppression Ratio(SSMR)

30 dB

Maximum RMS Spectral Width(s) NA

Maximum Transmitter Power +2.0 dBm

Minimum Transmitter Power -2.5 dBm

Maximum Received Power (1x10-12 BER) -7.0 dBm

Minimum Received Power (1x10-12 BER) -30.5 dBm

Minimum System Gain2 28.0 dB

Optical Path Penalty3 1.0 dB

Connector Loss4 1.5 dB

Unallocated Margin5 1.5 dB

Minimum Loss Budget 9.0 dB

Maximum Loss Budget6 24.0 dB

Approximate Span Length7 53 km

Technical specifications SONET optical specifications: OC-12 OLIUs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-23

Notes:

1. All terminology consistent with GR-253-CORE, Issue 3. All values given are worst-caseend-of-life (EOL). Optical specifications meet or exceed equivalent GR-253-CORErequirements.

2. The System Gain includes connector loss at the transmitter and receiver points S and R inGR-253-CORE, Issue 3.

3. Optical path penalty includes effects of dispersion, reflection, and jitter that occur on theoptical path. The optical path penalty for 1310 nm optics is 1.0 dB maximum.

4. One additional connector (0.75 dB) on each end is assumed to connect station cable tooutside plant.

5. Additional unallocated margin, or safety margin, can be 0-3 dB. Typically, a 1.5 dB valueis assumed.

6. For all packs where the Minimum Loss Budget (MLB) is 0, no attenuator is required forloopbacks. For all packs where the MLB is greater than 0, an attenuator is required. Thevalue of the LBO must be equal to or greater than the MLB. The MLB is found inTable10-6, “SONET optical specifications and link budgets” (p. 10-23).

7. The approximate span length values are calculated per an attenuation assumption. As ageneral rule, for attenuation-limited systems, an attenuation of 0.45 dB/km is used for1310 nm optics. This estimate includes typical cable loss (0.40 dB/km) and up to 11splice losses (0.2 dB per splice). For 1310 nm OC-12 systems, dispersion is not a limitingfactor, and the applications are attenuation-limited. Approximate Span Lengths can becalculated more precisely based on particular fiber and splice characteristics and localengineering rules.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-24 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

SONET optical specifications: OC-3 OLIUs...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The following tables present the optical specifications for the OC-3 VLNC5 andVLNC6 OLIUs.


The following table lists the VLNC5 and VLNC6 OLIU system specifications.

Table 10-7 SONET optical system specifications

System Information VLNC5 and VLNC6

Optical Line Rate 155.52 Mb/s

Optical Line Coding Scrambled NRZ

Optical Wavelength 1310 nm

Performance SONET LR-1 (Long Reach)

Temperature Range OSP Hardened


The following table lists the VLNC5 and VLNC6 OLIU transmitter information.

Table 10-8 SONET optical transmitter information

Transmitter Info. VLNC5 and VLNC6

Optical Device Temperature Controller None

FDA Classification Class I

Optical Source Distributed Feed-Back (DFB) Laser/ FabryPerot (FP)



The following table lists the VLNC5 and VLNC6 OLIU receiver information.

Table 10-9 SONET optical receiver information


Optical Detector InGaAsP PIN


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-25

Table 10-9 SONET optical receiver information (continued)



Link budgets

The following table lists the VLNC5 and VLNC6 OLIU link budgets.

Table 10-10 SONET optical specifications and link budgets

Parameter VLNC5 and VLNC6 1

OC-3 LR-1

Minimum Wavelength 1280 nm

Maximum Wavelength 1335 nm

Maximum Spectral Width (Dl20) 1.0 nm

Maximum RMS Spectral Width(s) NA

Minimum Side Mode Suppression Ratio(SSMR)

30 dB

Maximum Transmitter Power 0.0 dBm

Minimum Transmitter Power -5.0 dBm

Maximum Received Power (1x10-12 BER) 0.0 dBm

Minimum Received Power (1x10-12 BER) -34.0 dB

Minimum System Gain2 29.0 dB

Optical Path Penalty3 1.0 dB

Connector Loss4 1.5 dB

Unallocated Margin5 1.5 dB

Minimum Loss Budget 0.0 dB

Maximum Loss Budget6 25.0

Approximate Span Length7 55 km

Notes:

1. All terminology consistent with GR-253-CORE, Issue 3. All values given are worst-caseend-of-life (EOL). Optical specifications meet or exceed equivalent GR-253-CORErequirements.

2. The System Gain includes connector loss at the transmitter and receiver points S and R inGR-253-CORE, Issue 3.

3. Optical path penalty includes effects of dispersion, reflection, and jitter that occur on theoptical path. The optical path penalty for 1310 nm optics is 1.0 dB maximum.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-26 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

4. One additional connector (0.75 dB) on each end is assumed to connect station cable tooutside plant.

5. Additional unallocated margin, or safety margin, can be 0-3 dB. Typically, a 1.5 dB valueis assumed.

6. For all packs where the Minimum Loss Budget (MLB) is 0, no attenuator is required forloopbacks. For all packs where the MLB is greater than 0, an attenuator is required. Thevalue of the LBO must be equal to or greater than the MLB. The MLB is found inTable10-10, “SONET optical specifications and link budgets” (p. 10-26).

7. The approximate span length values are calculated per an attenuation assumption. As ageneral rule, for attenuation-limited systems, an attenuation of 0.45 dB/km is used for1310 nm optics. This estimate includes typical cable loss (0.40 dB/km) and up to 11splice losses (0.2 dB per splice). For 1310 nm OC-12 systems, dispersion is not a limitingfactor, and the applications are attenuation-limited. Approximate Span Lengths can becalculated more precisely based on particular fiber and splice characteristics and localengineering rules.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-27

10/100T (100BASE-T)/ Fast Ethernet (100BASE-LX) OpticalEthernet Private Line (VLNC30)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

The VLNC30 provides two optical 100BASE-LX IEEE 802.3-compliant (100 Mbps)fast Ethernet interfaces. The 10/100T port performs protocol transparent filtering andbridging of incoming media access control (MAC) frames. MAC frames with adestination address on the local bus are filtered by the 10/100T circuit packs to preventunnecessary transmission of frames over the wide area network (WAN). The 10/100Tinterface auto-negotiates mode (full/half duplex) and speed (10/100 Mbps) wheninterfacing with other 802.3-compliant devices over twisted pair media. The VLNC30circuit pack must be housed in slot 1 of Function Unit C and is not equipmentprotected. However, facility protection can be provided through the WAN via SONET(UPSR or 1+1) and/or through the IEEE 802.1W spanning tree algorithm. TheVLNC30 circuit packs also provide four 100BASE-TX, IEEE 802.3-compliantelectrical interfaces that are capable of spanning distances of 100 meters. See,“10/100T (10/100 Mbps) Ethernet (VLNC15 and VLNC30)” (p. 10-17)for additionalinformation about these electrical interfaces.

Allowed optics

The following table lists the 10/100T SFP optics that may be used in VLNC30 circuitpacks.

Table 10-11 10/100T SFP optics for VLNC30

Apparatus Code Comcode Description

100BASE-LX-I1 109527812 Optical Fast Ethernet SFP,LC-type connectors(FE-1310SM)


Each Ethernet port has associated performance monitoring parameters and counters.The counters are provided for incoming and outgoing frames. For more information,refer to“Ethernet performance monitoring parameters” (p. 5-58)in Chapter 5,“Operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning”.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-28 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

100BASE-LX optical Ethernet specification...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The 100BASE-LX SFPs can be used on the VLNC30.


The following are the 100BASE-LX system specifications:

• Optical Line Rate: 125 MBd +/− 50 ppm

• Optical Line Coding: 4B/5B

• Performance: Long-reach.

Operating range

The following table lists the operating range for the 100BASE-LX optical Ethernetinterface. A 100BASE-LX compliant transceiver supports 10 mm fiber media types.

Table 10-12 100BASE-LX operating range single-mode fiber

Fiber Type Minimum Range

10 mm SMF 2 to 10,000 meters


The 100BASE-LX transmitter meets these specifications defined in IEEE 802.3. Thefollowing table lists some of the transmit specifications for 100BASE-LX.

Table 10-13 100BASE-LX transmit specifications

Description 10 mm SMF

Transmitter type Longwave Laser

Signaling speed (range) 125 +/− 50 ppm (MBd)

Wavelength (range) 1260 to 1360 nm

Trise/Tfall (max; 20%-80% response time) 3.5 ns

RMS spectral width (max) 7.7 nm

Average launch power (max) −8 dBm

Average launch power (min) −15 dBm

Average launch power of OFF transmitter(max)

−45 dBm

Extinction ratio (min) 10 dB


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-29


The 100BASE-LX receiver meets these specifications defined in IEEE 802.3. Thefollowing table lists some of the receiver specifications for 100BASE-LX.

Table 10-14 100BASE-LX receive specifications

Description 10 mm SMF

Signaling speed (range) 125 +/− 50 ppm (MBd)

Wavelength (range) 1260 to 1360 nm

Average receive power (max) −14 dBm

Receive sensitivity −31 dBm

Link budgets

The following table lists the worst-case power budget and link penalties for a100BASE-LX channel.

Table 10-15 100BASE-LX link budgets and penalties

Parameter 10 mm SMF

Link power budget 8.0 dB

Operating distance 10,000m

Channel insertion loss1 4.57 dB

Link power penalties1 3.27 dB

Unallocated margin in link power budget1 0.16 dB

Notes:

1. A wavelength of 1270 nm is used to calculate the channel insertion loss, link powerpenalties, and unallocated margin.


The 100BASE-LX Ethernet interface complies with the following formatting standards:

• Maximum frame size, including any added VLAN tags, is 1536 bytes

• standard IEEE 802.1Q VLANs

• Ethernet to SONET Mapping, (G.7041 (GFP) and G.707 (Virtual Concatenation)

• Protection (SONET and/or 802.1W) and Ethernet Bridging (802.1D)

Technical specifications 100BASE-LX optical Ethernet specification

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-30 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007



Technical specifications 100BASE-LX optical Ethernet specification

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-31

Lightguide jumpers and build-outs...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore provides standard LC-type connectors on all optical interfaces. 5 dB,10 dB, 15 dB, and 20 dB attenuating build-outs are supported.

Single-mode jumpers

The OC-3 and OC-12 lightguide interfaces use single-mode jumpers for connecting toand from the outside plantLGX panel and the 1665 DMXplore.

Reference:

For more information, including a complete list of available jumpers and build-outs,refer to“Miscellaneous equipment and tools” (p. 7-6)in Chapter 7, “Ordering”.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-32 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

System performance

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section provides performance specifications for the 1665 DMXplore.

Contents

SONET overhead bytes 10-34

Wander/Jitter 10-35

Signal performance 10-36



Transient performance 10-39

Transmission delay 10-40


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-33

SONET overhead bytes...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The reserved V4 byte in the VT1.5 superframe is sometimes used for internal errordetection in a 1665 DMXplore shelf. This internal usage of the V4 byte may cause thevalue of a transmitted V4 byte to vary. 1665 DMXplore always ignores the value ofthe V4 byte received from another network element as required by GR-253-CORE.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-34 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Wander/Jitter...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maximum time interval error (MTIE)

For SONET optical interfaces, the maximum time interval error (MTIE) does notexceed 60 nanoseconds phase variation when timed with a wander-free reference.

Wander requirements

Wander transfer, tolerance, and generation requirements are met as specified inGR-253-CORE.

Jitter requirements

Jitter transfer, tolerance, and generation requirements are met as specified inGR-253-CORE and GR-499-CORE.

Short-term stability

The SONET interfaces meet the T1.101 OC-N output short-term stability mask asspecified in GR-253-CORE, Section 5.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-35

Signal performance...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The following specifications apply to the standard networks defined in GR-499-CORE,Issue 3.

DS1 rate

For systems interfacing at the DS1 rate, the number of errored seconds during a7-hour, one-way loopback test, is less than 10.

DS3 rate

For systems interfacing at the DS3 rate, the number of errored seconds during a2-hour, one-way loopback test, is less than 29.

BER

The BER is less than 2x10−10 for both the DS1 and DS3 rates. Burst-errored secondsare excluded.

Burst-errored seconds

The frequency of burst-errored seconds, other than those caused by protectionswitching induced by hard equipment failures, averages less than 4 per day.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-36 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Synchronization...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The embedded SONET Minimum Clock (SMC) (at +/−20 ppm) meets thespecifications of GR-253-CORE, SONET Transport Systems Generic Criteria. Thetiming generator function is embedded in the 1x1 protected optical interface circuitpacks in the MAIN slot pair.

Timing modes

The timing generator supports two timing modes:

• Line timing

Locked to recovered clock from an OC-n signal

– Locked to recovered clock from an OC-n signal

– DS1 BITS timing output, derived from the OC-n line

• Free runningTiming derived from high-stability temperature-compensated voltage-controlledcrystal oscillator (TCVCXO) with a long-term accuracy of +/−20 ppm andtemperature stability of −40°C to +65°C


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-37

Protection switching...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1+1 networks

1665 DMXplore complies with SONET 1+1 unidirectional non-revertive protectionswitching requirements as specified in GR-253-CORE. Automatic line switches areinitiated by signal fail and signal degrade conditions on the received OC-3/12 opticalsignal and are completed within 50 milliseconds of a signal failure. The signal’s BERis calculated from violations of the SONET line overhead B2 parity bytes. Signal failis declared for incoming LOS, LOF, line AIS, or a BER exceeding 10−3, while a BERexceeding a provisioned threshold between 10−3 and 10−5 causes a signal degrade to bedeclared. The user can control switching through protection switching commands.

High-speed UPSR networks

Path protection rings feed a SONET payload (STS or virtual tributary [VT]) from thering entry point, simultaneously in both rotations of the ring, to the signal’s ring exitpoint. The node that terminates the signal from the ring monitors both ring rotationsand is responsible for selecting the signal that has the highest quality based on loss ofpointer (LOP), path AIS (AIS-P), unequipped signal (UNEQ), signal fail BER (SF)(STS paths only) and signal degrade BER (SD). Line level faults such as LOS andLOF result in downstream AIS-P faults which in turn may result in path switching. Onpass-through paths, all detected hard failures (LOS, LOF, LOP, line AIS, or STS-1 pathAIS) result in AIS insertion in the outgoing VT and STS signals. This allows theterminating node to be aware of the failure and to switch to protection. Protectionswitching is completed within 50 milliseconds of failure detection.

Under normal conditions, both incoming SONET path signals to the switch selectionpoint are of high quality, and the signal can be selected from either ring. A failure ortransmission degradation on one of the rings requires that the other ring path beselected. 1665 DMXplore provides non-revertive switching to minimize the impact oncritical customer services by giving the service provider control, when and if thecritical service should revert to a particular ring. A manual path protection switchingcommand allows switching back to the original path for ease of ring maintenance.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-38 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Transient performance...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Power loss restart

After system shutdown due to power loss, the system will exhibit a 2-second error freetransmission interval which begins about 1 minute after restoration of power.

Transmission start-up on signal application

The system, after having no signal applied for greater than 1 minute at the DSX-ninterface, will exhibit a 2-second error free transmission interval which begins within 5seconds of the reapplication of a signal.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-39

Transmission delay...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

One-way transmission delay

The following table lists the worst-case maximum one-way transmission delay(microseconds) between 1665 DMXplore interfaces. 1665 DMXplore is a hybrid boxcombing features of an add/drop mux (ADM) and a digital cross-connection system(DCS). Consequently the specified maximum delay is a summation of the requirementsfor these two functions. Actual transmission delays are likely to be less than specified.

Table 10-16 Transmission delay in microseconds

Interface OC-n DS1 DS3

Cross-Connect

VT STS-n VT STS-1 STS-1

OC-n 130 80 180 180 155

DS1 180 180 NA NA NA

DS3 N/A 155 NA NA NA


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-40 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Operations Interfaces

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section presents information about the operation interfaces that are required tosupport technician access to the system and allow alarms and status informationgenerated by the system to be reported. The operation interfaces include the CITinterface, IAO LAN (via OSI or TCP/IP), SYSCTL faceplate LEDs, and equipmentindicators. 1665 DMXplore supports office alarms, user-definable miscellaneousdiscrete inputs, and TL1.

Contents

Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) 10-42

TL1/LAN 10-44

Personal computer specifications for software download 10-45

LEDs, indicators, and office alarms 10-46



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-41

Craft Interface Terminal (CIT)...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The WaveStar® CIT is the primary tool used to interface with the 1665 DMXplore. Itis a personal computer (PC) with theWaveStar® CIT user-interface software installed.

Requirements

It is anticipated that most customers will dedicate a laptop or personal computer (PC)to run theWaveStar® CIT software. However, any properly configured computer willsuffice.

The following table lists the customer-provided PC minimum and recommendedrequirements for the using theWaveStar® CIT.

Table 10-17 WaveStar ® CIT PC requirements

Component Minimum Recommended

Processor Pentium 266 MHz Pentium III 500 MHz

RAM (one System View) 128 MB 256 MB

RAM (up to 5 SystemViews)

256 MB

Virtual memory 139 MB 267 MB

Available disk space1 650 MB 750 MB

Video 800x600 256 colors (8 bit) 1024x768 16 million colors(24 bit)

Network Interface card 10/100 BASE-T Network Card

10/100 BASE-T LAN interface Pin Designations/signalsare:

• 1 TD+

• 2 TD−

• 3 RD+

• 6 RD−

CD-ROM drive Required

Operating System Supported Operating Systems are:

• Microsoft Windows® NT 4.0 with service pack 4

• Microsoft Windows® 2000

• Microsoft Windows® XP

The customer is responsible for ensuring that the PCremains virus-free.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-42 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Table 10-17 WaveStar ® CIT PC requirements (continued)

Component Minimum Recommended

Internet Browser Microsoft ® Internet Explorer 5.0, 5.5, or 6.0

Notes:

1. Minimum requirements are sufficient to run two or three graphical System Views, unlessotherwise noted. Recommended requirements are intended to be used as a generalguideline to optimizeWaveStar® CIT performance. Since theWaveStar® CIT is used withmultiple NE connections and multiple NE types, the processor type and speed and thememory size all factor into the performance. Available hard disk space required to installand storeWaveStar® CIT and NE generic software is approximately 250 MB. If allgraphical packages are installed, the available hard disk space required is 550 MB. Theadditional disk space specified is necessary to store NE backup files.

Table 10-18 CIT and Microsoft Windows ® requirements

1665 DMXplore port/Microsoft Windows ®

Guidelines

Serial Port OSI/TCP-IP LAN Port

Microsoft Windows® NT X X

Microsoft Windows® 2000 X NA

Microsoft Windows® XP NA X

Technical specifications Craft Interface Terminal (CIT)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-43

TL1/LAN...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore supports a TL1 over TCP/IP interface or TL1 over OSI LAN interfacefor communication between a 1665 DMXplore NE and an Element ManagementSystem (EMS) of a Network Management System (NMS). TL1 over TCP/IP LANcomplies with requirements specified in IEEE 802.3 and NSIF-AR-9806-088R11.

TL1 translation device (T-TD Gateway)

The T-TD is a device that translates TL1 messages over a TCP/IP connection to a TL1over OSI association, providing a TL1 TCP-OSI gateway. The T-TD, when used inconjunction with the CIT, is an open system interconnection (OSI) proxy that acceptsTCP/IP connections and sets up matching OSI connections. This requires the support ofthe TCP/IP stack and the seven-layer OSI stack.

Front IAO LAN interface

1665 DMXplore provides an RJ45-compatible front IAO LAN interface that isintended for use with a local PC.

SONET DCC

The SONET DCC provides TL1 over OSI connections with remote NEs in asubnetwork.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-44 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Personal computer specifications for software download...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Specifications

The PC used for software download should have:

• Microsoft Windows® XP, NT or 2000

• CD-ROM drive for CD-ROM download.

Compatible modems

A compatible modem must meet the following minimum requirements:

• 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200 or 115,000 baud

• Full duplex

• 8 data bits

• No parity bits

• 1 start bit

• 1 stop bit

• No flow control.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-45

LEDs, indicators, and office alarms...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SYSCTL faceplate

In addition to the FAULT LED, which is lit if the SYSCTL detects its own failure,there are also three alarm/status LEDs on the SYSCTL faceplate, listed below:

• Critical (CR)/Major (MJ)

• Minor (MN)/Abnormal (ABN)

There are LEDs and two push-button switches for Update (UPDATE) and ACO(ACO).

Equipment indicators

A red LED FAULT indicator is provided on all circuit packs. A green LED ACTIVEindicator is provided on all circuit packs to indicate which circuit packs are activelycarrying traffic.

Office alarms

The office alarms interface is a set of discrete relays that control office audible andvisual alarms. Separate relays handle CR/MJ (both critical and major alarms arereported through one pair of relays) and MN alarms. Each contact closure is rated at 1A, 60 V maximum. The CR alarm relays are fail safe against unprotected powerfailures.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

10-46 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

User-defined miscellaneous discrete interface...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The user-defined miscellaneous discrete interface allows an operations system (OS) tocontrol and monitor equipment collocated with the 1665 DMXplore through a set ofinput and output contact closures. Miscellaneous discrete environmental inputs canmonitor conditions like open doors or high temperature; miscellaneous discrete outputscontrol equipment such as fans and generators. The status of the miscellaneous discreteenvironmental inputs can be queried on demand via theWaveStar® CIT. 1665DMXplore collects miscellaneous discrete alarms and automatically sends them to theoperations system (OS).

External customer equipment

Any external customer equipment to be monitored by 1665 DMXplore must providethe electrical equivalent of a contact closure across the corresponding environmentalinput wiring pairs. The contact closure must be capable of passing at least 10 mA ofdrive current.

Power source

The power source to enable the control of external customer equipment may have avoltage range from a minimum of 3V to a maximum of 72V. 1665 DMXplore providesa unidirectional opto-isolator connection across each corresponding control outputwiring pair. The load current across each control output wiring pair must be limited bythe external customer equipment and must not exceed 35 mA.

Reference:

For detailed wiring information, refer to theMetropolis® DMXplore Access MultiplexerInstallation Manual, 365-372-334


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

10-47

Appendix A: Ethernet

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section describes the Ethernet implementation for 1665 Data Multiplexer Explore(1665 DMXplore).

Contents

Ethernet transport A-2

Tagging modes A-16

Quality of Service A-17

Ethernet service management A-18

Ethernet services configurations A-20

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-1

Ethernet transport...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

A 1665 DMXplore network accepts Ethernet frames at an ingress port and transmitsthem out of one or more egress ports. The egress port(s) can be on the same networkelement or on a different network element. If it is on a different network element,Ethernet frames are transmitted over a SONET network. To transport an Ethernet frameacross the SONET network, the Ethernet Frame is moved between a LAN port and theSONET network. Refer to the following figure.

The following occurs to transport an Ethernet frame over a SONET network:

• 1665 DMXplore accepts an Ethernet Frame at an ingress LAN Port.

• For the VLNC15 or VLNC30 circuit packs (which support only non-switchedservices), the Ethernet frame is sent directly to the GFP mapper via a VCG port.

• The generic framing procedure (GFP) mapper encapsulates the Ethernet frame intoa GFP Frame.

Figure A-1 Ethernet transport through 1665 DMXplore

MA-DMX-343

SONET Network

SONET Interfaces

GFP Mapper(ITUG.7041)

GFP Mapper(ITUG.7041)

SwitchedService

Private LineService

VCG (WAN) Ports

LAN Ports

LAN Ports

EthernetCircuitPack Physical Ethernet Transceiver

STS-1Virtual

Concatenator(ITU G.707)

STS-1/STS-3cVirtual

Concatenator(ITU G.707)

Ethernet Switch

Ethernet

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

• Virtual Concatenation maps the Ethernet stream into one or more SONETtributaries (time slots). This allows the network to carry traffic (Ethernet stream) athigher speeds than allowed by a single SONET tributaries (time slot). The group ofvirtually concatenated tributaries is referred to as a Virtual Concatenation Group(VCG).

• The VCG is then placed on SONET tributaries and transmitted over the SONETnetwork.

Enhanced Ethernet features

Release 2.0 incorporated many hardware and software-based features of 1665DMXplore Ethernet circuit packs. As these are hardware-based features, they requirethe use of the VLNC15 or VLNC30 circuit packs.

• TCAs on Ethernet PM error counts

• Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) per ITU G.7042

• Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) per ITU G.7041

• VT1.5 and STS-1 VCAT with LCAS

Ethernet loopbacks

1665 DMXplore supports loopbacks on Ethernet interfaces. Ethernet loopbacks may beused during installation and maintenance procedures to test the integrity of near andfar- end interfaces as well as fibers and system circuitry.

Ethernet Ethernet transport

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-3

Generic framing procedure (GFP)

Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) is used to encapsulate Ethernet frames for transportover a SONET network. 1665 DMXplore uses frame-based GFP with the core headerand no optional extension headers or Frame Check Sequence (FCS).

To encapsulate an Ethernet frame, the Ethernet preamble and Start of Frame Delimiter(SFD) fields are removed from the frame. A Type header and check (tHEC) is added tothe Ethernet frame creating a GFP payload. The GFP payload is then scrambled and aCore header is added. The GFP frame is then sent to the Virtual Concatenator. Thefollowing figure shows the format of a GFP frame.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Table A-1 GFP frame format details

Section Field Description

Core Header Payload Indicator (PLI) Binary number representingthe number of octets in theGFP payload.

Core Header Error Control(cHEC)

CRC-16 checksum thatprotects the integrity of thecontents of the CoreHeader.

Payload Header Type The type of informationcontained in the Payloadfield. The value is 01hex.

Type Header Error Control(tHEC)

CRC-16 checksum thatprotects the integrity of thecontents of the Type Field.

Figure A-2 GFP frame format

Preamble

Note:

7

1

6

6

0 or 4

2

2

2

2

0 or 4

2

4

OctetsOctetsA. Original Ethernet Frame B. GFP Frame

1 - May not be present

Frame Check Sequence

Data and Pad

Raw Ethernet Frame

Pay Load Indicator

cHEC

Type

CoreHeader

PayloadHeader

Payload

tHEC

Stacked VLAN TAG1

802.1Q VLAN TAG1

Start of Frame Delimiter (SFD)

Source Address (SA)

Length/Type

Destination Address (DA)

MA-DMX-344


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-5

Table A-1 GFP frame format details (continued)

Section Field Description

Payload The raw Ethernet Frame(that is, the originalEthernet Frame without thePreamble and SFD.

In the opposite direction when the GFP Mapper receives a GFP frame from the VirtualConcatenator, it removes the Core Header and, using the cHEC field, performs aHeader Error Check. If the header is correct, the payload area of the GFP is thende-scrambled and the Type field and tHEC in the GFP header are checked forcorrectness. The Ethernet frame is extracted and the Preamble and SFD are added.

The GFP mapper at the far end of the network inserts idle GFP frames when there areno Ethernet frames to send. The near end GFP Mapper discards any idle GFP frames itreceives over the SONET network. The idle GFP frames are not forwarded to theEthernet Switch. (The VLNC15 circuit pack does not contain an Ethernet switch.)

The GFP Mapper contains GFP queues that are used to store Ethernet frames whilethey are being processed.

The Generic Framing Procedure is defined in ITU-T G.7041/Y.1303 and ANSIT1X1.105 Sections 7.3.2 and 7.3.3.

Virtual concatenation

Virtual Concatenation is a standardinverse multiplexscheme for transporting a payloadusing multiple channels each of which has a lower capacity than the payload to betransported. It allows finer granularity in allocating the transport bandwidth than isavailable in standard contiguous concatenation (STS-3c).

The grouped SONET tributaries form a Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG). A VCG istreated as a single logical serial byte stream whose payload capacity equals that of thesum of the payload capacities of the constituent SONET tributaries. The followingfigure shows a virtual concatenation group.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Individual tributaries in the VCG are independently transported through the SONETnetwork. Only the initial and final SONET nodes perform the Virtual Concatenation.Since the VCGs are invisible to the intermediate SONET nodes, the intermediate nodesonly need to transport normal SONET traffic and do not need to understand VCGs.This allows the tributaries to be transported through equipment which does not handleVCGs.

Differential delay buffers

Because the individual tributaries of a virtual concatenation group (VCAT) can takedifferent paths through the SONET network, they may experience different delaysthrough the network. VCG ports use differential delay buffers to accommodate up to64ms of differential delay in the VLNC15/30 Ethernet circuit pack.

Link aggregation

Link aggregation allows multiple physical links between Ethernet switches to betreated as a single link. This provides for more bandwidth between the switches thancan be transmitted over a single Ethernet port and it can provide protection from acable, Ethernet port, or Ethernet circuit pack failure.

While link aggregation is not currently implemented within 1665 DMXplore, the 1665DMXplore supports link aggregation transparency. This allows the attached equipmentto use link aggregation as shown in the following figure.

Figure A-3 Virtual concatenation group

VirtualConcatenation

Up to 21 STS-1s

A Virtual Concatenation Group

MA-DMX-345

1 Gb/s Ethernet


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-7

The figure shows two Ethernet devices running link aggregation interconnected viaEthernet circuit packs and a SONET Network. The 1665 DMXplore shelves and theSONET network are invisible to the two Ethernet devices. The Ethernet traffic istransparently transferred between the external devices. Link aggregation is typicallyimplemented using two dedicated unprotected point-to-point links (Ethernet PrivateLine Service) for each pair of external ports.

Link Aggregation is specified in IEEE 802.3 clause 43, formerly specified in 802.3ad.Link aggregation transparency does not require default VLAN ID for the VLNC15/30.

Flow control

This section describes how 1665 DMXplore controls the flow of Ethernet traffic. 1665DMXplore supports the following types of flow control:

• Local flow control

• End-to-end flow control

Local flow control (ingress traffic direction)

If the external equipment delivers Ethernet frames to the Ethernet circuit pack fasterthan they can be delivered across the network, the data buffers in the Ethernet circuitpack fill up. When the data buffers reach the flow control threshold, the Ethernet

Figure A-4 Link aggregation

SONET Network

MA-DMXplore-357

Link Aggregation Group (e.g. Links that are aggregated together)

Ethernet Links(10 or 100 or 1000 Mbps)

Ethernet Links(10 or 100 or 1000 Mbps)

LinkAggregation

Group

LinkAggregation

Group


1665DMXplore

1665DMXplore

LAN PortsLocated on 1

Or MoreCircuit Packs

LAN PortsLocated on 1

Or MoreCircuit Packs

ExternalEthernet

Equipment(Device)

ExternalEthernet

Equipment(Device)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

circuit pack initiates flow control. On full duplex links, the Ethernet circuit pack issuesa flow control request to the external equipment, requesting that the flow of frames besuspended.

Note that this local flow control mechanism is concerned only with congestion (fullpacket buffers) at the local 1665 DMXplore. If 1665 DMXplore at the other end of theSONET network is unable to deliver the Ethernet frames to the attached externalequipment due to flow control conditions there, that doesnot directly affect the localflow control operation at the ingress 1665 DMXplore.

Local flow control (egress traffic direction)

If the local Ethernet circuit pack attempts to deliver Ethernet frames to the attachedexternal equipment faster than the external equipment can accept them, the externalequipment may initiate flow control. On full duplex links, the external equipmentissues a flow control request to the Ethernet circuit pack requesting that the flow offrames be suspended.

End-to-end flow control

If the external equipment at the destination of an Ethernet connection cannot handlethe rate of traffic being sent to it, it may be desirable to apply back pressure across thenetwork to slow down the external source of the Ethernet traffic. This cross-networkback pressure can only work well, however, when the source of the traffic can beidentified unambiguously. Only the Ethernet Private Line Service offers thisopportunity; thus, it is the only service that supports End-to-End Flow Control.

Figure A-5 Local flow control of ingress traffic

1665DMXplore 1

EthernetCircuit Pack

EthernetLink

SONETSub Rate

1665DMXplore 2


MA-DMXplore-358

When data rate from External Equipment 1 exceeds SONET bandwidth, DMX 1will invoke flow control toward External Equipment 1

FlowControlRequest

Data


ExternalEquipment 1

ExternalEquipment 2Buffer


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-9

End-to-end flow control (VLNC15/30 circuit pack)

The VLNC15/30 circuit pack implements the following changes intended to improvethe frame loss behavior of end-to-end flow control.

• When end-to-end flow control is enabled, the VLNC15/30 circuit pack sends a flowcontrol request across the SONET network immediately upon receiving a flowcontrol request from external equipment.

The VLNC15/30 circuit pack does not buffer data while waiting for far-end equipmentto respond to end-to-end flow control requests. Data is transmitted to the client. Referto the following figure.

Figure A-6 End-to-end flow control (VLNC15/30)

EthernetLink

SONET EthernetLink

1665DMXplore 2


EthernetCircuit PackVLNC15/30

JKXplore-E-7

Flow Control Request is generated by External Equipment 1

External Eqipment 2 stops sending data in time for a loss-less transmission

1. Data fromExternalEquipment 2

Flow Control Request is sent immediately to External Equipment 2

FlowControlRequest

FlowControlRequest

2. A Flow ControlRequest is initiated byExternal Equipment 1

3b. External Equipment 2reacts to the toFlow Control request

ExternalEquipment 1

ExternalEquipment 2

1665DMXplore 1

Buffer



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Flow control provisioning (VLNC15/30 circuit pack)

The VLNC15/30 circuit pack automatically provides both local and end-to-end flowcontrol if flow control is enabled for a LAN port. Similarly, disabling flow control foran LAN port disables both forms of flow control.

Table A-2 Flow control

LAN Port Flow ControlState

Flow Control Status Use/Comments

Disabled Disabled 1665 DMXplore does notparticipate in flow control.

The LAN port does notrespond to flow controlrequests.

The LAN port does notgenerate flow controlrequests due to congestion.

Flow control requests aretransported when received.

Enabled Enabled Flow control requirementsare sent to the far-end 1665DMXplore. LAN portsgenerate flow controlrequirements for fractionalservice.

Drop Drop Disables Network-elementcontrolled flow control anddrops end-to-end flowcontrol messages.

Physical interface

Each Ethernet circuit pack contains a transceiver that implements the physical interfacefor that circuit pack’s line type. For the 10/100 Mbps circuit packs, this physicalinterface must be provisioned to or auto-negotiate to the proper line rate and duplexmode in order to communicate successfully with the connected equipment.

At the physical layer, many types of LANs can be used for multiple line rates andduplex modes. For example the LAN port on most PCs can be connected to a10BASE-TX (10 Mbps) or a 100BASE-TX (100 Mbps) LAN. Before data traffic canbe transmitted onto a LAN, all ports connected to the LAN must operate with the sameline rate and duplex mode. LAN ports can either be provisioned with these values orprovisioned to automatically negotiate (auto-negotiate) the values.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-11

Auto-negotiation

In the auto-negotiation process, a LAN port advertises its acceptable parameters,compares these with the advertised parameters of its link partner, and then agrees upona set of parameters with the link partner. IEEE 802.3 allows the line rate, duplex mode,and flow control mode to be auto-negotiated. A LAN port not configured to supportauto-negotiation will use provisioned values for these parameters. A LAN portconfigured for auto-negotiation that is connected to a LAN port not configured forauto-negotiation will follow prescribed rules for parameter settings.

In 1665 DMXplore, auto-negotiation is only available on the electrical ports.

Table A-3 Line rate operation for VLNC15/30 circuit packs

1665 DMXploreLAN Port RateProvisioning

Connected Equipment Provisioning Ethernet LinkRate1

Auto-Negotiation Advertised/Set at

10 Disabled 10 10

Disabled 100 No Link

Enabled 10 10

Enabled 100 No Link

Enabled 10/100 10

100 Disabled 10 No Link

Disabled 100 100

Enabled 10 No Link

Enabled 100 100

Enabled 10/100 100

Auto Disabled 10 10

Disabled 100 100

Enabled 10 10

Enabled 100 100

Enabled 10/100 100

Notes:

1. Both the 1665 DMXplore and the connected equipment will try to determine a commonline rate. The link will not come up if both ends have auto-negotiation enabled andadvertise incompatible duplex modes.

Flow control


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-12 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Table A-4 Flow control operation for VLNC15/30 circuit packs

LAN Port Provisioning Connected EquipmentProvisioning

Duplex Mode State Comments

FlowControl

Auto-NegotiationState

Auto-Negotiation

Advertised/Set at1

1665DMXplore 2

ConnectedEquipment

Auto Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Enabled Enabled InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Disabled Note4 Disabled

Enabled Note5 Enabled

Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Enabled Enabled InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled

Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Enabled Enabled

Enabled Disabled Enabled Unknown InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Enabled Unknown InconsistentProvisioning


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-13

Table A-4 Flow control operation for VLNC15/30 circuit packs (continued)

LAN Port Provisioning Connected EquipmentProvisioning

Duplex Mode State Comments

FlowControl

Auto-NegotiationState

Auto-Negotiation

Advertised/Set at1

1665DMXplore 2

ConnectedEquipment

Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Disabled Enabled InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Enabled Disabled Disabled

Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Enabled Disabled Enabled InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Disabled Disabled Unknown InconsistentProvisioning

Enabled Disabled Unknown InconsistentProvisioning

Notes:

1. Flow control will only be enabled if the connected equipment is capable of Symmetric Flow Control.

2. IEEE 802.3 does not define flow control states for half duplex links or when only one side of a link isprovisioned for auto-negotiation. This is the expected behavior of the connected equipment.

3. IEEE 802.3 recommends that equipment be configured for auto-negotiation to avoid inconsistentprovisioning.

4. Flow control will be disabled on VLNC15 LAN ports.

5. Flow control will be enabled on VLNC15 LAN ports.

Queues and buffers

Ethernet circuit packs contain small buffer pools that provide storage of Ethernetframes for brief periods of congestion or until flow control requests can be honored.These small buffer pools are associated with the Ethernet switch and the GenericFraming Procedure (GFP) mechanism. The GFP mechanism is described further in“Generic framing procedure (GFP)” (p. A-4). A larger buffer pool designed to handledifferent path lengths for individual STS-1/VT1.5s is associated with the virtual


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-14 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

concatenation process. Its function is described in more detail in“Virtualconcatenation” (p. A-6). Two priority-based queues are provided to allow high prioritytraffic to be forwarded ahead of low priority traffic.

VLNC15/30 circuit pack buffers

With no Ethernet switch, the VLNC15/30 Ethernet frame buffers are all associated withthe Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) and virtual concatenation mechanisms. Thefollowing figure shows the VLNC15/30 circuit pack buffer architecture.

The VLNC15/30 circuit pack provides larger buffer pools to allow for longer responsetimes to flow control requests. In addition, buffer storage can be flexibly assigned toEthernet frames, allowing maximal usage of the memory available. Each VCG port canbuffer 64 Kilobytes of Ethernet frames in the ingress direction.

Figure A-7 Buffer architecture (VLNC15/30)VCG

GFP BufferUp to 200K Bytes

24 VCG Ports

24 LAN Ports

MA-DMXplore-363

GFP BufferUp to 54K Bytes

VLNC15/VLCN30 > up to 64K bytes VLNC15/VLCN30 > up to 512K bytes

Differential Delay Buffers 32ms(94.5K Bytes/STS-1)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-15

Tagging modes...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore supports the following tagging modes.

• Private Line mode

Private Line mode

The Private Line mode is used to establish simple point-to-point connections betweentwo ports with no Ethernet switching functions applied. No additional Ethernetprovisioning is required after the cross-connection is established. Private Line modecan be used to provide either a full rate or sub-rate (fractional rate) dedicated Ethernetlink across SONET networks. No preferential treatment for high priority packets isprovided. In a sub-rate service, frames may be dropped due to congestion. Anycorrectly formatted Ethernet frame received at a source port is transmitted out of thedestination port.

The Private Line mode supports the following features:

• Point-to-point topology with only two LAN ports

• Protection is provided at the SONET network layer UPSR switching

• No spanning tree protocol (supports transparency of customer spanning treeprotocol)

• No VLAN ingress filtering or classification (VLAN tags are not verified or added)

• Ethernet PM per port

Table A-5 Packet size

VLAN Tag VLANFiltering

SpanningTree

Priority Max. FrameSize(Bytes)

ApplicableCircuitPacks

N/A No No No 9636(tagged)9632(untagged)

VLNC15/30

Ethernet

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-16 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Quality of Service...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

1665 DMXplore supports the following Quality of Service (QoS) capabilities:

• Private Line service provides dedicated bandwidth between two end points (bestQoS).

• Fractional rate services provide basic rate shaping with approximately 50 Mbps or1.5 Mbps granularity.

QoS services (VLNC15 and VLNC30)

The VLNC15 and VLNC30 circuit packs provide 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps Private Lineservices. They do not contain an Ethernet Switch. Each LAN port is connected to itsown VCG. 100 Mbps traffic can be rate-limited by provisioning less SONETbandwidth than required to carry the full line rate. Traffic is buffered and flow controlis invoked when ingress traffic on a LAN port exceeds the VCG’s SONET bandwidth.If flow control is disabled or ignored by the external equipment, Ethernet frames aredropped when the ingress buffer overflows. The VLNC15 and VLNC30 offer 1.5MbpsVT granularity.

Ethernet

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-17

Ethernet service management...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

The Ethernet services are managed by provisioning the following:

• Cross-connections

• LAN ports

• VCG (WAN) ports

• Performance monitoring.

• Class of service

For detailed information about available parameters and their values, refer to“Ethernetperformance monitoring parameters” (p. 5-58)in Chapter 5, “Operations,administration, maintenance, and provisioning”.

Cross-connections

The following types of cross-connections are used with Ethernet circuit packs.

• 2wayPR

• 2way

For detailed information about supported cross-connections refer toChapter 6, “Systemplanning and engineering”in this document and theWaveStar® CIT on line help.

Cross-connection types and supported configurations

The following table shows the cross-connection types and supported services.

Table A-6 Supported configurations and cross-connection types

SONET Cross Connection Type Number of Private Lines(VCGs)

Ethernet Circuit Pack

VLNC15/30

UPSR STS-1 2waypr 0-3

STS-3c 2waypr 1

VT1.5 2waypr 4

1+1 STS-1 2waypr 4

STS-3c 2waypr 1

VT1.5 4

Ethernet

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-18 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Notes:

1. A mix of VT1.5, STS-1, and STS-3c are connections allowed; Max of 168 VT1.5 (6STS-1s) of VT1.5 cross connect capacity.

2. The maximum number of STS1s per VCG is 1-3.

3. Per pack, there’s a limit of 1 STS3c drop cross-connect, and 9 STS1s (no matter whetherthey’re used for VT, STS1 or STS3c cross-connections).

LAN ports

All LAN ports have characteristics that must be the same on all sides of a link. Somecharacteristics are strictly physical in nature. They can only be changed by usingdifferent equipment. Some examples of these characteristics are cable type (forexample, twisted pair, fiber) and optical type (short reach, long reach). For moreinformation about the Ethernet circuit packs, refer to“Group C circuit packs” (p. 4-11).

The Configuration → Equipment WaveStar® CIT command is used to provision LANports. For more information about theConfiguration → Equipment command andLAN port provisioning, refer to theWaveStar® CIT on-line help.

VCG (WAN) ports

The Configuration → Equipment WaveStar® CIT command is used to provision VCG(WAN) ports. For more information about theConfiguration → Equipment commandand VCG (WAN) port provisioning, refer to theWaveStar® CIT on-line help.

The following table shows the available VCG (WAN) ports available on Ethernetcircuit packs.

Table A-7 VCGs available on Ethernet circuit packs

Ethernet Circuit Pack ProvisionableVCG Ports

Type Slot Tagging Mode All other OLIUs

VLNC15/30 LAN Private Line Mode VCG1-VCG4



Ethernet Ethernet service management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-19

Ethernet services configurations...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet services configurations

1665 DMXplore supports the Ethernet services shown in the following table.

Table A-8 Supported Ethernet services

Service VCGs (per CircuitPack)

EthernetPorts

SONETCapacity

TaggingMode

EthernetForwarding(Switching) basedon

PrivateLine

1 Private Line perVCG Protected

Dedicated Dedicated PrivateLine (Notag)

No Ethernetswitching.Point-to-Pointconnection ispre-configured.

The following table shows the typical Ethernet service configurations.

Table A-9 Typical Ethernet service configurations

Service Protection Ring Type Cross-ConnectionType

SONET SpanningTree

Private Line Yes Not Allowed UPSR 2wayPR

Private Line service

Private Line service is a point-to-point service with two dedicated LAN ports anddedicated SONET capacity. Because it is a point-to-point service, spanning treeprotection is not used. Protection is provided at the SONET layer only.

Ethernet Private Line service can be provided over SONET UPSRs. The followingfigure shows an example of Private Line service with protection provided by a SONETUPSR.

Ethernet

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-20 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Figure A-8 Ethernet Private Line service over protected UPSR

EthernetSwitch

V4 V3 V2 V1

VLNC50

V3V2

V4V1

V2V3

V1V4

L1

L2

EthernetSwitch

EthernetSwitch

V1 V2 V3 V4

Type of Ring- UPSR

Type of Cross-Connection- 2Way PR

Transport Protection- UPSR

EthernetSwitch

L1

L2

= Traffic transmitted clockwise around the ring

= Traffic transmitted counter-clockwise around the ring MA-DMX-367a

VLNC50

VLNC50

VLNC50

VLNC40

VLNC40

VLNC40VLNC40

Ethernet Ethernet services configurations

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

A-21

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Numerics

1+1 (bidirectional)The bidirectional 1+1 protection switching architecture protects against failures of theoptical transmit/receive equipment and their connecting fiber facility. One bidirectionalinterface (two fibers plus associated OLIUs on each end) is designated service, and theother is designated protection. In each direction, identical signals are transmitted on theservice and protection lines (dual-fed). The receiving equipment monitors the incomingservice and protection lines independently, and selects traffic from one line (the activeline) based on performance criteria and technician/OS control. In bidirectional 1+1switching the network elements are not independent. When a protection switch isrequested at a network element, both network elements perform protection switching.

1+1 (unidirectional)The unidirectional 1+1 protection switching architecture protects against failures of theoptical transmit/receive equipment and their connecting fiber facility. One bidirectionalinterface (two fibers plus associated OLIUs on each end) is designated service, and theother is designated protection. In each direction, identical signals are transmitted on theservice and protection lines (dual-fed). The receiving equipment monitors the incomingservice and protection lines independently, and selects traffic from one line (the activeline) based on performance criteria and technician/OS control. In unidirectional 1+1 bothservice and protection lines could be active at the same time (service in one direction,protection in the other).

802.1Q ModeIn 802.1Q Mode, a circuit pack can be provisioned to use an incoming frame’s VLANtag, to add a VLAN tag associated with the port for untagged frames, or to drop anincoming frame if its VLAN tagging does not meet provisioned specifications. Thepriority bits in an incoming frame’s VLAN tag can also be used to affect the handling ofthe frame.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A ABNAbnormal (status condition)

ACAlternating Current

ActiveActive identifies any protected entity which is currently selected by the receiver at eitherend as the payload carrying signal that is currently carrying service. (See Standby).

Adaptive RateSee Pipe Mode.

Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM)The term for a synchronous network element capable of combining signals of differentrates and having those signals added to or dropped from the stream.

ADMAdd/Drop Multiplexer

ADRAdd/Drop Ring

AgingThe filtering database entries are automatically removed after an aging period (300seconds).

AGNEAlarm Gateway Network Element

AISAlarm Indication Signal

AlarmVisible or audible signal indicating that an equipment failure or significantevent/condition has occurred.

Alarm Cut-Off (ACO)A button on the SYSCTL used to silence audible alarms.

Alarm Gateway Network Element (AGNE)A defined NE in an alarm group through which members of the alarm group exchangeinformation.

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)A code transmitted downstream in a digital network that shows that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP)A user provisioned mechanism to control an alarm level.

Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)A line code that employs a ternary signal to convey binary digits, in which successivebinary ones are represented by signal elements that are normally of alternating, positiveand negative polarity but equal in amplitude, and in which binary zeros are representedby signal elements that have zero amplitude.

American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)A standard 7-bit code that represents letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and specialcharacters in the interchange of data among computing and communications equipment.

AMIAlternate Mark Inversion

ANSIAmerican National Standards Institute

APDAvalanche PhotoDiode

APSAutomatic Protection Switch

APS ChannelThe signalling channel carried in the K1 and K2 bytes of the SONET overhead on theprotection line. It is used to exchange requests and acknowledgments for protectionswitch actions.

ASAPAlarm Severity Assignment Profile

ASCIIAmerican Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASN.1Abstract Syntax Notation 1

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)A high-speed transmission technology characterized by high bandwidth and low delay. Itutilizes a packet switching and multiplexing technique which allocates bandwidth ondemand.

ATMAsynchronous Transfer Mode

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-3

AutoAutomatic

AutoOne possible state of ports, lines, and channels. In this state, the port, line, or channelwill automatically be put in service if a good signal is detected coming from the DSXpanel.

Automatic Protection SwitchA feature that allows another source to be automatically selected and reconfigured in theevent of a source failure or network change, for example, a fiber cut.

Autonomous MessageA message transmitted from the controlled Network Element to the ITM-SC which wasnot a response to an ITM-SC originated command. (Does not apply to DMX)

Avalanche Photodiode (APD)A diode that increases its electrical conductivity by a multiplication effect when hit bylight. APDs are used in lightwave receivers because the APDs have a greater sensitivityto weakened light signals (for example, those which have traveled long distances overfiber).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B B3ZSBipolar 3-Zero Substitution

B8ZSBipolar 8-Zero Substitution

Backbone RingA host ring.

BackoutRefers to backing out of an upgrade in progress. A backout returns a node(s) to thepre-upgrade state.

BackupThe backup and restoration features provide the capability to recover from loss of NEdata because of such factors as human error, power failure, and NE design flaws.

BandwidthThe difference in Hz between the highest and lowest frequencies in a transmissionchannel. The data rate that can be carried by a given communications circuit.

Baud RateTransmission rate of data (bits per second) on a network link.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

BDFBBattery Distribution and Fuse Bay

BERBit Error Rate

Bidirectional LineA transmission path consisting of two fibers that handle traffic in both the transmit andreceive directions.

Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring (BLSR)A bidirectional ring in which protection switching is accomplished by switching workingtraffic into protection time slots in the line going in the opposite direction around thering.

Bidirectional RingA ring in which both directions of traffic between any two nodes travel through the samenetwork elements (although in opposite directions).

Bidirectional SwitchProtection switching performed in both the transmit and receive directions.

BIPBit Interleaved Parity

Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS)A line coding technique that replaces eight consecutive zeros with a bit sequence havingspecial characteristics accomplishing two objectives: First, this bit sequenceaccommodates the density requirements of the ones for digital T1 carrier; Second, thesequence is recognizable at the destination (due to deliberate bipolar violations) and isremoved to produce the original signal.

BitThe smallest unit of information in a computer, with a value of either 0 or 1.

Bit Error Rate (BER)The ratio of error bits received to the total number of bits transmitted.

Bit Error Rate ThresholdThe point at which an alarm is issued for bit errors.

Bit Interleaved Parity-N(BIP-N)A method of error monitoring over a specified number of bits (BIP-3 or BIP-8).

BITSBuilding Integrated Timing Supply

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-5

BITS clockA BITS (Building Integrated Timing Source) clock is a clock within a central office thatdistributes timing to all the equipment in that central office. The BITS clock is tied toan external, stable timing source, such as a GPS (global positioning satellite).

BlockingThe state in which an Ethernet port does not participate in frame relay. The forwardingprocess discards received frames.

BLSRBidirectional line-switched ring

BPDUBridge protocol data unit

Bridge Cross-ConnectionSetting up a cross-connection leg with the same input tributary as that of an existingcross-connection leg, forming a 1:2 bridge from an input tributary to two outputtributaries.

BroadbandAny communications channel with greater bandwidth than a voice channel; sometimesused synonymously with wideband.

Burst SizeThe provisioned burst size determines the length or size of the data burst that is allowed.This affects policing for all VLANs (in 802.1Q mode), all port tags (in transparentmode). and all Private Line services (in Private Line or No Tag mode) on the LNW66,LNW67, and LNW68 Ethernet circuit packs.

ByteRefers to a group of eight consecutive binary digits.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C C-BitA framing format used for DS3 signals produced by multiplexing 28 DS1s into a DS3.This format provides for enhanced performance monitoring of both near-end and far-endentities.

CCClear Channel

CCITTComité Consultatif International Télégrafique & Téléphonique(International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee)

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

CCITT - International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative CommitteeAn international advisory committee under United Nations’ sponsorship that hascomposed and recommended for adoption worldwide standards for internationalcommunications. Recently changed to the International Telecommunications UnionTelecommunications Standards Sector (ITU-TSS).

CD-ROMCompact Disk, Read-Only Memory

ChannelA logical signal within a port. For example, for an EC-1 port, there is one STS-1channel and sometimes 28 VT1.5 channels. See Port.

Channel State ProvisioningA feature that allows a user to suppress reporting of alarms and events duringprovisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service and not monitored) forVT1.5 and STS-n channels. See Port State Provisioning.

CircuitA set of transmission channels through one or more network elements that providestransmission of signals between two points, to support a single communications path.

CITCraft Interface Terminal

Clear Channel (CC)A provisionable mode for the DS3 output that causes parity violations not to bemonitored or corrected before the DS3 signal is encoded.

CLEICommon Language Equipment Identifier

Client Signal Fail (CSF)The local NE sends a Client Signal Fail (CSF) signal to the far-end equipment when adefect is detected in the ingress client signal. (Ethernet/Data protocol)

CLKClock

CMISECommon Management Information Service Element

COCentral Office

Coding Violation (CV)A performance monitoring parameter indicating that bipolar violations of the signal haveoccurred.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-7

CollocatedSystem elements that are located in the same location.

ConcatenationA procedure whereby multiple virtual containers are associated one with each otherresulting in a combined capacity that can be used as a single container across which bitsequence integrity is maintained.

Constituent SignalsList of received signals for an adaptive rate (pipe mode) optical port.

CostCost is used to help determine the efficiency of any given path. Cost is provisioned for aport (depending on speed of transmission) and calculated automatically for a path (sumof the port costs for the path).

CPCircuit Pack

CPECustomer Premises Equipment

CRCritical (alarm status)

Craft Interface Terminal (CIT)The user interface terminal used by craft personnel to communicate with a networkelement.

Credit IntervalThe provisioned interval for adding tokens to the token bucket used by the peakinformation rate policer. This affects policing for all VLANs (in 802.1Q mode), all porttags (in transparent mode), and all Private Line services (in Private Line or No Tagmode).

Critical (CR)Alarm that indicates a severe, service-affecting condition.

Cross-Connect CapacityThe total bandwidth of cross-connections as measured by the bandwidth of input andoutput tributaries. A system with N STS-1 equivalent input tributaries and N STS-1equivalent output tributaries (referred to as″NxN″) provides a cross-connection capacityof N STS-1 equivalents. This system could provide N one-way point-to-pointcross-connections or N2 two-way point-to-point cross-connections at the equivalent rateof STS-1.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-8 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Cross-Connect LoopbackA cross-connection from an input tributary to the output of that same tributary via thecross-connect fabric.

Cross-Connect RateThe attribute of a cross-connection that defines the constituent signal rate(s) it can carry.For a cross-connection with an STS-3 pipe cross-connection rate, the constituent signalscarried by the cross-connection can be either an STS-3c signal or three STS-1 signals.Similarly, for a cross-connection with an STS-12 pipe cross-connection rate, theconstituent signals carried by the cross-connection can be either an STS-1 signal or anallowed mix of STS-12c signals and STS-3c signals.

CSFClient Signal Fail

CTLController

CTSCustomer Technical Support; now known as Technical Support Services (TSS)

Cut-ThroughRefers to a simple ASCII interface to an NE. It enables the user to send TL1 messagesdirectly to the NE with no interpretation or assistance provided by the WaveStar CIT.

CVCoding Violation

CVFECoding Violation Far End

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D DACSDigital Access Cross-Connect System

DACS III-2000Digital Access and Cross-Connect System that provides clear channel switching at eitherthe DS3 or the STS-1 rates, eliminating the need for manual DSXs.

DACS IV-2000Digital Access and Cross-Connect System that provides electronic DS3/STS-1 orDS1/VT1.5 cross-connect capability, eliminating the need for manual DSXs.

Data Communications Channel (DCC)The embedded overhead communications channel in the synchronous line, used forend-to-end communications and maintenance. The DCC carries alarm, control, and statusinformation between network elements in a synchronous network.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-9

Data Communications Equipment (DCE)The equipment that provides signal conversion and coding between the data terminatingequipment (DTE) and the line. The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral partof the DTE or of intermediate equipment. A DCE may perform other functions usuallyperformed at the network end of the line.

Data Terminating Equipment (DTE)The equipment that originates data for transmission and accepts transmitted data.

dBDecibels

DCDirect Current

DCCData Communications Channel

DCEData Communications Equipment

DDM-2000Alcatel-Lucent’s SONET multiplexers that multiplex DS1, DS3, or EC-1 inputs intoEC-1, OC-1, OC-3, or OC-12 outputs.

Default ProvisioningThe parameter values that are preprogrammed from the factory.

DemultiplexingA process applied to a multiplexed signal for recovering signals combined within it andfor restoring the distinct individual channels of these signals.

DEMUXDemultiplexer

DEMUX - DemultiplexerThe DEMUX direction is from the fiber toward the DSX.

Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM)Transmitting two or more signals of different wavelengths simultaneously over a singlefiber.

Digital Cross-Connect Panel (DSX)A panel designed to interconnect to equipment that operates at a designated rate. Forexample, a DSX-3 interconnects equipment operating at the DS3 rate.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-10 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Digital MultiplexerEquipment that combines time-division multiplexing several digital signals into a singlecomposite digital signal.

Digital Signal Levels 0, 1, 3 (DS0, DS1, DS3)An ANSI-defined signal or service level corresponding to the following: DS0 is 64 Kb/s,DS1 is 1.544 Mb/s (equivalent to T1), and DS3 is 44.736 Mb/s (equivalent to 28 T1channels or T3).

Directory Services Network Element (DSNE)A designated network element that is responsible for administering a database that mapsnetwork element names (TIDs) to addresses (NSAPs - network service access points) inan OSI subnetwork. There can be one DSNE per ring. Can also be a GNE.

Disable adminAn Ethernet port that does not participate in the spanning tree. The port is disabled bymanagement.

Disable failureA port in this state does not participate in the spanning tree. The port is disabled due toa hardware or software failure.

DLCDigital Loop Carrier

DRIDual Ring Interworking

DS1Digital Signal Level 1

DS3Digital Signal Level 3

DS3 FormatSpecifies the line format of a DS3 interface port, such as M23 or C-bit parity.

DSCPDifferentiated Services Code Point

DSLAMDigital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer

DSNEDirectory Services Network Element

DSXDigital Cross-Connect Panel

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-11

DTEData Terminating Equipment

Dual HomingA network topology in which two OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48 shelves serve as hosts.

DWDMDense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E E1E1 is an SDH/PDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy/Pleiseosynchronous DigitalHierarchy, the European equivalent of SONET/DSx) electrical signal comparable to (butslightly faster than) a DS1. E1 is also sometimes called CEPT-1 (Conference ofEuropean Posts and Telecommunications) and is at 2.048 Mbps.

EC-1Electrical Carrier Level 1

EC-1, EC-n - Electrical CarrierThe basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an EC-1 signaland a rate of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an EC-n signal. An EC-1 signal can be built intwo ways: A DS1 can be mapped into a VT1.5 signal and 28 VT1.5 signals multiplexedinto an EC-1 (VT1.5 based EC-1), or a DS3 can be mapped directly into an EC-1 (DS3based EC-1).

ECIEquipment Catalog Item

EEPROMElectrically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EIAElectronic Industries Association

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)A measure of equipment tolerance to external electromagnetic fields.

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)High-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields that cause data corruption in cablespassing through the fields.

Electronic Industries Association (EIA)A trade association of the electronic industry that establishes electrical and functionalstandards.

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-12 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

EMCElectromagnetic Compatibility

EMIElectromagnetic Interference

Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON)A 200-Mbps data signal used in storage area networking applications.

EOOFExcessive Out of Frame

EoSEthernet over SONET

EPORTEthernet Port

EPROMErasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EQEquipped (memory administrative state)

EQPTEquipment

Equipment Catalog Item (ECI)The bar code number on the faceplate of each circuit pack used by some inventorysystems.

Errored Seconds (ES)A performance monitoring parameter.

ESErrored Seconds

ESDElectrostatic Discharge

ESFExtended Super Frame

ESTEnvironmental Stress Testing

EstablishA user initiated command, at the WaveStar CIT, to create an entity and its associatedattributes in the absence of certain hardware. (Does not apply to 1665 DMXplore

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-13

Ethernet over SONET (EoS)EoS VCGs (v17 through v22 on the LNW78 circuit pack) carry SONET trafficencapsulated in GFP.

EventA significant change. Events in controlled Network Elements include signal failures,equipment failures, signals exceeding thresholds, and protection switch activity. When anevent occurs in a controlled Network Element, the controlled Network Element willgenerate an alarm or status message and send it to the management system.

Extended Superframe Format (ESF)A T1 format that uses the framing bit for non-intrusive signaling and control. A T1frame is sent 8,000 times a second, with each frame consisting of a payload of 192 bits,and with each frame preceded by a framing bit. Because ESF only requires 2,000framing bits for synchronization, the remaining 6,000 framing bits can be used for errordetection.

Externally TimedAn operating condition of a clock in which it is locked to an external reference and isusing time constants that are altered to quickly bring the local oscillator’s frequency intoapproximate agreement with the synchronization reference frequency.

Extra trafficUnprotected traffic that is carried over protection channels when their capacity is notused for the protection of working traffic. However, the extra traffic is unprotected andis preempted (lost) if a protection switch is activated. Preempted traffic is reestablishedwhen the protection switch clears.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

F FacilityA one- or two-way circuit that carries a transmission signal.

Facility LoopbackA facility loopback is where an entire line is looped back.

Facility RollThe disconnection of the circuit cross-connecting input tributary to an output tributaryfollowed, within the required completion time, by a cross-connection of an inputtributary to an output tributary.

Failures in Time (FIT)Circuit pack failure rates per 109 hours as calculated using the method described inReliability Prediction Procedure for Electronic Equipment, Telcordia Method I, Issue 5,September 1995.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-14 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Far End (FE)Any other network element in a maintenance subnetwork other than the one the user isat or working on. Also called remote.

Far-End Receive Failure (FERF)An indication returned to a transmitting Network Element that the receiving NetworkElement has detected an incoming section failure. Also known as RFI (Remote FailureIndication).

FaultTerm used when a circuit pack has a hard (not temporary) fault and cannot perform itsnormal function.

Fault ManagementCollecting, processing, and forwarding of autonomous messages from network elements.

FCFibre Channel

FC-1GFibre Channel - 1 Gigabit

FC-2GFibre Channel - 2 Gigabit

FCCFederal Communications Commission

FEFar End

FEFast Ethernet

FE ACTYFar End Activity

FEBEFar End Block Error

FECForward Error Correction

FEPROMFlash EPROM

Fibre Channel - 1G (FC-1G)A Fibre Channel 1.0625 Gbps data signal.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-15

Fibre Channel -2G (FC-2G)A Fibre Channel 2.1250 Gbps data signal.

Fibre Connection (FICON)A 1.0625 Gbps data signal.

File Transfer and Access Management (FTAM)FTAM is the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) standard for file transfer, file access,and file management.

Filtering databaseThe filtering database maintains a dynamic list of paths to which packets should berouted based on the destination address. The database entries are created, updated, andremoved by the learning process.

FITFailures in 109 hours of operation.

Flash EPROMA technology that combines the characteristics of nonvolatile EPROM with theprogrammability of EEPROM (electrically-erasable PROM).

FNFunction Unit

ForcedTerm used when a protected entity (either working or protection) has been locked into aservice-providing state by user command.

Forced Switch to ProtectionThe WaveStar CIT command that forces the protection group to be the Active Unit. Theclear command is required to remove the Forced Switch state. While in the ForcedSwitch state the system may not switch the active unit either automatically, by means ofthe WaveStar® CITForced Switch, or Manual Switch command.

ForwardingThe state in which an Ethernet port participates in frame relay.

Free RunningAn operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is locked to an internalsynchronization reference and is using no storage techniques to sustain its accuracy.

FT-2000An Alcatel-Lucent SONET OC-48 Lightwave System.

FTAMFile Transfer and Access Management

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-16 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

FTAM-FTP GatewayIn Release 3.0 and later releases, the 1665 DMXplore supports an FTAM-FTP gatewayfunction. This is also referred to as file transfer translation device (FTTD). The FTTDtranslates FTAM over OSI presentation to FTP over TCP/IP.

Function Unit (FN)Refers to any one of a number of different circuit packs that can reside in the A, B, C,or D function unit slots on shelf.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G Gateway Network Element (GNE)A network element that passes information between other network elements andmanagement systems through a data communication network.

GBGigabytes

Gb/sGigabits per second

GbEGigabit Ethernet

Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)The Generic Framing Procedure, described in ITU-T G.7041/Y1303, provides a genericmechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over a SONET network.

GFPGeneric Framing Procedure

GHzGigahertz

GNEGateway Network Element

GR-XXXTelcordia Technologies (Bellcore) General Requirement-XXX

GUIGraphical User Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

H Hairpin RoutingA cross-connection between function units (inter-function unit). For example, functionunit C to function units A, B, or D. Also, a cross-connection within the same functionunit (intra-function unit). Cross-connections go through Main, but no bandwidth or time

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-17

slots are taken from the backbone ring. Eliminates need for another shelf.

Hashed FTPIn Release 3.0 and later releases, the hashed FTP (digital signature) capability preventstampering with a downloadable software image.

HoldoverAn operating condition of a network element in which its local oscillator is not lockedto any synchronization reference but is using storage techniques to maintain its accuracywith respect to the last known frequency comparison with a synchronization reference.

HSHigh Speed

HzHertz

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I I/OInput/Output

IAO LANIntraoffice Local Area Network

IDIdentifier

IECInternational Electrotechnical Commission

IEEEInstitute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IMFInfant Mortality Factor

In-Service (IS)A memory administrative state for ports. IS refers to a port that is fully monitored andalarmed.

INCIncoming Status

InsertTo physically insert a circuit pack into a slot, thus causing a system-initiated restorationof an entity to service and/or creation of an entity and its associated attributes.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-18 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Intermediate Reach (IR)A term used to describe distances of 15 to 40 km between optical transmitter andreceiver without regeneration. See long reach.

IPInternet Protocol

IRIntermediate Reach

ISIn Service

ISDNIntegrated Services Digital Network

ISOInternational Standards Organization

ISPInternet Service Provider

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

J JitterTiming jitter is defined as short-term variations of the significant instants of a digitalsignal from their ideal positions in time.

Jumbo frameJumbo frames increase network efficiency by reducing the number of frames to beprocessed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

K Kb/sKilobits per second

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L LAGLink Aggregation Group

LANLocal Area Network

LAPDLink Access Procedure″D″

LBCLaser Bias Current

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-19

LBOLightguide Build Out

LCASLink Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCNLocal Communications Network

LECLocal Exchange Carrier

LEDLight-Emitting Diode

LFDLoss of Frame Delineation

LGXLightguide Cross-Connect

Light Emitting Diode (LED)Used on a circuit pack faceplate to show failure (red) or service state. It is also used toshow the alarm and status condition of the system.

Lightguide Build-Out (LBO)An attenuating (signal-reducing) element used to keep an optical output signal strengthwithin desired limits.

Lightguide Cross-Connect (LGX)A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical networkelement (NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE withoutchanging the cabling on the NE itself.

LineA transmission medium, together with the associated equipment, required to provide themeans of transporting information between two consecutive network elements. Onenetwork element originates the line signal; the other terminates it.

Line TimingThe capability to directly derive clock timing from an incoming OC-N signal whileproviding the user the capability to provision whether switching to an alternate OC-Nfrom a different source (as opposed to entering holdover) will occur if the OC-Ncurrently used as the timing reference for that NE becomes unsuitable as a reference.For example, intermediate nodes in a linear network are line timed. See Loop Timing.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-20 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Link AggregationA method of combining a group of IEEE 802.3 Ethernet links into a single logical linkof up to the aggregate rate.

Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)LCAS is an enhancement to SONET/SDH Virtual Concatenation that allows adding orremoving Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG) members, to vary its bandwidth, bymanagement command. It also automatically removes and restores failed members.

ListeningThe state in which an Ethernet port is preparing to participate in frame relay. In thelistening state, frame relay is disabled. This is an interim state between blocking andlearning.

LOALoss of Alignment

LocalSee Near-End.

Local Area Network (LAN)A communications network that covers a limited geographic area, is privately owned anduser administered, is mostly used for internal transfer of information within a business,is normally contained within a single building or adjacent group of buildings, andtransmits data at a very rapid speed.

Locked DSn Cross-ConnectionsLocked DSn cross-connections add/drop traffic to/from only one rotation of a UPSR.Path switching is disabled. Timeslots can be reused at different nodes around the UPSR.

LOFLoss of Frame

Long Reach (LR)A term used to describe distances of 40 km or more between optical transmitter andreceiver without regeneration. See Intermediate Reach.

LoopbackType of diagnostic test used to compare an original transmitted signal with the resultingreceived signal. A loopback is established when the received optical or electrical externaltransmission signal is sent from a port or tributary input directly back toward the output.

LOPLoss of Pointer

LOSLoss of Signal

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-21

Loss of Alignment (LOA)One or more STS-1s that compose a VCG are out of multiframe alignment because ofexcess delay difference.

Loss of Frame (LOF)A failure to synchronize to an incoming signal.

Loss of Frame Delineation (LFD)Lack of sufficient bandwidth that is reported when there is a mismatch in the number ofSTS tributaries.

Loss of Pointer (LOP)A failure to extract good data from an STS-n payload.

Loss of Signal (LOS)The complete absence of an incoming signal.

LPBKLoopback

LRLong Reach

LSLow Speed

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M M23-FormatA standard framing format used for DS3 signals produced by multiplexing 28 DS1s intoa DS3 (sometimes referred to as M13-format, without C-bit parity).

MACMedia Access Control

MAC AddressA unique hardware address that identifies each node of a network.

MainThe two slots (M-1 and M-2) on a 1665 DMXplore shelf in which the OC-48 or OC-192high speed OLIU circuit packs are installed.

Maintenance ConditionAn equipment state in which some normal service functions are suspended, eitherbecause of a problem or to perform special functions (copy memory) that can not beperformed while normal service is being provided.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-22 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

MajorIndicates a service-affecting failure, main or unit controller failure, or power supplyfailure.

MBMegabytes

Mb/sMegabits per second

Minor (MN)Indicates a non-service-affecting failure of equipment or facility.

Miscellaneous Discrete InterfaceAllows an operations system to control and monitor equipment collocated within a set ofinput and output contact closures.

MJMajor Alarm

MMMultimode

MMLhuMan-Machine Language

MNMinor Alarm

MPEGMoving Picture Experts Group

MTBFMean Time Between Failures

MTBMAMean Time Between Maintenance Activities

MultMultiplying

MultiplexerA device (circuit pack) that combines two or more transmission signals into a combinedsignal on a shared medium.

MultiplexingThe process of combining multiple signals into a larger signal at the transmitter by amultiplexer. The large signal is then split into the original smaller signals at the receiver

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-23

by a demultiplexer.

MUXMultiplex

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N NANot Applicable

NARTACNorth American Regional Technical Assistance Center

NENear End

NENetwork Element

NE ACTYNear-End Activity

Near EndThe network element the user is at or working on. Also called local.

NEBSNetwork Equipment-Building System

Network Element (NE)A node in a telecommunication network that supports network transport services and isdirectly manageable by a management system.

Network Element (NE)The basic building block of a telecommunications equipment within a telecommunicationnetwork that meets SONET standards. Typical internal attributes of a network elementinclude: one or more high- and low-speed transmission ports, built-in intelligence,synchronization and timing capability, and access interfaces for use by technicians and/oroperation systems. In addition, a network element may also include a time slotinterchanger.

Network Service Access Point (NSAP) AddressNetwork Service Access Point Address (used in the OSI network layer 3). Anautomatically assigned number that uniquely identifies a Network Element for thepurposes of routing DCC messages.

Network Time ProtocolNetwork time protocol is an easy, accurate, and automatic method to get and synchronizedate/time.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-24 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

nmNanometer (10-9 meters)

NMANetwork Monitoring and Analysis

NMONNot Monitored (provisioning state)

No Request StateThis is the routine-operation quiet state in which no external command activities areoccurring.

NodeA network element in a ring or, more generally, in any type of network. In a networkelement supporting interfaces to more than one ring, node refers to an interface that is ina particular ring. Node is also defined as all equipment that is controlled by one systemcontroller. A node is not always directly manageable by a management system.

Non-Revertive SwitchingIn non-revertive switching, an active and standby line exist on the network. When aprotection switch occurs, the standby line is selected to support traffic, thereby becomingthe active line. The original active line then becomes the standby line. This statusremains in effect even when the fault clears. That is, there is no automatic switch backto the original status.

Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)Memory that retains its stored data after power has been removed. An example of NVMwould be a hard disk.

Nonpreemptive unprotected traffic (NUT)Traffic carried on (working and/or protection) BLSR channels for which protectionswitching has been provisioned as disabled. NUT must be employed when using analternate protection scheme for data such as RSTP. As the name implies, NUT isunprotected and not preempted in the event of a protection switch. NUT carried onnonpreemptive unprotected channels affords a higher level of survivability as comparedto extra traffic, which is preempted during a protection switch, but a lower level ofsurvivability as compared to working traffic, which is carried on its correspondingprotection channel during a protection switch.

Not Monitored (NMON)A provisioning state for equipment that is not monitored or alarmed.

NRNot Reported

NRZNon-return to Zero

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-25

NSANot Service Affecting

NSAP AddressNetwork Service Access Point Address (used in the OSI network layer 3)

NTFNo Trouble Found

NTPNetwork time protocol

NUTNon-preemptive unprotected traffic

NVMNon-Volatile Memory

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O OAM&POperations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning

OC, OC-n - Optical CarrierThe optical signal that results from an optical inversion of an STS signal; that is, OC-1from STS-1 and OC-n from STS-n.

OC-1Optical Carrier, Level 1 Signal (51.84 Mb/s)

OC-1Optical Carrier Level 1 Signal (51.844 Mb/s).


OC-12Optical Carrier Level 12 Signal (622 Mb/s).

OC-192Optical Carrier, Level 192 Signal (9953.28 Mb/s) (10 Gb/s)



Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-26 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007



OC48Optical Carrier, Level 48 Signal (2488.32 Mb/s) (2.5 Gb/s)

OIOperations Interworking

OLIUOptical Line Interface Unit

OOFOut of Frame

OOLOut of Lock

OOSOut-of-Service

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)Referring to the OSI reference model, a logical structure for network operationsstandardized by the International Standards Organization (ISO).

Operations InterfaceAny interface providing you with information on the system behavior or control. Theseinclude the equipment LEDs, SYSCTL faceplate, WaveStar CIT, office alarms, and alltelemetry interfaces.

Operations Interworking (OI)The capability to access, operate, provision, and administer remote systems through craftinterface access from any site in a SONET/SDH network or from a centralizedoperations system.

Operations System (OS)A central computer-based system used to provide operations, administration, andmaintenance functions.

OPS/INEOperations System/Intelligent Network Element

OSOperations System

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-27

OSIOpen Systems Interconnection

OSMINEOperations Systems Modifications for the Integration of Network Elements

OSPOutside Plant

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P P-bitPerformance Bit

Pass ThroughPaths that are cross-connected directly across an intermediate node in a ring network.

PathA logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signalat the given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for thesignal is disassembled.

Path Protection GroupThe part of a cross-connection topology that is provisioned to provide path-levelprotection switching for all the constituent signals carried by the cross-connection. Apath protection group can be identified as an entity by its logical output tributary and itscross-connection rate. A path protection group consists of one or more constituent pathselectors.

PCPersonal Computer

PCMCIAPersonal Computer Memory Card International Association

Peak Information Rate PolicerThe peak information rate policer meters packet traffic leaving the internal packet switchand going toward the SONET network. If the packets exceed the provisioned peakinformation rate, the packets are dropped.

Performance Monitoring (PM)Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems(before an alarm would be generated).

PIDProgram Identification

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-28 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Pipe Mode1665 DMXplore supports cross-connections on adaptive rate OC-n ports (pipe mode).The signal rates adapt to the supported set of signal rates. Cross-connections may beprovisioned at any cross-connection rate that is supported for the tributaries associatedwith the OC-n ports. A cross-connection can carry any set of constituent signals;however, the total of the constituent signal rates must not exceed the cross-connectionrate. Fault monitoring and performance monitoring occur on the accepted incoming rates.

PIRPeak information rate

PJCPointer Justification Count

Plesiochronous NetworkA network that contains multiple maintenance subnetworks, each internally synchronousand all operating at the same nominal frequency, but whose timing may be slightlydifferent at any particular instant. For example, in SONET networks, each timingtraceable to their own Stratum 1 clock are considered plesiochronous with respect toeach other

PLLPhase-Locked Loop

PMPerformance Monitoring

POPPoints of Presence

Port (also called Line)The physical interface, consisting of both an input and output, where an electrical oroptical transmission interface is connected to the system and may be used to carry trafficbetween network elements. The words port and line may often be used synonymously.Port emphasizes the physical interface, and line emphasizes the interconnection. Eithermay be used to identify the signal being carried.

Port Protection GroupA user provisioned association of protected optical interface ports. This association isused for line protection. The group of ports represent both a protection switching entityand also a set of lines that carry services to/from another network element. The portprotection groups also determine the set of logical tributaries from and to whichcross-connections can be provisioned.

Port State ProvisioningA feature that allows a user to suppress alarm reporting and performance monitoringduring provisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service, and not

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-29

monitored) for low-speed ports.

POTSPlain Old Telephone Service

PRBSPsuedo-random Bit Sequence

Proactive MaintenanceRefers to the process of detecting degrading conditions not severe enough to initiateprotection switching or alarming, but indicative of an impending signal fail or signaldegrade defect (for example, performance monitoring).

ProtectionExtra capacity (channels, circuit packs) in transmission equipment that is not intended tobe used for service, but rather to serve as backup against failures.

Protection GroupA logical grouping of ports or circuit packs that share a common protection scheme, forexample, UPSR switching or 1+1 line.

PROTNProtection

ProvisioningThe modification of certain programmable parameters that define how the node functionswith various installed entities. These modifications are initiated locally or remotely byeither a CIT or an OS. They may arrive at the node via the IAO LAN, CIT port, or anyDCC channel. The provisioned data is maintained in NVM and/or hardware registers.

PTMPluggable Transmission Module

PWRPower

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Q QoSQuality of Service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R RAIRemote Alarm Indication

RAMRandom Access Memory

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-30 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

RDIRemote Defect Indication

Reactive MaintenanceRefers to detecting defects/failures and clearing them.

RemoteSee Far-End (FE).

Remote Defect Indication (RDI)An indication returned to a transmitting terminal that the receiving terminal has detectedan incoming section failure. [Previously called far-end-receive failure (FERF).]

Remote Network ElementAny Network Element that is connected to the referenced Network Element througheither an electrical or optical link. It may be the adjacent node on a ring, or N nodesaway from the reference. It also may be at the same physical location but is usually atanother (remote) site.

RevertiveA protection switching mode in which, after a protection switch occurs, the equipmentreturns to the nominal configuration (that is, the service equipment is active, and theprotection equipment is standby) after the clearing of any failure conditions that causeda protection switch to occur or after any external switch commands are reset.SeeNon-Revertive.

RFIRemote Failure Indication

RingA configuration of nodes comprised of network elements connected in a circular fashion.Under normal conditions, each node is interconnected with its neighbor and includescapacity for transmission in either direction between adjacent nodes. Path switched ringsuse a head-end bridge and tail-end switch. Line switched rings actively reroute trafficover a protection line.

Ring (0x1) Low-Speed InterfaceFormerly referred to as dual 0x1 or single 0x1. In ring applications, the shelf may use a0x1 interface, meaning both fibers carry service, as opposed to a linear (1+1) low-speedinterface where one fiber is used for service and other for protection.See 1+1.

Root nodeThe node from which path cost to any other node is measured.

RPRResilient Packet Ring

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-31

RSTPRapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RTACAlcatel-Lucent Regional Technical Assistance Center (1-800-225-RTAC)

RTRVRetrieve

RURack Unit

RZReturn to Zero

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S SAService Affecting

SARBStatus All Resources Busy

SARB ErrorThis error response indicates the condition “Status, All Resources Busy.”

SDSignal Degrade

SEFSSeverely Errored Frame Seconds

Self-HealingRing architecture in which two or more fibers are used to provide route diversity. Nodefailures only affect traffic dropped at the failed node.

ServiceThe operational mode of a physical entity that indicates that the entity is providingservice. This designation will change with each switch action.

SESSeverely Errored Seconds

Severely Errored Seconds (SES)This performance monitoring parameter is a second in which a signal failure occurs, ormore than a preset amount of coding violations (dependent on the type of signal) occur.

SFSuper Frame (format for DS1 signal)

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-32 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

SFPSmall Form Factor Pluggable

Shelf IDA switch-settable parameter with values from 1 to 8. Used to log into a selected shelf ina bay using the CIT. (Does not apply to 1665 DMXplore)

Shelf ViewA graphical depiction of one shelf. Selectable objects in this view are the shelf, theslots/circuit packs, and the ports.

SIDSystem Identification

Site IDA switch-settable parameter with values from 1 to 8. Displayed on the SYSCTL circuitpack to indicate to which site the faceplate alarms and LEDs apply. (Does not apply to1665 DMXplore)

SlotA physical position in a shelf for holding a circuit pack and connecting it to thebackplane. This term is also used loosely to refer to the collection of ports or tributariesconnected to a physical circuit pack placed in a slot.

SMSingle Mode

SMCSONET Minimum Clock

SNMPSimple Network Management Protocol

Software BackupThe process of saving an image of the current network element’s databases, which arecontained in its NVM, to a remote location. The remote location could be the WaveStarCIT or an OS.

Software DownloadThe process of transferring a software generic from a remote entity to the target networkelement’s memory. The remote entity may be the WaveStar CIT or an OS. The downloadprocedure uses bulk transfer to move a binary file into the network element.

SONETSynchronous Optical NETwork

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-33

Spanning Tree GroupNodes can be provisioned to belong to a spanning tree group. Only the nodes within thatgroup participate in the spanning tree for the group.

SPESynchronous Payload Envelope

Squelch MapThis map contains information for each cross-connection in a ring and indicates thesource and destination nodes for the low-speed circuit that is part of thecross-connection. This information is used to prevent traffic connection errors in ringswith isolated nodes or segments.

SRDSoftware Release Description

StandbyStandby identifies a protected entity which is not currently selected by the receiver ateither end as the payload carrying signal hat is not currently carrying service.See Active.

Standing ConditionA standing condition (SC) is either an event (usually user initiated such as a switchrequest) or an alarm that is provisioned NA (Not Alarmed).

StatusThe indication of a short-term change in the system.

STQSecondary Transit Queue

Stratum 3 Timing GeneratorThe timing generator circuit pack, located in the high-speed OLIU circuit pack, thatgenerates clock signals for distribution to the transmit circuits. It operates in thefree-running, line-timing, externally times, and holdover modes.

STS, STS-nSynchronous Transport Signal

STS, STS-n - Synchronous Transport SignalThe basic building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and arate of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal.

STS-1 SPESTS-1 Synchronous Payload Envelope

STS-1 SPE - STS-1 Synchronous Payload EnvelopeA 125-microsecond frame structure composed of STS path overhead and the STS-1payload.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-34 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

STS-12cSynchronous Transport Level 12 Concatenated Signal


STS-3cSynchronous Transport Level 3 Concatenated Signal.See OC-3c.


STUSynchronized - Traceability Unknown

SubnetworkA group of interconnected/interrelated Network Elements. The most common connotationis a synchronous network in which the Network Elements have data communicationschannel (DCC) connectivity.

Superframe Format (SF)A DS1 framing format in which 24 DS0 time slots plus a coded framing bit areorganized into a frame which is repeated 12 times to form the superframe.

SuspendSuspend refers to temporarily stopping an upgrade in progress.

Synchronization MessagingSONET synchronization messaging is used to communicate the quality of networktiming, internal timing status, and timing states throughout a subnetwork.

Synchronous NetworkThe synchronization of transmission systems with synchronous payloads to a master(network) clock that can be traced to a reference clock.

Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)The North American standard for the rates and formats that defines optical signals andtheir constituents.

Synchronous PayloadPayloads that can be derived from a network transmission signal by removing integralnumbers of bits from every frame. Therefore, no variable bit-stuffing rate adjustmentsare required to fit the payload in the transmission signal.

Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE)The combined payload and path overhead of an STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c or STS-48csignal.

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-35

SYSCTLSystem Controller (circuit pack)

SYSCTL - System ControllerThe system controller circuit pack that provides overall administrative control of theterminal.

System ViewA graphical depiction of the entire Network Element. Selectable objects in this view arethe bays and shelves.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T T1A carrier system that transmits at the rate of 1.544 Mb/s (a DS1 signal).

T1X1 and T1M1The ANSI committees responsible for telecommunications standards

T2A carrier system that transmits at the rate of 6.312 Mbps (a DS2 signal).

T3A carrier system that transmits at the rate of 44.736 Mbps (a DS3 signal).

TATelcordia Technologies Technical Advisory

Target Identifier (TID)A provisionable parameter that is used to identify a particular Network Element within anetwork. It is a character string of up to 20 characters where the characters are letters,digits, or hyphens (-).

TARPTarget Identifiers Address Resolution Protocol

TBDTo Be Determined

TCAThreshold-Crossing Alert

TCP/IPTransmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TDCTARP Data Cache

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-36 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

TDMTime Division Multiplexing

Telcordia TechnologiesTelcordia Technologies (formerly Bellcore) is a well-recognized telecommunications’standards organization.

Test AccessA set of cross-connection topologies used in conjunction with a testing system tomonitor and split signal paths for purposes of fault isolation.

Threshold-Crossing Alert (TCA)A message type sent from a Network Element that indicates that a certain performancemonitoring parameter has exceeded a specified threshold.

Through (or Continue) Cross-ConnectionA cross-connection within a ring, where the input and output tributaries have the sametributary number but are in lines opposite each other.

Through TimingRefers to a network element that derives its transmit timing in the east direction from areceived line signal in the east direction and its transmit timing in the west directionfrom a received line signal in the west direction.

THzTerahertz (1012 Hz)

TIDTarget Identifier

Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)A technique for transmitting a number of separate data, voice, and/or video signalssimultaneously over one communications medium by interleaving a portion of eachsignal one after another.

Time Slot Assignment (TSA)A capability that allows any tributary in a ring to be cross-connected to any tributary inany lower-rate, non-ring interface or to the same-numbered tributary in the opposite sideof the ring.

Time Slot Interchange (TSI)A set of nodes configured as a ring with paths established in both directions of the ring.Switching occurs per-path at the drop nodes.

TIRKSTrunks Integrated Records Keeping System

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-37

TL1Transaction Language 1

TRTelcordia Technologies Technical Requirement

Transaction Language One (TL1)The permission level associated with each user login that defines which commands theuser can execute.

Transparent ModeIn Transparent Mode, port tags (which are actually VLAN tags with a TPID value otherthan 8100hex) are used to separate traffic for different customers. A port tag is added toeach incoming frame at the ingress LAN port. The port tag contains a provisionablecustomer ID and priority level.

TributaryA path-level unit of bandwidth within a port, or the constituent signal(s) being carried inthis unit of bandwidth, for example, an STS-1 tributary within an OC-N port.

TSATime Slot Assignment

TSITime Slot Interchange

TSOTechnical Support Organization

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U UASUnavailable Seconds

Unavailable Seconds (UAS)In performance monitoring, the count of seconds in which a signal is declared failed orin which 10 consecutively severely errored seconds (SES) occurred, until the time when10 consecutive non-SES occur.

Unidirectional Path-Switched Ring (UPSR)Path-Switched rings employ redundant fiber optic transmission facilities in a pairconfiguration, with one fiber transmitting in one direction (for example, East) and thebackup fiber transmitting in the other direction (for example, West). If the primary ringfails, then the protection ring takes over.

UPD/INITUpdate/Initialize

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-38 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

UPD/INITA push-button on the SYSCTL faceplate.

UPSRUnidirectional Path Switched Rings

User PrivilegePermits a user must perform on the computer system on which the system software runs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

V VACVolts Alternating Current

VCGVirtual Concatenation Group

VDCVolts Direct Current

Virtual LAN (VLAN)A virtual LAN (VLAN) is a subset of a LAN. A VLAN is created by putting VLAN IDsin packets that indicate membership to a VLAN of that ID. A Local Area Network(LAN) can have multiple VLANs within it, up to the number of IDs available. Members(ports) of different VLANs do not see the traffic of VLANs of which they are notmembers. A port may be a member of many VLANs (LAN ports in 802.1Q mode, WANports). In the Transparent mode, a LAN port is typically assigned membership to asingle VLAN.In Transparent mode, VLANs are assigned to ports using Port Tag (ed-eport and ed-vcg.In 802.1Q mode, VLANs are assigned to ports using VLAN IDs (ent-vlan/ed-vlan).A VLAN tag is the specific field of information in a packet that carries the VLAN IDnumber.

Virtual SwitchA virtual switch is a grouping of ports on an Ethernet switch that results in partitioningof the switch into multiple logical switches. A port may only be a member of one virtualswitch.

Virtual Tributary (VT)A structure designed for transport and switching of sub-STS-1 payloads. There arecurrently four sizes: VT1.5 (1.728 Mb/s), VT2 (2.304 Mb/s), VT3 (3.456 Mb/s), andVT6 (6.912 Mb/s).

VLANVirtual Local Area Network

VLFVery Large Fabric

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-39

VMViolation Monitor

VMRViolation Monitor and Removal

VoIPVoice over Internet Protocol

VPNVirtual Private Network

vslotVirtual Slot

VTVirtual Tributary

VT-G - Virtual Tributary GroupA 9-row by 12-column SONET structure (108 bytes) that carries one or more VTs of thesame size. Seven VT groups (756 bytes) are byte-interleaved within the VT-organizedSTS-1 synchronous payload envelope

VT1.5Virtual Tributary 1.5 (1.728 Mb/s)

VT1.5 TributaryA SONET logical signal with a data rate of 1.728 Mbps. In the 9-row structure of theSTS-1 SPE, a VT1.5 occupies three columns. VT-structured STS-1 SPEs are divided intoseven VT groups. Each VT group occupies twelve columns of the 9-row structure and,for VT1.5s, contains four VTs per group.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

W Wait to Restore Time (WRT)Corresponds to the time to wait before switching back after a failure has cleared (in arevertive protection scheme). The WRT can be between 0 and 12 minutes, in incrementsof one minute.

Wait-to-RenameWait to Rename timer for Optimized 1+1 optical line protection. After a protectionswitch clears, the system waits the provisioned length of time before renaming theworking section 1 and working section 2 as Primary and Secondary.

WANWide Area Network

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-40 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM)A means of increasing the information-carrying capacity of an optical fiber bysimultaneously transmitting signals at different wavelengths.

WDCSWideband Digital Cross-Connect System

WDMWavelength Division Multiplexing

Wide Area Network (WAN)A communication network that uses common-carrier provided lines and covers anextended geographical area.

WizardA form of user assistance that automates a procedure through a dialog with the user.

WTRWait to Restore Time

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

X XFP10 Gbps Small Form Factor Pluggable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Z Zero Code SuppressionA technique used to reduce the number of consecutive zeros in a line-codes signal(B3ZS for DS3 signals and B8ZS for DS1 signals).

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

GL-41

Index

Numerics

0x1 application mode,5-31

10/100BASE-TX,4-12

10/100T circuit pack

description,4-12

technical specifications,10-17, 10-28

12DS3/EC1 circuit pack

performance monitoring,5-36

.............................................................

A access panel,4-8

add/drop cross-connection,2-7,6-19

adjusted F&M Bit,5-36

administration,5-1

alarm cut-off,5-100

alarm gateway network element(AGNE), 2-12

alarms,2-12

alarm indication signal,5-22

critical, 5-5

DS1 threshold,10-14

groups,5-13

major, 5-5

minor, 5-5

office, 10-46

quad OC-3 threshold,10-20,10-21

Alcatel-Lucent products,5-13

applications,3-1, 3-3

area address,6-40, 6-42

arrangements, cabinet,6-9

auto provisioning,5-79

automatic provisioning,5-79

automatic synchronizationreconfiguration,6-31

.............................................................

B build-outs,7-6, 7-8, 10-32

burst-errored seconds,10-36

.............................................................

C C-Bit, 5-36

cabinet

arrangements,6-9

outside plant,6-9

cabling

cable requirements,4-23

installation,6-12

lightguide build-outs,7-6,7-8

capacity,1-8, 4-2

channel state provisioning,5-82

circuit breakers,4-22, 6-14,10-12

circuit packs

10/100T description,4-12

available,4-9, 6-4

codes,4-9

descriptions,4-1

functionality, 1-7

LEDs, 5-6

Mains descriptions,4-15

quad OC-12 description,4-16

quad OC-3 description,4-15, 4-15, 4-16

sparing graphs,9-8

state reports,5-87

SYSCTL, 10-46

SYSCTL description,4-18

CIT LAN, 5-7, 10-44

client signal fail,1-12

configurations

shelf, 6-3

subnetwork,6-28

UPSR,5-32

control, 4-18, 4-20

course registration,8-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

IN-1

craft interface terminal,5-6,10-42

cross-connections,6-17

add/drop,2-7, 6-19

allowable,6-19

dual 0x1,2-7, 6-19

pass-through,2-7, 6-19

provisioning,5-78

single 0x1,2-7, 6-19

types,2-7

types of,6-18

current drain,4-22, 6-14, 10-12

customized login proprietarymessages,2-12

.............................................................

D data communications channel

compatibility, 5-17

provision, 5-16

specifications,10-44

user side and network side,5-16

DCC

compatibility, 5-17

enable/disable,5-16

dimensions,1-10

directory services,5-105

documentation, ordering,7-4

DS1, 10-14

DS3, 10-14, 10-16

performance monitoring(PM), 5-47

dual 0x1 cross-connection,2-7,6-19

dual homing,3-2

.............................................................

E earthquake requirements,10-10

electrical interfaces

10/100T,10-17, 10-28

embedded operations channel,4-20

engineering services,8-2

environmental considerations,6-13

equipment

indicators,10-46

LEDs, 10-46


ordering,7-6

equipment protection,5-33

Ethernet

10/100T interfaces,10-17,10-28

circuit packs,4-11

optical interfaces,1-12


performance monitoringparameters,5-58

external timing mode,10-37

.............................................................

F failure rates,9-5

feature release plan,1-12

fire resistance,10-10

FIT rates,9-5

forced switch,5-33

free running mode,2-13, 6-26,10-37

FTP/IP, 5-93

Function Units,4-3

.............................................................

G GbE, Private Line,3-2

Graphical User Interface,2-9

Growth slots,4-3

.............................................................

H hardware

access panel,4-8

cabling, 4-23

circuit packs,4-9, 4-15

control, 4-18

shelf description,4-2

history log, 5-89

holdover mode,2-13, 6-26,10-37

.............................................................

I IAO LAN

compatibility, 5-10, 5-15

ports, 5-9

remote operations,5-7

inactivity timeout period,5-109

inhibit switch, 5-33

installation services,8-2

internal testing,5-24

interworking, 5-13, 5-13

IP tunneling,5-93

IS-IS level 2 routing,5-104,6-44, 6-45, 6-47

.............................................................

J jitter, 10-35

jumpers,10-32

.............................................................

L lightguide build-outs,7-6, 7-8,10-32

lightguide jumpers,10-32

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-2 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

line build-outs,10-15

line parameter,5-37

line switching

automatic,5-31

line timing mode,2-13, 6-26,10-37

linear optical extensions,3-2

link budgets

1G LX, 10-30

locked DSn,1-12

login, 5-108

loopbacks,5-24, 10-14

.............................................................

M maintenance,5-1

history reports,5-89

remote,5-12

signaling,5-22

three-tiered operations,5-4

manual switch,5-33

maximum subnetwork size,6-49

miscellaneous discreteinterfaces,5-100, 5-115

miscellaneous equipment andtools, 7-6

modems,10-45

multi-vendor operationsinterworking, 5-15

multiple area addresses,6-42

multivendor operations,2-12

.............................................................

N network partitioning,2-12

network side,5-16

network size,5-104

network synchronization,6-24,6-25

networking capabilities,2-5

NMA, 2-12

NSAP AREA, 6-42

NSAP provisioning,5-105

.............................................................

O OC-3, 10-20, 10-21

OC-N performance parameters,5-55

OLIUs

OC-12 specifications,10-22

OC-3 specifications,10-25

operations,5-1

alarm groups,5-13

features,2-9

multi-vendor interworking,5-15

three-tiered,5-4

operations interfaces

LEDs, 10-46

levels, 4-18

miscellaneous discreteinterfaces,5-100, 5-115

office alarms interface,5-100

WaveStar CIT,10-42

operations interworking,2-12,5-13

optical

linear extensions,3-2

parameters,5-40, 5-45,5-51, 5-53, 5-55, 5-58

optical Ethernet,10-17

optical Ethernet, 100BASE-LX,SFPs, Private Line,4-11,10-28, 10-29


Ethernet,4-12

OC-12, 4-16

OC-3, 4-15, 4-15, 4-16

SONET specifications,10-22, 10-25

optical loopbacks,5-24

ordering

accessories,7-7

documentation,7-4

how to order,7-2


miscellaneous equipmentand tools,7-6

shelf assembly,7-3, 7-3

software,7-4

OS, 5-105

OSI, 1-10, 2-11, 5-15

OSI nodes,6-49

outside plant cabinet,6-9

.............................................................

P P-Bit, 5-36

parameters and traps,5-63

pass-through cross-connection,2-7, 6-19

password,5-108

password aging,2-12

path parameter,5-37

path state reports,5-87

path switched rings,5-32

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

IN-3

performance

status reports,5-86

system,10-33


data storage,5-60

DS3, 5-36

Ethernet interfaces,5-37

Ethernet specifications,5-58

line parameter,5-37

parameter thresholds,5-61

path parameter,5-37

reports,5-86

performance parameters

OC-N, 5-40, 5-45, 5-51,5-53, 5-55, 5-55, 5-58

STS, 5-51, 5-53

personal computerspecifications,10-45

physical arrangements,6-3

cabling, 6-12

physical description,4-1

physical specifications,10-3

power, 4-22, 6-14, 10-12

shelf, 10-9

port state

provisioning,5-81

reports,5-87

power requirements,4-22, 6-14,10-12

protection switching

equipment,5-33

path, 5-32

technical specifications,10-38

provisioning,5-1

auto provisioning,5-79

automatic,5-79

channel state,5-82

cross-connections,5-78

default, 5-76

parameter thresholds,5-61

port state,5-81

remote,5-77

reports,5-88

proxy ARP, 2-10

.............................................................

Q quad OC-12 circuit pack

description,4-16

quad OC-3 circuit pack

description,4-15, 4-15, 4-16

.............................................................

R remote

maintenance,5-12

provisioning,5-77

remote software copy,5-19

reports

alarm, 5-85

circuit pack states,5-87

maintenance history,5-89

path states,5-87


port states,5-87

provisioning,5-88

state,5-87

version/equipment list,5-90

.............................................................

S safety instructions,10-4

section DCC,5-17

security

capabilities,5-108

default login and password,5-109

system initialization,5-108

user types,5-108

service applications,3-3

services, worldwide,8-2

seven-layer protocol stack,1-10, 2-11

shelf

assembly,7-3, 7-3

capacity,1-8, 4-2, 4-2

configurations,6-3

description,4-2

front view, 4-2

Function Units,4-3

Growth slots,4-3

physical characteristics,10-9

size, 1-10, 4-2

signal performance,10-36

single 0x1 cross-connection,2-7, 6-19

single homing,3-2

SNMP, 2-11, 5-63

software download,2-10, 5-6,5-19, 10-45

software upgrades,2-4, 5-92

software, remote copy,5-19

SONET, 2-12

data communicationschannel,10-44

overhead bytes,10-34

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-4 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

sparing

circuit packs,9-8

graphs,9-8

specifications

environmental,10-10

physical,10-3, 10-9

technical,10-1

standards, transmissioninterfaces,10-8

status reports,5-86

STS performance parameters,5-51, 5-53

subnetwork configurations,timing, 6-28, 6-29

suitcasing, training courses,8-4

sync messaging,6-31, 6-31,6-31

synchronization,6-24

environment,6-25

external timing/line timing,6-29

features,2-13, 6-26

free running,2-13, 6-26

functions,2-13, 6-26

holdover,2-13, 6-26

line timing, 2-13, 6-26,6-28, 6-28

provisioning integrity,6-31

recommendations,6-25

sync messaging,6-31


timing modes,2-13, 6-26,10-37

SYSCTL circuit pack

description,4-18

faceplate,5-5, 10-46

remote access,4-18

system initialization,5-108

system overview,1-1

system performance,10-33

jitter, 10-35

protection switching,10-38


SONET overhead bytes,10-34


transient performance,10-39

transmission delay,10-40

wander,10-35

system planning andengineering,6-1, 6-17

.............................................................

T TARP

data cache,5-107, 5-107

directory services,5-105

multi-vendor operations,5-15

NSAP-to-TID translations,5-106

operations,1-10

overview, 2-12

parameters,5-105

propagation,5-106

provisioning,5-105

TID-to-NSAP translations,5-106

TCP/IP, 5-9, 10-44


10/100T,10-17, 10-28

DS3, 10-16

OC-3, 10-20, 10-21


physical,10-3

power, 4-22, 6-14, 10-12

protection switching,10-38


SONET overhead bytes,10-34


system performance,10-33


transmission delay,10-40

TEMS, 2-12

threshold crossing alerts

description,5-61

reports,5-86

transmission to OS,5-62

TID provisioning, 5-105

time and date synchronization,5-98

timing

distribution questions,6-38

timing modes,2-13, 6-26,10-37

external timing/line timing,6-29

free running,2-13, 6-26,6-28, 6-28

holdover,2-13, 6-26

line timing, 2-13, 6-26

TIRKS, 2-12

TL1

command builder,2-9

compatibility, 5-15

management,2-9

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007

IN-5

messaging,2-9

over TCP/IP,10-44

remote,5-7

translation device,10-44

TL1 Translation Device (T-TD),2-9, 5-93

tools, 7-6

topologies

1850 TSS-5,3-1

business access,3-4

Ethernet extension,3-8

optical, 3-2

packet,3-12

wireless optical buildout,3-6


transmission

delay, 10-40

interface standards,electrical,10-8

interface standards,Ethernet,10-8

.............................................................

U unprotected paths,5-31

update/initialize,5-5

UPSR

configurations,5-32

path protection,5-32

specifications,10-38

upgrades,2-4

user side,5-16

user types,5-108

.............................................................

V V4 byte, 10-34

VLNC10, 2-2

VLNC15, 2-2

VLNC25, 2-2

VLNC26, 2-2

VLNC30, 2-2, 4-11, 4-12,10-17, 10-28, 10-29

VLNC5, 2-2, 10-14, 10-16,10-20, 10-21

VLNC6, 2-2, 10-14, 10-16,10-20, 10-21

VLNC8, 2-2

VLNC9, 2-2

VT1.5 granularity,2-5

.............................................................

W wander,10-35

WaveStar CIT

functionality, 5-26

operations,2-9, 5-6

passwords,5-109

requirements,10-42

worldwide services,8-2

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-6 365-372-331R2.1Issue 1, July 2007